A 55246%
H 3
i9~ I 




i
i
117n             7                                                      i
I -r


ffEPHff ESJAVliLDING~
L~~VR$ITY OF NICHtGAN..


-~~~~~~~                                        o  f~~~~~~~~




I 11-2. )-. lu
A -
(,-.) ac),P,
/\q







I I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
I
I1




WA/i/.HAWAIA                                         _ISLANDS
V'   ~~~KAUA I                        Mdp Compiledlfoi- die H~wdii Pomoi'ion Commidee
*  I/A Wit/Will               i~~~~~~5y   PDKlNto & H-ILE NEWTON
NIIHAU       WA                                               0 0 
WA/A4   A/U//
O A H U      X.4A/LAW*  A/AN.4  A/5O'~.'e, H  '7'  ~
WA/ANAL  CL W ED/ACL
KALAUPAPA ~ ~ ~ LAAL
r-...JOALAWA
AM ~  ~     ~     ~     MU
/0/7                 UNA KEA~~~~~~<V5AEAAL
AL/PG
KAHOOLAWE~~00fNA-KLAE
DOD~ ~~~~~~~~~~~A
UR01M /5...  Po/70t"                     ^49,4LA~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~MA/U/C/A*//KU///t~
pA/SI/CAe/AO
/4/11//lU? ~ ~ P
A It ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ /G/(N  / ~ Voe 


THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS
The group lies between 18 deg. 54 min. and 22 deg. 14 min. north, 154 deg, 48 min. and
160 deg. 13 smn west. Eight islands are inhabited.
HIAWAII is the largest, 75 hy 90 miles. Area 4015 square miles. On it are the highest
mountains in the Pacific, two peaks reaching an altitude of more than 13,000 feet. Hilo, the
chief city,, is second in population is, the territory.
MAUI contains 728 square miles. Haleakala is a mountain of more than 10,000 feet.
OAHUL, with Honolulu, principal city and capital, 2180 miles west of San Francisco, contains 598 square miles. Pearl Harhor naval station is located here.
KAUAI, 'The Garden Isle," is rated the oldest island in the group.
Intensive cultivation is conducted on all principal islands.




__ ~ ~~~ ~ ~ ~~~ ~ ~ ~~~ ~ ~ ~~~ ~ ~ ~~~ ~ ~ ~~~ ~ ~ ~~~ ~ ~ ~~~ ~ ~ ~~~ ~  ~ ~~~    ~   ~ ~~~    ~  ~ ~~~    ~  ~ ~~~    ~  ~ ~~~    ~  ~~~~    ~  ~~~     ~  ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~




The Pilgrims of Hawaii
THEIR OWN STORY OF THEIR PILGRIMAGE
FROM NEW ENGLAND AND LIFE WORK IN THE
SANDWICH ISLANDS, NOW KNOWN AS HAWAII
WrIa EXPLANATORY AND ILLUSTRATIVE MATERIAL COMPILED AND
VERIFIED FROM ORIGINAL SOURCES
BY 
REV. AND MRS.
ORRAMEL HINCKLEY GULICK
(CHILDREN or EARLY MISSIONARY FAMIIS)


Introduction by
JAMES L. BARTON, D.D.
ILLUSTRA TED
'  4
NEW YOR      CHICAGO   TORONTO
Fleming H. Revell Company
LONDON     AND     EDINBtUGH




Copyright, 1918, by
FLEMING H. REVELL COMPANY
New York: 158 Fifth Avenue
Chicago: 17 North Wabash Ave.
Toronto: 25 Richmond Street, W.
London: 21 Paternoster Square
Edinburgh:  Ioo  Princes Street




TO
~*  a~iia  ~hzA m    ttiIkrs XiU
THE S-YMPATHY OF WHOSE MEm-BERs HAS BEEN A CONTINUOUS
STimuLus To THE COMPILATioNq OF THIs RECORD OF
ONE. OF THE MOST SUCCESSFUL MISSIONARY
ENTERPRSES OF MODERN TIMEs




TO THE MISSIONARY FATHERS
What ho! ye stalwart mariners, now whither do ye sailt
Your eyes are bright with heaven's light, your courage doth not
fail.
"The heathen cry" they, smiling, said. "They call on thee and
me.
We sail to their distress, around a world of sea.
What though there's no returning from off that island strand?
What though there's no returning from out that tropic land?
Where summer never, never dies, strength fails and so may we;
But, conscience clear, and naught to fear, we'll sleep beside the
sea. 
Lo, many years have vanished. The mariners are gone,
Sailed on to dream in brighter day beyond the beauteous dawn.
What ho, ye sometime mariners! Ye followed well the gleam.
The land ye sought in sacrifice, transformed by love hath been.
Good will ye brought and well ye wrought; sail on, and, happy,
dream I
MARY DILLINGHAM FREAR.




INTRODUCTION


T    HE story of the beginning and development of
the missionary enterprise in the Hawaiian Islands must take its place among the most romantic and even startling records in modern Christian
history. Not a century ago the islands that comprise
the Hawaiian group, called today the "Paradise of the
Pacific," were inhabited by naked untutored savages,
subject to degrading practices and superstitions; human
sacrifices were in practice, infanticide in its most revolting character was common. Into and among the
people of these islands, living under these conditions,
there entered in 1820 a transforming force. It came
quietly, without ostentation, with no boast of strength
or pride of power, beginning its operations through a
small band of fourteen missionaries and three Hawaiian
assistants, who sailed from Boston, October 17th, 1819,
but who did not arrive at Honolulu until the last day
of March, 1820. For nearly two weeks the pagan king
delayed to grant them the privilege of taking up their
abode on shore. Only forty years before Captain Cook
had there been slain by the natives, and over the entire
group ruthless and uncompromising paganism held absolute sway.
Upon the arrival of the missionaries there began a
mighty conflict between evil upon the throne and the
forces of righteousness. It was a battle royal in which
5




6


INTRODUCTION


heathen rulers were confronted by the ambassadors of
Jesus Christ.
Little by little paganism receded as the spirit of
Christ gained the mastery, until Hawaii, now a Christian nation and people, became a proud part of our
own country, over which floats the Stars and Stripes.
The story of the transformation of these people from
paganism to Christianity surpasses in interest every
romance, ancient and modern, and records a chapter in
the story of the Kingdom of God on earth that well
may stand side by side with the Acts of the Apostles.
"The Pilgrims of Hawaii" is the record of these marvellous events in human and divine history, by which
a pagan people have been transformed into a civilized
Christian nation. But it is of vast significance that the
authors and compilers of this story were born into the
atmosphere of this mighty reformation and were
familiar, from their childhood, with the traditions of
the transforming power of the gospel of Christ, as
revealed in its contact with Hawaiian heathenism.
More than this, even, they have been active participants
in the work of transformation, sharing in full its
burdens and its triumphs.
JAMES L. BARTON,
Foreign Secretary of the American Board.




CONTENTS
PART I
HAWAIIAN MISSIONS
CHAPTER                                                PAGE
I. Hawaii and the Polynesian Race...................  15
II. The Primitive Hawaiians..........................  18
III. The Pioneer Missionaries..........................  23
IV. Early  Days of the Mission.........................  31
V. Organization  of the Mission........................  36
VI. Rulers of the Hawaiian Race....................... 39
VII. Illustrious Hawaiian Women....................... 48
VIII. The Hawaiian Mission Children.................... 52
IX. Boarding  Schools.................................  55
X. Hawaiian Missionaries to Other Groups............. 58
XI. Stories of Life in  Hawaii.......................  62
PART II
JOURNALS AND LETTERS OF MISSIONARIES
XII. From A. D. 1820-1822. Arrival and Settlement of
First Missionaries. Visit of the Deputation of The
London Missionary Society from Tahiti........... 71
XIII. 1822-1828. Progress of the Work. Visit of the King
and Queen to England and their Death in London.
Arrival of New  Missionaries.....................  95
XIV. 1829-1834. Governor Boki's Disastrous Expedition.
Attempted Mission to Marquesas Islands.......... 121
XV. 1834-1838. The Founding of Lahainaluna School.   145
XVI. 1838-1839. The Great Revival.................... 161
XVII. 1839-1840. Founding of Hilo Boarding School, and
of the Royal School......................... 173
XVIII. 1840-1842. Founding of Punahou School. Building
of Church at Kealakekua. Death of Hoapili and
K apiolani......................................  187
7




8                       CONTENTS
CUAPTRB                                                  PAGE
XIX. 1842-1847. Official Visit of Mr. Richards and Hoalilio
to America and Europe. Seizure of the Islands by
Lord George Paulet, and Restoration by Admiral
Thomas. Bartimeus the Blind Preacher........... 204
XX. 1847-1848. The Measles and Whooping-cough. Death
of Mr. Wm. Richards. Mr. R. Armstrong, Minister
of Public Instruction............................ 229
XXI. 1848-1850. Proposition for More Permanent Settlement of Missionaries. The French Demands. Effect
of the California Gold-fever...................... 245
XXII. 1851-1853. The New Constitution and Land Titles.
Missions to Micronesia and Marquesas............ 259
XXIII. 1853-1859. Death of Kauikeaouli (Kamehameha III).
Arrival of The Morning Star. Loss of the Schooner
Vicitoria...,,,.,,,......,,,,,,,,,,,,,.,.,, 274
PART III
RESULTS
XX IV. Retrospect...................................  297
XXV. Later History...................................   300
XXVI. Annexation.....................................   309
XXVII. Religious Work........................ 312
XX  VIII.  Educatioi......................................  317
XXIX.   Language......................................   322
XXX.   Agriculture.....................................  325
XXXI.   Commerce.....................................   329
XXXII. The Twentieth Century......................... 333
APPENDIX.................................... 341
INDEX,,,.,,,,,,,,,,,,.......*............. 349




ILLUSTRATIONS
Map of the Hawaiian Islands...................... Frontispiece
FACING
PAGE
Diamond Head and Waikiki Bathing Beach.................  16
Rev. Moses Kuaea, pastor of the Kaumakapili Church during
the 'eighties. An eloquent preacher................... 20
A  Typical Hawaiian  Dame...............................  22
A  Statue of Kamehameha I...............................  42
Princess Bernice Pauahi Bishop. Wife of Charles R. Bishop.
She endowed the Kamehameha Schools of Honolulu...... 50
Cocoa-nut Trees in  fruitage...............................  54
Kamehameha III; William C. Lunalilo who reigned King of
Hawaii from January, 1873, to February, 1874; Queen
Emma, Wife of Kamehameha IV; Kamehameha IV...... 56
Canoe Riding the Surf at Waikiki.......................... 70
Rev. Hiram   Bingham.....................................  80
A Primitive grass house, with a modern company of Hawaiians
near the door................................... 88
The first framed house of Honolulu, which was landed from
Boston, January 10, 1821, and which stands on the west side
of King  Street.......................................  88
T he  Pali................................................  96
A Papaia Tree bearing perhaps over two hundred pounds of
fruit................................................  118
The Hawaiian Stone Church, Kawaiahao, Honolulu.......... 156
Rev. and Mrs. Asa Thurston.............................. 168
A Lake of Molten Lava, as seen a few years since at the Volcano
of Kilauea, Hawaii...................................  192
Pauahi Hall. The Academy of Punahou College........... 214
9




10                 ILLUSTRATIONS
PACING
PAGE
Rainbow Falls, Hilo, Hawaii.......................... 226
The Night-blooming Cereus which adorns the stone wall of the
Oahu  College........................................  278
Central Union Church, Honolulu, formerly known as Fort Street
Church............................. 304
Lunalilo Home for aged Hawaiians, Founded by bequest of
King Lunalilo...................................... 304
The former Palace, now the Executive Building of the Govern- 
m ent..............................................  310
A Water Buffalo preparing the land for rice planting........... 324
Picking  Pineapples................................... 328
A Japanese Fishing-boat............................  330
The Maunakea. Sample of Inter-Island Boats.............. 332
Mission Memorial Building, Honolulu, 1916................. 336




FOREWORD


T    HIE year 1920 will be not only the Three Hundredth Anniversary of the landing of the Pilgrims of New England at Plymouth, Massachusetts, but, likewise, the One Hundredth Anniversary
of the landing of the sons and daughters of these New
England Pilgrims, become Pilgrims themselves, on the
shores of Hawaii.
There are many points of contrast between these two
pilgrimages. The New England Pilgrims were not
missionaries in the modern sense, and had no modern
missionary society behind them. They fled from the
persecution of their fellow Christians, and their work
among savages was subsequent and incidental to their
main purpose, which was, as has been sung, "freedom to
worship God." Nor did they realize in a single generation any such marvellous growth of civilization in place
of the savagery which met them on the threshold of their
endeavors, nor within a century any such material prosperity for their children and their children's children.
Yet the study of the two pilgrimages is not altogether
a study in contrasts. It was in spirit the same faith
which was carried from Holland to New England, and
from New England, two centuries later, to Hawaii.
The hardships of the Mayflower passage in 1620 were
hardly greater than those endured on the longer journey
by the passengers of the brig Thaddeus in 1820. And
11




12


FOREWORD


great as has been the part played in the story of the
last three centuries by the Pilgrims to New England,
who shall say that in the coming three centuries the consequences, so far as the shaping of the world's history,
will be less important than that other pilgrimage from
New England to the central islands of the Pacific sea?
We have few and scanty records of how it fared with the
earlier band of Pilgrims on their hazardous trip across
the Atlantic, or of what were their first impressions of
the land which they made their inheritance, or of the
years of that first generation in their new home. Such
records as we have are rightfully cherished as a precious
possession, and have inspired already a noble contribution of poetry and romance, as well as more prosaic historic study.
Fortunately the records of the Hawaiian pilgrimage
are quite abundant, though not accessible to the ordinary
reader, except in fragments here and there. Their very
fullness prevents a full publication of them. But there
is given herewith a fairly full presentation of the journals and correspondence of the Hawaiian Pilgrims,
such as, with the notes which follow, will enable the attentive reader to get a good impression of what manner
of men and women they were, in what spirit they came
to their great adventure, and what marvels they met in
providential preparation for their work, and in the
extraordinary success of the work itself.
ROBERT WHITAKER,
Los Gatos, Cal.




NOTE


The several portions of this work are so different one
from another that it has seemed best to separate them
into three parts.
In the first part is set forth the location of the islands;
the coming of the missionaries and the beginning of
their work.
The second part consists of quotations from the letters of the missionary fathers and mothers mostly addressed to the officers of the American Board of Missions
in Boston. The freedom, fullness, and frankness of
the correspondence with the officers of the American
Board on the part of the early missionaries is remarkable and truly impressive, indicative of great respect
for and confidence in the American Board Secretaries.
The third part is an attempt to show some of the
results of gospel teaching and the present conditions
of life upon these favored islands, of which, in the
language of the Prophet Isaiah, it was said: "The
isles shall wait for his law."
It gives the authors of this historical sketch special
pleasure here to acknowledge their indebtedness to a
daughter of the Pacific seas-Mrs. Frances Gulick
Jewett-for her aid in reading the proof-sheets of this
history, and for many suggestions enhancing the value
of this record.
ORRAMEL HINCKLEY GULICK.
ANN ELIZA CLARK GULICK.
Honolulu, Hawaii.


13




A PROSE POEM ON HAWAII
No Alien Land in all the world has any deep, strong
charm for me but that one; no other land could so
longingly and beseechingly haunt me sleeping and waking, through half a lifetime, as that one has done.
Other things leave me, but it abides; other things
change, but it remains the same. For me its balmy airs
are always blowing, its summer seas flashing in the
sun; the pulsing of its surf beat is in my ear; I can see
its garlanded crags, its leaping cascades, its plumy
palms drowsing by the shore; its remote summits floating like islands above the cloudracks; I can feel the
spirit of its woodland solitude; I can hear the splash of
its brooks; in my nostrils still lives the breath of flowers
that perished twenty years ago.-Mark Twain.




PART I
HAWAIIAN MISSIONS
I
HAWAII AND THE POLYNESIAN RACE
HE Sandwich Islands are now known as the
Hawaiian Islands, or as simply Hawaii, or as
the Territory of Hawaii.
These islands lie 2100 miles southwest from San
Francisco in the mid-Pacific Ocean and, roughly speaking 4920 eastward from Hongkong on the eastern
shores of China; 3400 miles eastward from Yokohama,
Japan; 4410 miles north by east from Sydney, the
capital of New South Wales; and 3800 miles north by
east from Auckland, New Zealand.
Honolulu is but a little further from San Francisco
than San Francisco is from Chicago. It is also nearly
as far from San Francisco as the Western shore of Ireland is from Newfoundland. By the fastest ocean
steamer it is four and a half days voyage from San
Francisco, though the usual voyage is six days.
The group consists of four islands of importance;
first Hawaii, which gives name to the group, Maui,
Oahu, and Kauai: and four smaller islands, Molokai,
Lanai, Kahoolawe and Niihau. The ports of consequence and safety are Honolulu and Pearl Harbor on
Oahu, Hilo and Kealakekua on Hawaii, and Lahaina
and Kahului on Maui.
15




16


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


Each island consists of a mountain or mountains rising out of the ocean, there being no extended level plains
or flat land. The island of Hawaii may be said to consist of four mountains, the highest of which is Mauna
Kea, 13,825 feet, being the loftiest mountain west of
the American coast until we reach the Himalaya Mountains in Northern India. These mountains of Hawaii
are seamed with valleys, some of which have mountain
streams rushing rapidly down to the ocean. Parts of
the islands are skirted by coral reefs upon which the
breakers continually thunder with their white crested
waves which constitute a beautiful fringe to the blue
ocean. But on parts of the shores, the cliffs rise abruptly
from deep water to great elevations, as on the northeastern coast of Hawaii and on the northern side of
Molokai.
The area of the one island of Hawaii is 4015 square
miles, it being the size of the state of Connecticut. The
area of Maui is 728 square miles; that of Oahu, 600
square miles; that of Kauai, 544 square miles. The
total area of the group, including the four smaller islands, is 6449 square miles.
The popular belief that the weather of the tropics is
that of torrid heat, is not true of the Hawaiian climate,
which is modified by the coolness of the surrounding
ocean currents, and prevalent trade winds from the
northeast.
The most widely spread aboriginal race in the world
is the Polynesian. This race has peopled the Pacific
Islands from Hawaii to New Zealand, including the intermediary islands of the Marquesas, the Society Islands, Samoan and Fiji. This wide distribution of the




Diamond Head and Waikiki Bathing Beach




1 6                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     e  I
I A,                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       o
I      I.  I
I: I




HAWAII AND TIE POLYNESIAN RACE               17
Polynsian race over the thousands of miles f trakless
ocean is most remarkable in the history of the human
race. The voyages in canoes of these adventurous peoe, unrecorded in any history, can but fill us with
astonishment.
Scientists tell us that the affinity of language is the
most fixed and determinative feature of a race. This
being the case, there can be no question of the oneness of
the Polynesian race which has so widely spread over the
islands of the Pacific. Proof of the great similarity of
the language is found in the fact that when our missionaries in Hawaii were commencing their work in 1820,
Mr. William Ellis, from the Society Islands, landing
here on his way from the Society to the Marquesan Islands, and detained here for lack of opportunity to
proceed to the Marquesas for four months, rendered
great aid to the missionaries in the writing of the
Hawaiian language, having had experience in Tahiti,
one of the Society Islands, which mission had been
started twenty-three years earlier. Though the islands
of Hawaii and Tahiti were 2500 miles distant from
each other their languages were so similar that Mr.
Ellis was at once able to converse intelligently with
Hawaiians, and wrote several hymns, one or two of
which are used to this day in the Hawaiian worship.
The close affinit of the people of theseeveral islands, one with another, is shown not only in language,
but in physical features, in habits of thought, and general characteristics of hospitality and teachleness.
To record the transition of the Hawaiian portion of
this race from savagery to Chrisian ciiliation, is oneof the objects of this book




II
THE PRIMITIVE HAWAIIANS


F the interesting question, "Whence came the
ancient Hawaiians," we can only say that their
legends tell of voyagers coming from the
southern Pacific and landing on these shores.
These islands were discovered by Captain Cool, an
English navigator, in 1778. He thought the population
of the islands then to be 400,000, which was probably a
large overestimate, as he had no means of judging except by the multitudes who thronged the shores where
his ships touched, eager to see the wonderful ships and
the strange white people from unknown lands. Following Captain Cook's discovery, the islands were visited by
several distinguished voyagers, including Vancouver,
who was a lieutenant with Captain Cook, and Kotzebue.
When the first missionaries arrived, the population
may have been 120,000.
A people who have no written language can have no
history in our sense of the word, and such was the
condition before the missionaries arrived. Hence, the
recorded history of Hawaii can only begin with the
work of the missionaries on these islands. But we may
learn something of the life, customs, and history of the
ancient Hawaiians from their legends, and chanted rehearsals or songs, called meles.
18




THE PRIMITIVE HAWAIIANS


19


It is scarcely possible to describe to one who has
been brought up in the midst of Christian light, the
darkness, the cruelty, and the ignorance which envelops
a savage and heathen people.
When a small boy my parents employed a Hawaiian
woman for housework who had killed all of her seven
children in infancy. When speaking of her children
she wept, and to the infant children of her employer
she was kindness itself. Infanticide had been very
common, though maternal affection still remained.
"Can a woman forget her sucking child, that she
should not have compassion on the son of her womb?
Yea, they may forget" (Is. xlix: 15), and they do forget under the oppression and darkness of heathenism.
Rev. Moses Kuaea, a fine preacher in the Hawaiian language, the most eloquent of the orators of his day and a
noble specimen of a fine race of men, said that the hole
in the ground had been dug in which he as an infant
was being buried, when some passer-by rescued him and
brought him up. He stated that he took the name of
Moses, probably upon the occasion of his baptism, for
the reason that as Pharaoh's daughter called the infant's
name Moses, and said: "Because I drew him out of the
water," so he, himself, had been drawn out of the
ground.
The following painful representation of the condition
of Hawaiian households, in the earlier times, we take
from the interesting "Sketches of Life in the Hawaiian
Islands," by Mrs. Laura Fish Judd, published in 1880,
and recording events of about 1831:
"It was but natural that with the first impulses of
maternal love we should turn our thoughts more directly




20        THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
to native mothers and children. A few days ago we called
the women of our church together and requested those
who had children to bring them. A large number assembled, our good queen mother, Kaahumanu, heading
the list, although she had no children of her own. She
brought little Ruth, an adopted daughter. Kinau presented her first born, Prince David Kamehameha, a boy
fine enough for any mother not of the seed royal to glory
in. Close beside her sits the wife of our deacon, Ehu,
with three young children. Several mothers presented
their offspring, with the pride of old Roman matrons.
We counted the number of those who had living children,
and then requested those who had none to rise. The
scene that followed I can never forget. Why are you
childless? we inquired. Very few had lost children by a
natural death. One woman replied, in tears, holding out
her hands: 'These must answer the question. I have been
the mother of eight children, but with these hands I
buried them alive, one after another, that I might follow
my pleasures and avoid growing old. Oh, if I had but
one of them back again to comfort me now!' She was
followed by others, making the same sad confessions of
burying alive, of strangling, of smothering, until sobs and
tears filled the house.
"'Oh,' said one, 'you have little idea of our heartless
depravity before we had the word of God. We thought
only of preserving our youth and beauty, following the
train of our king and chiefs, singing, dancing, and being
merry. When old, we expected to be cast aside and, being
neglected, to starve and die, and we only cared for the
present pleasures. Such was our darkness.'
"The scene was painful. We tried to say a few words
of consolation and advice, and to commend them to God
in prayer. We made arrangements to meet them regularly once a month for instruction in maternal and domestic duties, and returned to our happy Christian homes
feeling that we never before realized how much we owe
the Gospel.




Rey. Moses Ktuae4, pastor of the Kanosakapili
I    hruch  during  the  eighties.  An  etogteott
preaher




I
I
I
I,       t                i
I;,




THE PRITIVE IAWAMIANS


Aft;er my return I related to Pali, my native woman,
some of the fearful disclosures made at the meeting. My
mother had ten children, said she. 'My brother, now
with you, and myself, are all that escaped death at her
hands. This brother was buried, too, but I loved him
very much and determined to save him, if I could. I
watched my mother and saw where she buried him. As
soon as she went away, I ran and dug him up. He was
not dead. I ran away many miles with him, and kept
him hid with some friends a long time. My mother heard
of us and tried to get us back, but I kept going from
one place to another and after awhile she died. I have
always taken care of my brother until now. '
The historian, Prof. D. Alexander, in his "Brief
History of the Hawaiian People," records the offering
of thirteen persons as human sacrifices to the gods by
Kamehameha I, besides the statement that the great
king after dedicating a heiau, or enclosure for heathen
worship, in Ewa, Oahu, with human sacrifices in
April, 1796, moved his army and fleet of war canoes
to Waianae. He also consecrated numerous heiaus at
Lahaina and other places, with the usual cruel rites.
How near to our day was that day of heathen horrorst  How little do the sons and daughters of New
England, who now enjoy the' peace and plenty of
Hawaii, realize what a dark land of dense heathenism
this was in the time when their grandfathers sent the
gospel to these then far off islands. What a change
the gospel has wrought in ninety years. "Verily, verily,
I say unto you, he that believeth on me, the works that
I do, shall he do also; and greater works than these
shall he do; because I go unto my Father."'   John
xiv: 12,




m       THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
Here in Hawaii human life is now safer than in any
part of Christendom, but at that time what humble
Hawaiian could be assured that he might not be seized
and offered to the gods, before night, as a peace offering, or to insure victory in tomorrow's battle. What
misery, what darkness shrouded the rulers and people
alike. Is not the above promise of the Saviour fulfilled
before our eyes  Are not the changes effected by the
gospel teachings of the humble missionaries of the
cross in Hawaii more apparent than the changes effected in Judea and Galilee where the Master did his
most mighty works?




C ",, 81  ii i
B                                      FBU_:
i; "~"i~~*~g,-l*ip,~m"
S~i,,,,,iaiw:''".lmWURI1IC,"llr.-;~:
"i
Fi F
a~ ~i:,I""-L
^"`
~~i~                                                                 
**%
~ ~~.r
r~,~r~im4 iq
Ya
n 'I'silfic:ll )-Itl-;ti;ar~l I:);ltlc:




I
I




III
THE PIONEER MISSIONARIES
ROM   the perusal of Cook's voyages around
the world, during which he discovered the
Hawaiian Islands in 1778, Mr. Carey, a very
humble shoemaker of Northampton, England, who
later became a distinguished Baptist minister and missionary, was led to the thought of carrying the gospel
to the heathen.
In or about 1786, at a meeting of ministers held at
Northampton, England, Mr. Carey proposed as a topic
for discussion: "The duty of Christians to attempt
the spread of the gospel among heathen nations." The
venerable Rev. Ryland received the proposal with
astonishment and, springing to his feet, denounced the
proposition with a frown, and thundered out: "Young
man, sit down! When God pleases to convert the
heathen he will do it without your aid or mine." A
Mr. Fuller, later a great friend of missionary woA,
described his own feelings at the time as resembling
the unbelieving courtier in Israel who said: "If the
Lord should make windows in heaven, might such a
thing be."  2 Kings vii: 2.
This suggestion of Mr. Carey in 1786 was the real
beginning of modern Protestant missions to the
heathen. Thus we see that the account of the discovery
~$A3.




24        THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
of the Sandwich Islands by Captain Cook, awakened
in Mr. Carey thoughts of compassion for the heathen.
So missions were founded in England by Carey and his
associates who sailed in 1793 for India. The London
Missionary Society sent missionaries to Tahiti, in the
South Pacific, in 1797, twenty-three years before the
first missionaries to Hawaii were sent from Boston.
In the United States the idea of missions to the
heathen was first entertained by students in Williams
College in 1808, which led to the founding of the
American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions in 1810.  Their first missionaries, Adoniram
Judson and others, were sent to India in 1812.
In 1809 Obookiah and other Hawaiians reached New
Haven, Connecticut, and awakened the interest of
American churches in the Hawaiian people, which
culminated in the sailing from Boston, in the brig
Thaddeus in 1819, of Messrs. Bingham, Thurston
and Whitney and others with their wives and four
Hawaiians for the Sandwich Islands, where they landed
at Kailua, on the 4th of April, 1820. This was the
humble beginning in the Protestant world of that great
work which is now considered by many Christians as
the great work of the church, namely, the proclamation of the gospel to the heathen. This was the be
ginning of the mission to Hawaii which was reinforced
by companies ranging from one to thirty-two and constituting in all one hundred and fifty-three persons sent
out by the American Board during a period of 74
years, namely, from 1820 to 1894.1
The first company of missionaries who sailed from
I See Appendix for personnel.




THE PIONEER MISSIONARIES


25


Boston for Hawaii, October 23, 1819, were: Rev.
Hiram Bingham and Mrs. Sybil Mosely Bingham;
Rev. Asa Thurston and Mrs. Lucy Goodale Thurston;
Mr. Samuel Whitney and Mrs. Mercy Partridge Whitney; Thomas Holman, a physician, and Mrs. Lucia
Ruggles Holman; Mr. Daniel Chamberlain, a farmer,
and wife and several children; Mr. Samuel Ruggles
and Mrs. Mary Wells Ruggles; Mr. Elisha Loomis,
a printer, and Mrs. Maria Theresa Sartwell Loomis;
and accompanying these as helpers three Hawaiian
youths from the Foreign Mission School at Cornwall,
Connecticut, Thomas Hopu, William Tenui and John
Honolii and, also, George Kaumualii, a son of the
King of Kauai.
Rev. Hiram Bingham was born in Bennington, Vermont, in 1789, and was a graduate of Middlebury
College and Andover Seminary. He was a man of
great courage and energy, and was located at Honolulu
in April, 1820, which city ere long became the abode
of the king and higher chiefs and the most frequented
port of the islands.  The earliest missionaries soon
acquired much influence with both the king and chiefs
and with the common people. The chiefs after learning the unselfish character of the missionaries came
freely to them for advice in matters of government
and of dealing with foreigners. Mr. Bingham acquired
a thorough acquaintance with the language of the
people and his great industry is evident in that he
translated a large portion of the Bible into the
Hawaiian language from the original Hebrew and
Greek, and, also, wrote many of the hymns of worship,
some of which are today in constant use.




286      'THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
Under Mr. Bingham's guidance a very large thatched
building was erected as a house of worship upon the
grounds of the present Kawaiahao Cemetery. This was
the first church or meeting house of which the writer
has any memory. The present Kawaiahao Church,
a coral stone building, was in process of erection when
Mr. Bingham left with his family for return to the
United States in 1841, on account of Mrs. Bingham's
health, having completed twenty-one years of most successful missionary service. He did not return to the
islands. Mrs. Bingham was a model missionary wife
and was a most important factor in winning the love
and devotion of chiefs and people. They were the
parents of seven children.
Rev. Asa Thurston was born in Fitchburg, Massachusetts, in 1787, graduated from Yale College and
Andover Theological Seminary, was ordained to the
ministry in Goshen, Connecticut, September 29, 1819,
and sailed October 23, 1819, for the mid-Pacific
islands. Upon arrival at the islands he was located
at Kailua, Hawaii, which was then the headquarters
of King Liholiho (Kamehameha II) and of the higher
chiefs. The removal of the king and court from
Kailua to Lahaina and, finally, to Honolulu, was effected
gradually during the Thirties.  Thus Kailua became
one of the most lonely stations in the group.
Father Thurston became proficient in the vernacular
and was the translator into the Hawaiian of several
portions of the Bible.2
He was not a man of many words, but when he spoke
in the mission meetings his words were of weight. On
2 See Appendix A.




THE PIONEER MISSIONARIES


one occasion the deliberative body had long discussed
the question of locating a member at the remote and
needy station of Hana, Maui. After long debate Mr.
Thurston's thought was asked. His laconic reply was:
"Give no place to the Devil." Thenceforward for
twenty years Hana was one of the mission stations.
Rumor said that when in Yale Mr. Thurston was
known as an athlete, and that was long before athletics
became so prominent a feature of college life. He
never returned to his native land and died in Honolulu
at eighty years of age, after forty-eight years of most
efficient missionary service.
Mrs. Lucy Goodale Thurston was a cousin of Rev.
William Goodale, an honored missionary of the American Board in Turkey, by whom she was introduced to
her future husband one month before they sailed for
the then called Sandwich Islands. Though their courtship was so short, their union proved to be most happy,
each being filled with the highest possible purpose in
life, namely, the spread of the gospel among the
heathen.
Mrs. Thurston's words of counsel were listened to
with profit and pleasure by old and young alike. Even
the children of the mission loved to hear her talk.
She delivered a fine address in the Seamen's Chapel in
Honolulu, in or about 1860, which might have been
entitled: "Weep ye for the daughters of my people."
Mr. Samuel Whitney was from Bradford, Connecticut, and was born in April 28, 1793. He was
not ordained before sailing for the islands, but was
ordained in Kailua November 30, 1825, five years
after arrival in the islands. He commenced his mis



28        THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
sionary life at Waimea, Kauai, July 25, 1820, and
closed his career December 15, 1845, having completed
twenty-five years of effective missionary work at
Waimea and was held in highest esteem by both chiefs
and people of Kauai, whose respect and affection he
won in a remarkable degree.
Mrs. Mercy Partridge Whitney was from Pittsfield,
Massachusetts, and lived in Waimea, Kauai, until her
death on December 26, 1872.
Mr. Samuel Ruggles was one of the pioneer company
who, with Mrs. Ruggles, embarked for Hawaii in the
Brig Thaddeus. They were first located in 1820 with
Mr. and Mrs. Whitney at Waimea, Kauai, and afterwards on Hawaii. After rendering fourteen years of
very valuable pioneer work, winning the esteem of fellow missionaries and the love of the Hawaiians, constrained by ill health, he left with his wife and children
for the States where he lived for many years.
Mr. Elisha Loomis, printer, with Mrs. Loomis, were
of the pioneer company. He was a ready writer and
is supposed to be the author of a journal of the voyage
around Cape Horn. A small printing press must have
been sent out in the brig with this first company of
missionaries. The first lessons printed were eagerly
received by those natives who had learned to read from
manuscripts. For many years all the printing on the
islands was done by the Hawaiians who had been
taught by Mr. Loomis. A few years later, when another printing press had been received, the first machine
was taken to Oregon by a successor to Mr. Loomis,
Mr. Edwin O. Hall, and was the first printing press
seen west of the Rocky Mountains. It is now treasured




THE PIONEER MISSIONARIES              29
in a Museum of Mementos in Oregon. Mr. Loomis
returned to the States on account of ill health in 1827
and died at the early age of thirty-seven years.
Thomas Holman, M.D., Missionary Physician, was
one of the ever memorable company of pioneer missionaries to Hawaii. His connection with the mission
was very brief as he returned to the States four months
from the day the company sighted the mountains of
Hawaii. His wife was a sister of Mr. Ruggles.
Mr. Daniel Chamberlain, wife and five children,
came out in the pioneer company; it being thought that
much might be done for the people through instruction
in farming. Mr. Chamberlain is well spoken of in
the correspondence of the early missionaries as a man
of rare good judgment and as rendering much help in
the early settlement of the missionary company. But
the bringing up of the children in close contact with
the benighted people about, them, soon became a matter
of grave solicitude.  To save the children, Mr.
Chamberlain was released from connection with the
Board and, returning with Mrs. Chamberlain and children, left the islands March 21, 1823.
Besides the missionary company, who sailed in the
Thaddeus, there were included three young Hawaiians
who had been for a time in the Foreign Mission School
at Cornwall, Connecticut, and who were to be helpers
in the missionary work. Their names were Thomas
Hopu, William Tenui, and John Honolii.
These young Hawaiians, who had acquired some
knowledge of the English language, were of service, at
the first, as interpreters for the missionaries and, especially, in securing from the ruling chiefs permission




30        THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
for the landing and residence of the missionaries upon
the islands. They undoubtedly gave to the Hawaiian
rulers and people their estimate of the true and
benevolent purpose of this body of strangers in their
mission to the islands. Thomas Hopu proved to be
a most faithful missionary worker among both chiefs
and people. William Tenui (Wm. Kanui) wandered
both in faith and practice for years, but later returned
to the fold. We find no special mention of Honolii.
In addition to these three, there was a fourth young
Hawaiian of the company, who came as a returning
wanderer to his native islands. George Kaumualii, son
of the King of Kauai, who later was known as
Humehume, and who proved to be a disturbing element
on Kauai.




iv


EARLY DAYS OF THE MISSION
HE Hawaiians had developed with great difficulty and almost infinite patience implements
of stone and shells to take the place filled in
our civilization by iron and metallic instruments.
They also had the art of manufacturing a coarse paper
called kapa from the bark of a shrub which constituted
the only clothing of a race probably as scantily clad as
any portion of the human family.
Think, too, of the labor and patience required to
build a canoe, fashioned out of the trunk of a tree,
without any metal implements, using instead a stone
hatchet or adze. The larger canoes were, perhaps, over
thirty feet long, the body being one piece of wood.
Their farming implement was but a little flattened
wooden spade.
In the view of civilized man they had almost everything to learn. The missionary, if a farmer's son,
taught them the use of oxen, horses, ploughs and carts;
if of a mechanical turn, at the carpenter's bench, they
could be taught the manufacture of furniture and the
erection of houses, and the art of printing. The missionary's wife taught the arts of cooking, dressmaking,
and housekeeping.
81




32        THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
Anything in the way of a dwelling, beyond a
thatched house without a floor, they knew not of. The
church, the school house, the Town Hall were all yet
but in the imagination of the missionaries. The first
school houses and meeting houses were large thatched
structures built in the same manner as were the huts
of the people, but of great size. Mammoth grass
houses, without floors, doors or windows. Thatched
houses are seldom seen now on the islands.
The earliest missionaries had to invent for the people
the art of reading and writing, of which most of them
had not the slightest conception.
A missionary once sent by a messenger to a brother
missionary at a neighboring station, seven melons, also
sending by the same messenger a small package. On
delivering his burden, the messenger was asked where
the seventh melon was, and insisted that only six had
been sent. "How could you know there were seven
melons, for I was not in sight of the other melons when
I ate the seventh?"  It was inconceivable to him that
the package which he had delivered informed the receiver of the number of melons sent, he having no
idea of the art of writing.
The first endeavor of the missionaries was, necessarily, the acquisition of the language of the people.
Their influence with the rulers and people depended
on the intimate and thorough understanding each of
the other. The higher chiefs soon recognized the value
of these foreigners who had come to their shores with
a different purpose from that of financial gain. The
love and compassion of the missionaries for the needy
Hawaiians led the chiefs to patronize them, and afford




EARLY DAYS OF THE MISSION


33


them great facilities in meeting the people. Of course,
at first, the chiefs could not appreciate the disinterested
love of the missionaries, but when once fully convinced that they were seeking their good, opposition
was overcome, and when individuals of the chiefs became ardent disciples, access to the people was at once
secured.
One of the most serious problems, that of writing
the Hawaiian language, was successfully overcome, and
we have reason to believe that great assistance came
to them, in the solution of this problem, from Mr.
Ellis of the mission in the Society Islands, which mission had been in progress for twenty-three years.
To the five vowels, a, e, i, o, u, were given the sounds
of these letters as used in the Italian.  These five
vowels with seven consonants were all that were needed
to express every sound in the primitive Hawaiian
language. Little by little progress was made in teaching individuals to read and write, and the men who
attended the teachings of the missionaries under the
advice and approbation of the chiefs, were sent forth
to teach the use of letters and the arts of reading and
writing among their own people. The men thus sent
forth to impart to their scholars the magic art of reading and writing, were also to tell the wonderful and
joyful story of the gospel.  Such teachers returned
at stated intervals to the missionaries to receive further
instruction which they in turn might impart to their
people. Both chiefs and people were wonderfully
fascinated with the thought that their language could
thus be reproduced on slate or paper or other plain
surface, conveying ideas for the enlightenment of the




THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


34


reader. Later followed the wonders of printing, which
vividly impressed both the chiefs and people and greatly
stimulated them in acquiring knowledge.
At first the printing was in very small leaflets.
Later followed small portions of the Scriptures in leaflet
and, still later, in pamphlet forms. From these humble
beginnings the whole people, through the schools established by the missionaries, became readers. First the
Four Gospels, later the New Testament and, finally, the
whole Bible was printed, forming a version of wonderful beauty, simplicity, and accuracy.  While this
fact can be so briefly related, the process required years
for its fulfillment. The translation and publication
of the entire New Testament was not completed till
the missionaries had been in the islands fifteen or
sixteen years.
The writer remembers when the New Testament
completed first reached his father's home on Kauai, and
he remembers the arrival at the house of a woman
from a distant village bringing a chicken for the purchase of the Testament. He witnessed her as she took
the precious treasure in her hands and, with tears of
joy, placed it in her bosom for return to her home.
This was indeed, to multitudes of Hawaiians, The
Word of Life.
The cordial subjection of the people to the commands of the chiefs contributed greatly to the success
of the missionary work. When Kaahumanu, the queen
regent, gave herself to the art of reading and to the
study of the Bible, and when she and succeeding chiefs
told the people to listen to the teachings of the missionaries and to learn to read the Word, the whole




EARLY DAYS OF THE MISSION


35


people at once sat at the feet of their missionary
teachers.
The fruits of this spreading of the word of God
among a people able to read it are incalculable.
Hawaii, today, is a Christian country in consequence
of faith in the teachings of the word of God.
Aside from the instruction in reading and writing
and the imparting of the gospel story, the missionaries were continually called upon to minister to the
sick and the destitute. The missionary physicians were
able to assist greatly in the spread of the gospel by
the practical alleviation of physical suffering among
the people, and in stations where there was no physician, the missionary was continually called upon to
administer to the ill and the suffering. We do not
claim that their aid would bear comparison with that
of a regular physician, but great alleviation was often
afforded by a missionary whose medical knowledge was
limited to the administration of the most simple medicine and whose practice included the nursing and care
of the sick. The people soon acquired childlike confidence in the benevolent purpose and the ability of the
missionary to relieve distress. Much of the sickness
and ailments of both parents and children was, doubtless, due to damp and unwholesome conditions in their
thatched houses which were never furnished with board
floors. The inmates of most houses simply spread
their mats on the ground and slept upon them, while
the well-to-do had elevated platforms upon which to
sleep in the place of bedsteads.




v


ORGANIZATION OF THE MISSION
T      HE company of Pilgrims who came from Holland and England to the shores of America
in 1620 organized themselves into a body
politic at a meeting held in the cabin of the Mayflower
shortly before landing upon Plymouth Rock, Massachusetts. That company numbered in all one hundred
and one persons.
We find that the organization of the first company
of missionaries to Hawaii into a mission took place
February 23, 1823, upon the adoption of a single
sentence which we may call their Organic Act, and
which reads as follows:
"We, the undersigned ministers and missionaries of the
Lord Jesus Christ in the Sandwich Islands being sent
for the defence of the truth and for the enlightening of
the Gentiles, agree to unite in an association for mutual
improvement and mutual aid in laying the foundation,
maintaining the order, and building up the house of the
Lord in these Islands of the sea."
This paper was signed at that date by Rev. Messrs.
Asa Thurston and Hiram Bingham and Wm. Ellis.
The successive companies arriving at irregular intervals signed this Organic Act.
36




ORGANIZATION OF THE MISSION


37


The mission as thus organized continued to exercise
control of its members and act as a unit until it was
superseded by the organization of the body of Hawaiian
churches, styled The Hawaiian Evangelical Association, in 1863.
This mission was a democracy, a small but a true
one, where the majority ruled and where no dictator
prevailed. Every vital question was fully and frankly
discussed until a decision was reached in a vote of the
majority. This condition was modified by the fact
that the American Board of Missions in Boston had
control of the disbursement of the funds contributed
by the churches.
The distance of this missionary colony from  the
office of the American Board in Boston was so great
that self-government was, in a degree, imperative, leaving to the mission the settlement of many vital questions, such as the location of members, establishment
of schools, and the translation and printing of the
Bible and of Christian literature. In some measure
these questions were subject to the final approval of
the Board in Boston.
The expenditure of any large amount for any specific
object waited on the approval of the governing Board
in Boston. This led to a continuous and detailed correspondence with the secretaries of the American Board
and insured against unwise or hasty expenditure.
As President Lincoln once said that the voice of the
50,000,000 was to him the voice of God, so the members
of the mission were wont to say that the voice of the
mission was the voice of God.     The substantial
harmony of the mission, in spite of the variety of




38


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


temperament and occasional sharp differences, was remarkable.
During the earlier years of the mission occasional
meetings were held at irregular times and it was, perhaps, six or eight years before the regular annual assembly of the mission was established. The inter-island
communication in small schooners was so uncertain
and expensive that it might have been thought unnecessary to hold annual meetings, but the harmonious
conduct of missionary enterprises constituted an evident call for such meetings. These meetings were held
in Honolulu as being the natural center. Social and
spiritual intercourse could be insured in no other way
and was of vital importance to both parents and children. To the children of the families living almost
alone and having no playmates beyond the brothers
and sisters of their own household, the annual meeting
was the great event of continued anticipation. These
meetings generally covered from two to three weeks, and
the voyages back and forth from the remoter stations
were the most memorable events of childhood memories. Not only was the general meeting the time for
spiritual and intellectual stimulus, but it was also the
season when the frugal housewife could secure the
means for making necessary clothes for her children
and, also, for securing whatever provisions from far
lands were thought necessary for the health and sustenance of the household.




VI


RULERS OF THE HAWAIIAN RACE
IN the Marquesas group we find that the people of
each valley may be said to have constituted a
self-governing community, or, rather, each little
group was under the control and dictation of the
strongest and fiercest savage among them, and no
allegiance was accorded to any one outside of the
specific valley.
Social and political conditions among the primitive
Hawaiians were broader and more comprehensive.
The country was divided into districts varying from
perhaps ten to fifty or sixty miles in width, and the
whole people of such district constituted the feudal
tenants of the chief, or of the chief family, who claimed
and exercised the power of apportioning the land, the
mountain privileges, and the ocean privileges, to their
tenants at will.  Such chief, at his pleasure, could
require a tenant to give him the fattest pig, the patch
of growing taro, or anything or everything he possessed. Upon the least cause for displeasure the helpless tenant and his family might, without a moment's
warning, be ejected from house, home, land and every
means of living. Such conditions insured the most
abject service.
Usage gave the chief the right to call out for work all
his male tenants for from one-fourth to one-third of the
39




40


TIHE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


days of the month. Older residents will recognize the
term Konohiki days, Landlord's days. The service to
which the landlord might call his people might be, to make
a road, to build a house for public or private purpose,
to enclose a fish pond by building a stone wall around
a portion of shallow water within the barrier reef, to
erect a heiau or stone enclosure for the observance of
heathen worship, to go to the mountain and cut down
big trees with a stone adze, hew out a canoe or canoes
and drag them many miles from the mountain to the
shore. The tenant might be required to take his life in
his hand, arm himself with a spear, and go forth to war
under the lead of his chief, with neighboring chief or
tribe.
The chiefs and people were frequently engaged in
sanguinary and deadly war, whose end was the overthrow of the neighboring chief and the destruction of
his tribe. They seem to have taken naturally to the
game of mutual destruction without having had before
them the example of the 20th century enlightened
European nations of 1914 of the Christian era. Or,
was it that the nations of Europe set out to follow the
example of the primitive Hawaiian. We can but note
the coincidence.
Capt. Cook, in his call at Kealakekua, Hawaii, made
the acquaintance of an enterprising young chief named
Kamehameha, who, with a brother, held the power
of chieftainship in Ka-u. This powerful chief quarrelled with and slew his brother Keoua in battle, made
himself king of Hawaii and later, by conquest, became
the acknowledged king of all the group except the
more distant island of Kauai; and this last island of




RULERS OF THE HAWAIIAN RACE


41


the group came under the sway of his son Liholiho or
Kamehameha II in 1821.     Thus the group became
consolidated into one peaceful and united kingdom
under the one reigning family of Kamehameha, which
held sway over the united Hawaiian people from the
completion of Kamehameha's conquest in about 1780
for ninety-two years, or till the death of Lot Kamehameha V, December 11, 1872.
Kamehameha I was the most distinguished of all
the Hawaiian chiefs, and was possessed of marked and
strong characteristics. He was a firm believer in the
powers of the heathen priesthood of his time, and made
such use as he pleased of their occult practices in winning his way to power. He offered many human sacrifices upon the dedication of the great heiau at
Kawaihae, and at Hilo upon celebrating his victory
over his enemies in battle, he offered a human sacrifice
or sacrifices upon a huge flat-topped black rock which
now lies in a lot on the north side of Waianuenue
Street, in the City of Hilo and near the Wailuku
River.
In 1807, during the illness of one of his wives, Queen
Keopuolani, at Waikiki, upon the declaration of the
priest that the illness was the result of some one having
eaten tabu cocoanuts, Kamehameha had ten men seized
for sacrifice, but as she speedily recovered, seven of
them were released and but three were sacrificed. It
will never be known how many poor victims were
sacrificed by him at the behest of the cruel priests
whose pleasure it was to have such a devotee in the
person of this great king. And yet this same king
after consolidating his kingdom uttered a decree that




42        THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
the traveller might sleep unmolested by the roadside;
that none should harm the defenceless one. This decree of the king is called Ke Kanawai Kamamalahoa.
Mr. Dibble gives us the following story regarding
Kamehameha, illustrating his lack of any knowledge
of letters:
A certain captain said to Kamehameha, "I can put
Kamehameha on a slate," and proceeded to write the word
Kamehameha. The chief scornfully said, "That is not
me-not Kamehameha."     The captain then said, "By
marks on this slate I can tell my mate, who is at a
distance, to send me his handkerchief," and proceeded to
write the order. Kamehameha gave the slate to a servant,
who carried it to the mate and brought the handkerchief.
Kamehameha then took the two, the slate and the handkerchief. He looked at the writing and at the handkerchief, they did not look alike. He felt of the two, they did
not feel alike. And what connection there could be between the one and the other he could not imagine.
Such was the most distinguished man of ancient
Hawaii, sometimes called the Napoleon of the Pacific.
His enlightenment was in a measure shown by his
friendship to foreigners settled upon the islands, some
of whom exerted a valuable and helpful influence upon
the king and chiefs. Among these may be named John
Young, supposed to have been an American, and Isaac
Davis, an Englishman, both of whom were seamen who
left their ships and allied themselves with the chiefs.
Kamehameha died May 8th, 1819, at the age of 82
years, eleven months before the arrival of the first
missionaries at Kailua, on April 4th, 1820.
Kamehameha by verbal command left the kingdom
to the elder of his two sons, Liholiho, afterwards called




I
I
4
0
t,
R .
i
I 11 IL
Stattic of Klmichlo, cli- i








RULERS OF THE       AWAIIAN RACE        4
Kamehameha II. The sovereignty of this rather giddy
young man was recognized and accepted by the people,
as was also the more mature and steady authority of
Kaahumanu, the younger of his several widows of
whom we speak particularly in the chapter treating of
Illustrious Hawaiian women.
Liholiho was more addicted to strong drink than
ever was his illustrious father. His reign was little
short of five years, and ended by his sailing for a visit
to England accompanied by his wife, Kamamalu,
Kekuanaoa, and several other chiefs. The party embarked from Honolulu in November, 1823, and landed
in England in May, 1824, and both the king and queen
died in London of measles, early in July. Thus early
ended the career of this reckless, daring, and intemperate young man, whose departure left the heirship of
his throne to his younger brother, Kauikeaouli, and
the immediate guardianship and administration of the
government to the most remarkable of all Hawaiian
women, Kaahumanu, one who proved herself more fit
to rule than any inexperienced youth or than any other
then living chief.
JKauikeaouli, Kamehameha III, the third sovereign
of the united kingdom of Hawaii, and the second son
of Kamehameha by Keopuolani, was born at Keauhou,
near Kailua, in Kona, Hawaii, August 11, 1813. He
was under seven years of age when the first missionaries
arrived in 1820, and was but ten years of age upon
the sailing of his brother, King Liholiho, for England
in 1823, and whose death in England July 14, 1823,
made him at this tender age the nominal sovereign of
the land.




44        THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
Says the Wise Man or Preacher, Eccl. x: 16: "Woe
unto thee, O land, when thy king is a child."  But
as when Josiah at eight years of age became king of
Israel, the Lord raised up the High Priest Hilkiah
and the prophetess Huldah, who guided the youth
aright and helped him to be one of the best rulers that
Israel ever had, so Providence directed that Kaahumanu
should be the Kuhinanui, or Prime Minister. Kaahumanu, moved by admiration for Mr. and Mrs. Bingham, received light and instruction from them for the
years that intervened from the departure of Liholiho
for England in 1823 to her death in 1832. She was
of incalculable value to her people in orderly living,
and in the upbuilding of Christian life, character, and
civilization.
Kauikeaouli's reign may be counted to have commenced at the death of Kaahumanu in 1832, and terminated at his death in 1854, at the age of 41 years,
and covering a most eventful period of 22 years of
Hawaiian history.
Under his liberal and enlightened rule the whole
nation may be said to have emerged from a condition
of heathenism into that of a childlike Christianity.
In personal character his one great failing was frequent
indulgence in strong drink. He was so good and generous a character that all the people of the land
Were to his virtues very kind,
To his failings a little blind.
He told his people: "Listen to the missionaries,
Do as I tell you, do not as I do."
Several grand events and enactments mark the reign




RULERS OF THE HAWAIIAN RACE              45
of this truly unselfish and enlightened ruler, which we
mention here:
First, the Great Mahele or division of the lands.
The unwritten law placed all the land of the islands
in the hands of the king. All was his, and every disposition of every plot of ground was at his command.
The heart of our gracious king, together with the
advice of the more enlightened chiefs, all under the
kindly guidance of disinterested missionaries, led him
to decree the division of all the land of the islands into
three parts, one-third for the government, one-third for
the chiefs, and one-third for the Crown.
This great enabling act laid the foundation for personal property in lands and farms, fields and houses.
Second. A great step in the same line, and promotive
of stable possession of houses and farms, was the granting of fee simple titles to every individual native
Hawaiian who would make application, and meet the
expense of the survey, and the deed for his residence
lot, together with such taro or potato patch as he had
been cultivating. A land commission was appointed
to assist the people in securing these fee simple titles,
many thousands of which were issued to the incalculable benefit and enrichment of the rank and file of the
people.
Third. Another great act was the granting, of his
own accord, of a Constitution whereby he resigned the
arbitrary power of governing by imperial decree, or
personal dictation, and granted to his people the power
to elect Representatives to a Parliament in which the
Representatives of the people would be associated with
the chiefs or Nobles of the realm, in making the laws




46     THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


of the land. Such laws to be of force upon his approval.
Fourth. A feature of his reign, and one of vital
importance to the advancement of his people, was the
systematic organization of the Government; appointing
a judiciary department with orderly judges of different ranks and duties, as Chief Justice, and Associate
Judges, of the Supreme Court; Circuit Courts for the
several islands; and District Judges in each of the more
populous centers throughout the islands.
There was also a constituted Finance Department
with a Minister of Finance, to whose care was committed the collection of the taxes established by the
Legislature.
But perhaps the most important of all these acts of
organization was the appointment of a Minister of
Education, whose duty it was to establish, under the
provisions of law, common schools that were to secure
the attendance of all the children of the land and to
instruct all in the arts and mysteries of reading and
writing.
At the head of this Department of State was first
placed Rev. Wm. Richards, one of the early missionaries, who, upon his death in 1847, was succeeded by
Rev. Richard B. Armstrong, D.D., a most able man
and the father of General Samuel C. Armstrong,
founder of the institution for the benefit of the colored
men, in Hampton, Virginia.
This machinery of government, organized during
the reign of Kauikeaouli, was so complete and so well
officered that Mark Twain facetiously said, "It was
like the machinery of the Great Eastern in a sardine




RULERS OF THE HAWAIIAN RACE              47
tin." But for all the light criticism of the humorous
writer, as well as that of many less kindly critics, the
government of Kauikeaouli stood many hard knocks,
and educated the natives and foreigners alike in the
great wisdom of statecraft, and the masses grew in enlightened life under law, as a happy substitute for
the dictation of the arbitrary rule of the past ages.
He was every inch a king, when he was sober, and
in his right mind, and was the most thoroughly beloved
and revered by his people of any ruler who had occupied
the throne.




VII


ILLUSTRIOUS HAWAIIAN WOMEN
*t HE position held by women of exalted rank in
Hawaii was unique and perhaps never so
definitely accorded to women in any other
heathen or pagan land.
Keopuolani, a wife of Kamehameha I, and the
mother of Kamehameha II and III, was a woman of
commanding character and influence. She was a leader
in the abolition of the tabu system, advising her son,
Liholiho (Kamehameha II), to break the tabu. This
step led, through the influence of a portion of the
priests, to civil war and to the great battle in Kona,
Hawaii, which, in a large measure, ended the despotic
power of the priesthood. All of this occurred within a
few months before the arrival of the first company of
missionaries. Listening to the earliest instructions of
the missionaries, Keopuolani became the first convert
and received baptism from Rev. Wim. Ellis in Lahaina
on Sept. 16th, 1823. This event was of incalculable
value in the spread of the gospel among a chief loving
and honoring people.
Kaahumanu, a younger wife of Kamehameha I, became the regent of the islands upon the departure of
Kamehameha II with his wife and accompanying
48




ILLUSTRIOUS HAWAIIAN WOMEN


49


chiefs to England, where he died July 14, 1824; her
regency continuing during the minority of Kauikeaouli
(Kamehameha III). She it was who, in the beginning
of the reign of Liholiho (Kamehameha II) had the
courage to propose before the assembled people that the
tabu system be abolished. Keopuolani seconded her
motion. During the first years of her power she was
haughty in her manner toward the missionaries, holding
out her little finger to them when the missionaries
called upon her, instead of giving them the hearty
handshake which she was most happy to do when, in
after years, she had embraced the gospel teachings.
She then became very friendly and was the most
earnest and outspoken friend of missionary work in the
islands. She made extended tours of the islands, accompanied by one or another of the missionaries, calling her people together in multitudes to hear the Word
proclaimed by the gospel missionaries. Her rule was
supreme and her influence for the upbuilding of
Christianity most powerful until her death in 1832.
A third distinguished woman, of those earlier years,
Was Kapiolani, wife of Naihe. She it was who visited
the crater of Kilauea on Dec. 22, 1824, for the express
purpose of overthrowing the superstitious faith in the
power of the goddess Pele who was supposed to preside
over the volcano of Kilauea and at will to cause earthquakes and to send forth eruptions. Setting out from
Kona, she started on her journey of 150 miles mostly
on foot. The people, knowing her purpose, sent messengers to her on her way, entreating her to desist
from her foolhardy expedition. Nothing daunted, she
went to the crater, descended to the brink of the lake of




50        THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
molten lava and there broke the tabu by eating the
sacred berries which grow on the volcano's brink.
Of Kapiolani Rev. C. Forbes writes July 22, 1841:
Our beloved friend and mother in Christ, Kapiolani,
has gone to her rest.  She died May 5th, 1841, of
erysipelas. Her last end was one of peace and decided
evidence that your missionaries have not labored in vain.
For 24 hours and more preceding her death she was delirious owing to the violence of the disease which fell on
the brain. This nation has lost one of its brightest ornaments. Her life was a continual evidence of the elevating
and purifying effects of the Gospel. She was confessedly,
the most decided Christian, the most civilized in her
manners, and the most thoroughly read in her Bible of
any chief this nation ever had, and it is saying no more
than the truth to assert that her equal, in those respects,
is not left in the nation.
A fourth of these distinguished women was Kinau,
a daughter of Kamehameha I and Hoapili wahine,
thus making her a half sister of Kauikeaouli (Kamehameha III). On the death of Kaahumanu, she became premier and is frequently spoken of as Kaahumanu II. Her husband was Kekuanaoa, one of the
high chiefs who went to England with Liholiho. Two
of her sons, Alexander and Lot, were successively kings
under the titles of Kamehameha IV and V.     Upon
Kinau's death on April 4th, 1839, the king appointed
Kekauluohi or Auhea as premier, thus keeping up the
tradition of having a chiefess as Kuhinanui or Prime
Minister. Auhea was the mother of King Lunalilo
who succeeded Kamehameha V and reigned one year,
until his death in 1874 when he was succeeded by David
Kalakaua.




Pzincss JBerfie Pattahii Bishop, Wife of Charles
I   R. Bishop. She' eoidowed the Kos~ehatoeha,
Schiools of Hooslols




I'




ILLUSTRIOUS HAWAIIAN WOMEN


51


Emma Rooke, a granddaughter of John Young, was
the adopted daughter of Dr. Rooke, a physician of long
practice in Honolulu. She married Kamehameha IV
and with her husband founded in 1860 the institution
known as the Queen's Hospital in Honolulu.
Bernice Pauahi Bishop was the daughter of Konia
who was a daughter of Kamehameha I. She was a
pupil in the school of Mr. and Mrs. Cooke, founded for
the benefit of the young chiefs. She was a person of
very attractive appearance and. manner and became the
wife of Hon. Charles R. Bishop, the first banker of
Honolulu. In the great division of lands by Kamehameha III one-third of the lands was taken by the
king as crown lands, one-third allotted to the several
chiefs of high rank and the remaining third constituted the government lands. The higher chiefs, being
childless, one by one made Mrs. Bishop their legatee
upon their death, thus making her the wealthiest individual land owner upon the group. This wise woman
provided in her will that the income of these lands
should be devoted to the education of the people of
Hawaii, thus founding the Kamehameha Boarding
Schools, one for boys and one for girls, so widely known,
which are now the best endowed educational institutions upon the islands.
Queen Liliuokalani came to the throne upon the decease of her brother, Kalakaua, in 1891, her reign continuing until the establishment of the Provisional
Government in 1893, under President Dole, which resuited in annexation to the United States of America
in 1898. She is still living in Honolulu, honored and
beloved by her people.




VIII
THE HAWAIIAN MISSION CHILDREN
M     B R. ELLIS, from his long experience among the
natives of Tahiti, warned the missionaries of
Hawaii of the danger that their children
might be corrupted by free association with the heathen
about them. Hence, it became a matter of the utmost
solicitude of many a missionary mother that her
children should not learn the Hawaiian language, or
associate in any degree with the children of the natives
about them. The difficulty of carefully guarding a
group of lively children from the acquisition and use
of the language used by every domestic in the family,
and by ninety-nine of every one hundred callers, was
simply immense if not crushing. There were marked
differences in the different families in respect to the
strictness with which this interdiction of the use of the
Hawaiian language by the children was observed.
And yet though some of the most dutiful and obedient
of the children seldom spoke in the Hawaiian language,
all who remained in the islands till in their teens acquired full command of the vernacular, and were proficient in the use of it as soon as the restraints of early
childhood were removed.
The children of the first company that arrived were
sent in their childhood to the States, there being no
school suitable for their instruction, while the time and
energy of the parents were necessarily largely spent
upon the people about them. But the children of the
52




THIE HAWAIIAN MISSION CHILDREN           5s
missionaries commencing with the third band, were
generally retained by their parents. About the year
1840 the American Board learned that there were
several large families of children with their parents,
purposing to return to the fatherland. This condition
of things alarmed the officers of the American Board
and induced them to make a liberal grant for the
opening of a school in the islands for the mission
children, including a boarding department where the
children from the distant stations could be assembled
for education. Governor Boki gave to Mr. and Mrs.
Bingham a beautiful piece of ground near Honolulu,
which contained a bubbling spring of perennial and
wholesome water, which was named Punahou. Mr.
and Mrs. Bingham presented this most valuable piece
of property to the American Board's Mission, and here
was opened in 1841 a school for the mission children,
with Rev. Daniel Dole, principal, with Mrs. Dole, Mr.
and Mrs. Rice, and Miss Marcia Smith as teachers.
From this time onward the American Board advised
their missionaries to look forward to permanent residence
in the islands with their families, and that they should
seek their support from the churches which they had
founded, or, in other words, that they should become
pastors of the young churches they had organized. As
a consequence the mission families took root in the
land.
Later it was found that if the missionaries were to
be the pastors of the Hawaiian churches there would
be no room or support for a native pastorate, and
hence followed a change of policy and the fitting of
young Hawaiians for the ministry.




54


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


In 1852 Rev. Luther Halsey Gulick returned, with
his wife, from America to take up missionary work
in Micronesia under the American Board.    He was
the oldest son of Rev. and Mrs. P. J. Gulick who were
of the band of missionaries who landed in Hawaii in
1828, and was sent, when twelve years of age, to
America to be educated.
At the time of his return to Hawaii some of the
children of the missionaries were engaged in business.
The thought came to them that it would be fitting for
them to support Dr. Gulick, who was both an ordained
man and a physician, in his missionary work, and a
society, composed of the children of the missionaries,
was organized under the name of The Hawaiian Mission Children's Society.
As their fathers and mothers were all missionaries
there was a very strong bond of affection between the
children, and as their fathers called themselves brothers
the children spoke of their society as the Cousins Society. In the constitution of the society it was stated
that the objects were to preserve the bond of union
between the children of the missionaries, and to support a cousin of theirs who was going to the missionary
field of Micronesia.
The first President of the society was Mr. Asa
Thurston, son of Rev. Asa Thurston of the pioneer
band. They met once a month for a social meeting
and for many years, as long as Dr. Gulick remained
in Micronesia, they supported him and his family.
This organization still continues, but the meetings
are now held only two or three times a year, and the
funds raised are used for various missionary purposes.




Cocoa-nut Trees in Fru itage




, I
I   eA 




IX


BOARDING SCHOOLS
IN addition to the founding of churches, the missionaries established permanent boarding schools.
The first large boarding school, and the most
important in the earlier history of the mission, was
the Lahainaluna Seminary, which was commenced by
Rev. Lorrin Andrews in 1831. To this school were
sent the brightest scholars found in the common or public schools, with the view to higher education than they
could acquire in the common schools. This institution
was maintained in an efficient manner through all the
years of the continuance of the mission, but was finally
transferred to the government in 1857, and still continues under its care, though it does not now hold the
prominence that it once did, when it was the principal
high school in the country.
This school, during the first fifty years of its existence, furnished the best school teachers, judges, and
lawyers among the Hawaiian speaking portion of the
community, and from this school were elected those
who attended the theological training schools to fit for
the ministry.
Second only to the Lahainaluna school was the Hilo
Boys' Boarding School founded by Rev. David B.
Lyman, in 1836, which continues to this day. It is




56


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAI


maintained under its own trustees, and has today as
its principal Mr. Levi Lyman, grandson of the founder.
From this school, for many years, the best scholars
were sent for higher education to the Lahainaluna
Seminary. The Hilo Boys' Boarding School was the
model upon which General S. C. Armstrong founded
Hampton Institute for the benefit of the colored races
of America.
Tributary to the Hilo School was the Kohala Boys'
School, maintained for about fifty years by Rev. Elias
Bond.
At Hanalei, on Kauai, for many years there continued a Boys' School under the guidance of successive
missionaries.
The first of the Girls' Schools was the Wailuku
Seminary, founded about 1836, by Rev. and Mrs. J. S.
Green and Miss Lydia Brown. About 1840 it came
under the guidance of Mr. Edward Bailey and Miss
Maria Ogden, who carried it on for ten or twelve years
longer.
Mrs. Fidelia Coan conducted for a time a small
Girls' Boarding School in Hilo.
Punahou School or Academy was originally founded
for the education of the children of the missionaries,
but is now open to all classes and races of our island
community.
The earlier Hawaiian ministers were prepared for
their work in the Lahainaluna Seminary and, also, by
the personal teaching of individual missionaries.
At the request of the higher chiefs a Boarding School
known as "The Royal School" was established in Honolulu by the Mission in 1839, under the care of Mr.




Kamehameha 111L         William C. Lunalalo, who reigned
King   of liawa- fromn    Jan.
i873-Feb. i874
Qoieeh Emma, "Wie of               Kamnehameha IV.
Kamehamneha IV.




r ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~~~ ~ ~~~ ~ ~~~ ~ ~~~ ~ ~~~ ~ ~~~   ~ ~~~   ~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
I 




BOARDING SCHOOLS                 57
and Mrs. Amos S. Cooke, and was continued for about
ten years.
In this school were educated the five sovereigns who
reigned over the Hawaiian people from 1855 to 1903,
namely, Alexander Liholiho, Lot Kamehameha, William Lunalilo, David Kalakaua, and Lydia Liliuokalani.
Besides these there were ten or more of the children
of the high chiefs.
e~~~~~~~~~~ 








x


HAWAIIAN MISSIONARIES TO OTHER
GROUPS
rT   HE Hawaiian Group lies just within the Northern Tropics, while the Marquesas lie between
nine and ten degrees south latitude, and the
groups are 2300 miles apart. The latter islands were
discovered by a Spanish voyager, Mendana, in 1595,
or nearly two hundred years before Capt. Cook discovered the Hawaiian Islands, and twenty-five years
before the New England Pilgrims landed at Plymouth.
In 1833 two families from the American Board
Mission to Hawaii, made effort to secure a foothold
for missionary work in the Marquesas Islands, but
after encountering great dangers and privations, returned to the much larger and equally needy and more
promising Hawaiian field. English missionaries also,
going from Tahiti, failed to gain permanent results
in the Marquesas Islands. In 1853 Matunui, a chief
of Fatuhiwa, Marquesas Islands, arrived in Hawaii,
asking that Christian missionaries be sent to his islands
that they might share in the blessings which had so
enriched Hawaii. This appeal so stirred the Hawaiian
Christians that liberal contributions were made, two
ordained Hawaiian ministers, Rev. James Kekela and
Rev. Samuel Kauwealoha, with their wives, and two
58




MISSIONARIES TO OTHER GROUPS


59


deacons and their wives were sent, a vessel being
chartered to take them to the Marquesas Islands. Rev.
B. W. Parker accompanied them to assist in opening
the work and soon returned to Hawaii, leaving them
hopeful as to the future. For fifty years these two
heroic Hawaiians labored for the Christianization and
uplift of the benighted people of this most difficult
field. Besides the above, Messrs. Kaiwi, Kaukau, and
Hapuku, S. Kapahi, and G. Iaina served upon this
mission for longer or shorter terms, while Rev. James
Bicknell, son of a missionary to Tahiti and afterwards
in missionary work in Hamakua, Hawaii, spent two
or three years of his early missionary life in labor
with these Hawaiian missionaries at Omoa, Marquesas.
Much of the good order and Christian character that
may today be found upon the Marquesas Islands is
attributable to the faithful work of these humble
Hawaiian  Christian  missionaries.  Descendants of
Rev. James Kekela and of Hapuku are (now) living
upon Hivaoa, one of the Marquesas Islands.
Ships of the type called "Blackbirds" were known
in the South Pacific, near the middle of the nineteenth
century. These were simply pirates that visited some
of the South Sea Islands and by pretended friendship
decoyed numbers of islanders on board and then suddenly getting under way carried them off into slavery.
These kidnapped people were taken to certain ports
on the coast of South America where they were sold
into slavery by the ruthless pirates. A ship of this
kind visited the Marquesas Islands and kidnapped the
son of a Marquesian. This man in rage declared that
he would kill the first white man who should fall into




60        THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
his hands. Later the New England whale ship Congress came into the port of Hivaoa and the captain
sent his mate, Mr. Whalon, with a boat's crew ashore
to secure water and fresh vegetables for the ship.
Landing upon the beach Mr. Whalon was seized by
the aggrieved Marquesian and the company of his
friends. The boat's crew fled to the boat and returned
to the ship. Word was brought to the missionary
Kekela that a white man had been seized by the natives.
Well knowing the great danger, Mr. Kekela hastened
to the scene. He found a concourse of people and
the white man firmly bound, while the native oven
was being heated for cooking the captive to be eaten
at the cannibal feast. Mr. Kekela at once pleaded with
the angry Marquesian to spare the white man who
had done him no injury. "True, but his people carried off my son, and I will kill and eat him." The
missionary saw that all his pleading was without avail,
and then asked at what price he could buy the victim.
The Marquesian said: "Give me your whaleboat and
you shall have the white man." "It is a bargain,"
replied the missionary, and the white man was set
free and the missionary's prized boat was delivered
in exchange. This boat had been of great service in
the missionary work.
This noble act of humanity on the part of the
Hawaiian missionary later received worthy recognition
from President Abraham Lincoln, who sent a fine gold
watch to Mr. Kekela with a suitable inscription engraved upon it, and also presented the money for the
purchase of a new boat to replace the craft that had
been given in exchange for the life of Mr. Whalon.




MISSIONARIES TO OTHER GROUPS


61


The writer saw this famous watch in the hands of
Mr. Kekela and it is now in the possession of his
daughter, Susan Kekela.
The Hawaiian Christians and churches have not only
done efficient missionary service in the Marquesas
Islands, but have also borne valiant service in missionary work in Micronesia, more especially in the
Gilbert and Marshall Islands. The names of several
who, during the forty years from 1855 to 1895 aided
in gospel work in these groups, are held in honor
among the Hawaiian Churches and are here given:
Opunui, Kaaikaula, G. Leleo, Aea, Mahoe, Rev. S.
W. Kekuewa, now pastor on Oahu, Rev. W. N. Lono,
formerly pastor of Kaumakapili Church, Rev. S. P.
Kaaia, now pastor on Maui, Kanoa, long on Butaritari,
Rev. D. P. Mahihila, pastor at Puuloa, Oahu, Rev.
J. Nua, late pastor at Haleaha Koola Oahu, S. K.
Maunaloa, D. Kapali, S. P. K. Nawaa, Maka, Nalima,
D. Kanoho, T. Kaehuaaea, and W. P. Kapu.
Several of these men with their wives, after faithful
missionary lives finished their careers in their fields
of labor, while others lived to be of further service
to their home churches in Hawaii as returned missionaries. Four of them are today pastors of Hawaiian
Churches.
The influence for good upon the people and churches
of Hawaii, of the seven who went to Marquesas, and
of the nineteen men named above, all with their wives,
may confidently be counted of great benefit and of
spiritual uplift.




XI


STORIES OF LIFE IN HAWAII
Kaulia and the Sorcerer
AItIAWA, a heathen priest or soothsayer,
W   Kahuna Anaana, lived in North Hilo, in the
early days of Missionary Coan's career, in
about 1838. Deacon Kaulia meeting him one day expostulated with him, advising him to stop his fraudulent practices and come out an honest Christian.
The priest said: "You are a hawk, and I am a
hawk; there is no branch I may not light upon; I light
upon the green branch, and I light upon the dry
branch."
"Yes," said Kaulia, "you are a hawk and I am a
hawk, and the angel of God is a hawk."
Kaulia went on his journey toward Waipio valley.
Within a day or two Wahiawa died and Kaulia was
sent for to conduct the funeral. Kaulia returned immediately from his northward journey and entering
the room tapped on the coffin and said: "You were a
hawk, and I was a hawk; but the angel hawk has
scooped down upon you."
This language of the heathen priest, and the deacon,
is an apt illustration of the ready picturesque expressions at the instant command of the more able and
62




STORIES OF LIFE IN HAWAII


63


gifted Hawaiian leaders and speakers, and was very
taking with the people.
Schooner Life. A Man Overboard
Mother Gulick's prayer was that not one of her
boys should become a sailor. Living on these small
islands of limited resources, with old ocean "poured
round all" there was some reason to fear that the attractions of the sea might tempt to a sailor's life.
The very thing she feared came to pass, and her
second son became the captain of a two-masted schooner
named the Kamehameha IV, of which he owned onehalf and for two years he followed the life of a sailor
in the small craft.
When the children of the New England churches
sent out the first Morning Star, under Captain Bingham, to be the carrier for the missionaries in Micronesia, this schooner captain left his little schooner and
shipped as second mate of the famous Morning Star,
in which as second mate, and later as first mate or
chief officer, he made voyages to the Marquesas, the
Society Islands, and to the several groups of Micronesia.
It is the opinion of some who know him not that
the Hawaiian is a stolid being, devoid of sympathy,
and inexpressive of sentiment.
In 1854 I was captain of the schooner above mentioned, a vessel of 44 tons. She was broad of beam,
stiff as a church and, it must be confessed, a dull
sailer. Such a craft today in this era of steamers
and fine wind-jammers would command no passengers,
would secure no freight more costly than firewood.




64


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


But at that time not more than one steamer had ever
reached Honolulu, and a few schooners of from forty
to one hundred tons were the passenger carriers between the islands of the group, every voyage ending at
Honolulu.
Our usual route for the schooner, during that year,
was from Honolulu to Lahaina, thence eastward under
the lee of Maui across the wide Maalaea bay, past
Molokini, leaving Kahoolawe on our starboard, then
out into the Hawaii channel and across it to Honoipu,
under the lee of Kohala Point, the most northern point
of the Island of Hawaii. Here we landed the majority
of our passengers, Kohala people.  Leaving Kohala
point we recrossed the windy channel to Hana, at the
eastern point of Maui. Here we landed the remainder
of our passengers and their baggage, together, sometimes, with a little freight for the incipient sugar
plantation of Hana.
In this snug little harbor, easy to enter but difficult
of exit for a sailing craft, we took on pigs, poultry,
potatoes, and taro and, when prepared to sail on return
voyage, received deck passengers, men, women, and
children. For return voyage we again crossed the
rough channel to Kohala point where we received on
board an addition to our deck load of passengers for
Honolulu.
One night's sail from Kohala brought us to Lahaina
and the next morning we had the pleasure of landing
freight and passengers at the Honolulu wharf. One
such voyage usually took from twelve to fifteen days;
and, on rare occasions, yielded an income of from three
hundred and fifty dollars to four hundred dollars.




STORIES OF LIFE IN HAWAII


65


Such a crowding of passengers in the hold and on
the deck of so small a craft would not be permitted
today, but it is doubtful if ever a Hawaiian passenger
embarked on that craft who could not swim.
One stormy night, on a passage to windward with
a deck load of perhaps one hundred passengers for
Kohala and Hana, we pushed out from under the lee
of Maui into the lumpy seas of the Hawaii channel.
We furled the foresail, shortened the jib, and close
reefed the mainsail.  Under this short sail the little
vessel was laboring heavily in the mountainous waves.
Keawe, the best sailor of the crew of six or eight, had
stood at the helm from two to four o'clock of this
dark night and by the energy and tact of his able
seamanship, in handling the helm of the little schooner,
had saved the deck passengers from many a drenching
from breaking seas.
I was seeking rest on a transom in the small cabin,
with one ear open. Keawe, tired from standing two
or more hours at the helm, took his seat upon the
taffrail and, watching the tumbling seas, gave quick
commands to the new and less experienced helmsman.
"Put your helm up!" "Put it down!" "Hard down!"
as, watching, he saw an angry wave threatening an
instant deluge.
Some woman deck passenger said: "What is that
fell overboard?" and, in an instant, I sprang up the
companionway and saw Keawe in the white wake ten
feet astern of our craft. In a moment he was lost
in the darkness of the night amidst the tumbling and
breaking waves. We made instant effort to get the
schooner on the return tack that we might pick him




66


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


up. But the vessel was under such short sail that she
would not come in stays, and we were compelled to
wear ship, that is, we ran the vessel off before the
wind and so brought her on the port tack headed towards Maui; this sent the vessel far to leeward and
as we passed on toward Maui, we heard the voice of
our unfortunate sailor calling to us from the windward. We then made haste to shake the reef out of
the mainsail and to hoist the foresail, that gaining
headway, we might be able to come in stays and so
gain the ground we had lost and, if possible, save our
brave swimmer. We were successful, the schooner
came around in good shape and we stood back toward
Hawaii. All kept silence while our craft sped over
the dark, dashing seas. Not a sound of the voice that
rang over the waves as we had stood back toward
Maui. It was now half past four o'clock in the morning, and a half hour that the swimmer had been battling the waves. Should we ever see him again? In
an instant his head appeared right under the lee of the
schooner; we threw him a rope and he climbed dripping
aboard. In a moment the deck load of passengers
all burst out crying and sobbing. From childhood I
had maintained my disbelief in the possibility of crying for joy. Here were from seventy to one hundred
people in an instant convulsed with emotion. Asked
what he would have done if we had not picked him
up, he replied that if the vessel had waited till daylight he would have then swam down to her. When
he dropped asleep and fell overboard he had on a
new pea jacket; this, of course, he shook off at once,
but held it in hand hoping to save it. But as in the




STORIES OF LIFE IN HAWAII


67


gloaming of the night he saw the vessel steering straight
for him he thought he had better not be trammeled
with his coat, but be free to swim his best as the
vessel approached him, so he abandoned it to the fishes.
Frequently while the schooner lay at anchor at
Honoipu, Kohala, this man would take his fish spear,
a trident, and going to a point of rocks, would plunge
into the deep and diving several feet under water, with
spear in hand, sit down on the bottom or on a rock.
He said that remaining there motionless the fish
would approach to look at him when, with a quick
motion, he would spear a fish and return with it to
the schooner. He seldom failed to return without a
fish in hand. His movements under water must have
been very agile and skillful, for it is said that six
minutes is the limit of time that a man can remain
under water and live. Had I ever with watch in
hand timed his diving I might have more accurate
information, but this I can say, that, while lying at
anchor at Honoipu, where was a rough and rocky bottom, once on a time, a fluke of our three hundred pound
anchor became hooked under a ledge or a rock at a
depth of eight fathoms or forty-eight to fifty feet. We
were in a bad predicament, when this sailor volunteered to dive down and clear the anchor. Stripping,
he plunged head first from the bow of the vessel and,
immediately, we could see the soles of his feet as he
stretched head downward for the rocky ocean bottom.
At the preconcerted signal of shaking the anchor chain
we instantly slackened it off over the windlass, and
with a muscular jerk he freed the anchor fluke from
its hold on the rock, and we merrily reeled in the




68        THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
chain and anchor by the windlass. Then the faithful
and true son of Neptune came blowing up like a porpoise to the surface and climbed aboard, while our
flapping sails filled and our buoyant craft promptly
sped on her return voyage to Honolulu.
In this year, 1916, the athletes of Europe and
America are echoing the name of the humble Hawaiian,
Duke Kahanamoku, the world champion swimmer, who
would have found a close competitor in the unknown
sailor of the schooner Kamehameha IV, Keawe of
Kohala, of sixty years ago.
Crossing a Channel in a Canoe
On a previous page mention is made of Keawe who
fell from the schooner's deck on a stormy night and
was saved. Memory recalls another thrilling experience of deliverance from angry waves.
We four Gulick boys, Orramel and John, Charles
and William were safe in Punahou school in 1846,
while Theodore and little brother Thomas, the seventh
son, were at home with the parents at Kaluaaha,
Molokai.  This little fellow, then under seven years
of age, picked up a pebble of less than the size of a
pea and with childlike innocence experimented with
it to see if it would go into his ear. But a touch or
two and in it went. And every effort of the anxious
father and mother to get this small stone out of the
precious child's ear proving of no avail, it was decided that father should take the lad to Doctor Baldwin
at Lahaina, who would doubtless have instruments and
means of extracting the unwelcome stone from the ear.




STORIES OF LIFE IN HAWAII


69


The channel between Molokai and Maui at the narrowest point is ten miles in width, but the passage
from Kaluaaha to Lahaina was fifteen miles and was
made by canoes in from two to four hours according
to the breeze or the exertion of the paddlers.  The
early morning, before the trade wind strikes heavily
down the narrow channel, was the time to start. The
single canoe, with outrigger, and with three or four
canoemen was to be the passenger transport, and at
about four A. M. the slender canoe with father and
son and canoemen made the early start. As the day
broke the mother at home thought that it seemed a
windy morning and, as usual, her refuge was in prayer.
Just at daybreak a sudden gust of wind struck the
sail of the canoe and, in a moment, it upset and all
were struggling in the water. But where was our boy
Thomas? Not to be seen! One of the expert canoemen dived down under the submerged canoe, freed
him from a tangle of ropes, brought him choking and
spitting salt water, safe to the surface.
Ordinarily this would have been but an incident in
the voyage soon to be forgotten and laughed over when
the expert swimmers had righted the canoe and bailed
her out. But not so today. Upon unlashing the outrigger and righting the canoe the frail craft was found
to be cracked in such manner that no amount of bailing
out of the water would avail to free her. The canoe
would not sink, but, being water-logged, she could
neither be propelled by sail or paddles; and the prospect was of perishing near sight of land by the buffeting of boisterous waves. For hours, perhaps five or
six, the company hung around the wrecked canoe.




70


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


It was now learned that in the darkness of the early
morning the canoemen, failing to find the mast of the
single canoe, had taken the mast of the double canoe.
This heavy mast in falling had split the frail craft.
At about three P. M. there came across from Molokai
for Lahaina, an able whale boat with a load of poi,
or pounded taro, for sale in Lahaina, and seeing a
signal raised by our distressed canoemen came to the
rescue. Throwing out some of the bundles of food
they kindly took the shipwrecked company to the desired haven of Lahaina and to the home of Doctor
Baldwin who, with needed instruments, easily removed
the pebble that had been the cause of all this trouble.
The next day the father and little son upon return to
Molokai brought unmeasured relief to the anxious
heart of the mother, who during the day of their distress had prayed earnestly for their safety. This deliverance was recounted by the praying parents as
received in answer to prayer. With the Psalmist they
could say: "In my distress I cried unto the Lord, and
he heard me."




Canoe Riding the Surf at Waikiki








PART II


JOURNALS AND LETTERS
OF MISSIONARIES
XII
JOURNALS AND LETTERS OF MISSIONARIES 1820-1822
HE first missionaries to the Sandwich Islands
sailed from Boston October 23d, 1819, in the
brig Thaddeus, Captain Blanchard.
Extracts from the journal of Mr. Loomis tell of the
sailing:
A large concourse of people assembled on Long Wharf,
Boston, to witness our departure for the Sandwich Islands.
It was an interesting moment, we were about to bid
farewell to country, kindred and friends and embark for
the distant isles of the sea. There we knew not what
new and untried scenes, what dangers and perils might
await us. But we felt that our lives were in the hands
of an All-wise God, who would so dispose of us as to
advance His honor and glory.
Thomas Hopu made an affecting address to the surrounding multitude, thanking them for the kindness they
had shown him.
We were accompanied by a number of our friends
with the Prudential Committee of the Board. They took
an affectionate leave of us at one o'clock and before two
we were under weigh. We are all well and in good
71




72


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


spirits, provided with everything to render us comfortable
during the voyage.
The voyage was not especially eventful and its close
is told in the Mission Journal, which follows:
A COPY OF THE JOURNAL OF THE SANDWICH ISLANDS
MISSION
On Board Brig Thaddeus, Captain Blanchard, Bound to
the Sandwich Islands
EXTRACTS FROM A JOURNAL SUPPOSED TO HAVE BEEN WRITTEN
BY MR. LOOMIS.
March 27, 1820. While Brother Whitney was assisting
in painting the outside of the vessel, which he considered
as not only a pleasant and useful, but needful exercise, the
rope on which he held by one hand, gave way and let
him fall from a temporary scaffold into the sea, and he
was left astern, calling for help and endeavoring in vain
to overtake the vessel. Captain Blanchard's orders were
promptly executed and the brig, though under full sail
moving at the rate of six or seven knots an hour, was
"hove to" in five minutes and drifted slowly. In the
meantime, Brother Whitney, whose perfect self-possession
and skill in swimming enabled him successfully to baffle
the waves after one or two had broken over him, happily
gained a small bench, which had been providentially carried on deck a few minutes before and was thrown overboard to serve him as a temporary buoy. On this, though
his strength was considerably exhausted, he was easily
sustained after it had once or twice deceived him by
rolling. Never before did the mission family know how
much they loved him. In five minutes more a boat was
cleared away and let down and sent to his relief, which
received him in about the span of five minutes at the
distance, perhaps, of one-fourth of a mile. Before the
boat set off, as he was reclining on the bench and floating




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1820-1822


73


in the water, he raised his hat and waved it lest his
anxious wife should be too much distressed and then
composed himself again in prayer, while many hearts on
board were, "in this soul trying hour," lifted up to God
in fervent petitions that he would spare his life for his
appointed work among the Gentiles. By the blessing of
Him who had said: "When thou passest through the
waters, I will be with thee," he was taken up and safely
returned and, not far from twenty minutes from the time
he fell, was joyfully received on hoard. He was welcomed
with tender tears and with thanksgiving to an unchanging
Redeemer.
FIRST SIGHT OF MAUNA KEA, HAWAII
March 30, 1820. Let us thank God and take courage.
Early this morning the long looked for Owhyhee (Hawaii),
and the cloud capped and snow crowned Mauna Kea
appeared full in view to the joy of the little multitude on
board. A heavy cloud now envelops a considerable part
of this stupendous mountain, on the summit of which a
heavy body of snow appears at intervals quite above the
clouds.  (11 o'clock A. M.). We are now coasting along
the northeast part of the Island so near the shore as to
see the numerous habitations, cultivated fields, rising
smoke in different parts, fresh vegetation, rocks, rivulets,
cascades, trees, etc., and, with the help of glasses, men
and women, immortal beings purchased with redeeming
blood. We are much pleased not to say delighted, with
the scene and long to be on shore. Hopoo (Hopu), has
designated the spot in a little valley where he was born.
He and his native companions are much animated with
a view of their native shores.  Near the northern extremity the walls of an ancient heiau1 or heathen temple
1 Heiau: A heathen temple, or place of worship; being usually
an extensive enclosure of unhewn stone without a roof; a sacred
enclosure where offerings of food, of animals, and of human beings,
were made by the priests upon festive or sacred days.




74     THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


appears where the sacrifices of abomination have long
been offered to demons. (4 o'clock P. M.). As we double
the northern extremity of Owhyhee (Hawaii) the lofty
heights of Maui are on our right. As no canoes approach
us it is thought that it is a time of special taboo and
all the people are employed in its observance. Captain
Blanchard has concluded to send a boat to make inquiries
respecting the king and the state of the islands. Mr.
Hunnewell, Thomas Hopoo, and J. Honoree and others
have now gone on this errand and we wait with anxious
expectation for the first intelligence. (7 P. M.). The
boat has returned, having fallen in with a number of
fishermen near the shore who readily answered their inquiries and the messengers have astonished and overjoyed
our minds by reporting the unexpected and important
information from  the fishermen that the aged King
Tamahamaha (Kamehameha) is dead; that Rehoreho
(Liholiho), his son, succeeds him, that the images of his
gods are burned, that the men are all Ai-noa, that is,
they eat with women in all the islands, that one of the
chiefs only was killed in settling the affairs of government, and he for refusing to destroy his god; that
Rehoreho, the king, and Crymokoo (Kalanimoku), often
called Billy Pitt, resides at Kawaihae. These are interesting facts. They seem to show that Christ is overturning in order to take possession and that their souls
are waiting for His law, while the old and decaying pillars
of idolatry are falling to the ground.
March 31, 1820. The interesting intelligence of yesterday is confirmed today by a visit of Brother Ruggles,
Thomas Hopu, and William Tenui, to the residence of
Crymokoo where they were received kindly and entertained with unexpected civility. By them the widow of
Kamehameha sent us a present of fresh fish, cocoanuts,
sweet potatoes, bananas, sugar cane, bread fruit, etc., expressing much satisfaction that we had come to bring
them good things. Today a number of the natives came
off to the brig in their canoes, with vegetables, shells,




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1820-1822


75


etc., for the purpose of traffic and to gratify their curiosity. The sight of these children of nature drew tears
from  eyes thqt did not intend to weep. Of them we
inquired whether they had learned anything about Jehovah, who made Hawaii and all things. They replied
that Rehoreho, the king, had heard of the great God
of white men and had spoken of Him, and that all the
chiefs, but one, had agreed to destroy their gods and
idols, because they were convinced that they could do
no good, since they could not even serve their king.
Idol worship is therefore prohibited and the priesthood
entirely abolished. Sing, 0 Heavens, for the Lord hath
done it.
Kawaihae Bay, April 2, 1820. Sabbath. As we expected soon to leave Kawaihae Bay and as Captain
Blanchard was going on shore to call on the chief, it was
thought best that Mr. Bingham should accompany him
this morning for that purpose. He accordingly visited
the chief Kalanimoku and with him the most celebrated
heiau of the islands. It was built by Kamehameha, who
himself laid the corner stone. It stands on the brow of
a hill, a little back from the beach, and fronting the
seashore. It consists now principally of a high wall about
ten feet thick at the base and five at the top, twenty feet
in height on three sides of the parallelogram, which is
about a hundred and twenty feet in breadth and two
hundred and forty feet in length, but on the front side
the wall, instead of being elevated much above the area
inclosed, consists of four or five large terraces down the
declivity of the hill. These made a convenient place for
hundreds of worshippers to stand while the priest was
within offering prayers and sacrifices. In this inclosure
are the ruins of several houses burnt to the ground, the
ashes of various wooden gods, the remains of cocoanuts
and other like offerings, the ashes and burnt bones of
many human victims, sacrificed to demons. At the foot
of the hill is a similar inclosure two hundred and eighty
feet in length and fifty in breadth, which had been used




76


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


for the sacrifice of various beasts, fish and fruits. The
walls and areas of these open buildings, once tabooed and
sacred are now free to every foot, useless and tumbling
into ruin. In the afternoon Kalanimoku and his family
came on board to accompany us to the residence of the
King at Kailua.
April 4, 1820. At 10 o'clock this morning, one hundred and sixty-three days from Boston, we came to anchor
in Kailua Bay, about one mile from the king's dwellings.
Kalanimoku, who still appears to be friendly to our
cause, being sent for by Liholiho, went on shore. Soon
after Brothers Bingham, Thurston and Thomas Hopu,
accompanied by Captain Blanchard, also went ashore to
lay before the king the plan of our enterprise. As' we
drew near the shore, we saw him bathing in the surf with
his mother and first wife. He was distinguished by the
ornaments of beads on his neck. As we landed five or
six hundred natives of different ages and both sexes
swarmed around us and gave a noisy and singular shout,
and used all their eyes and ears to learn who and what
their new visitors might be. Among the crowd was a
distinguished native chief named Kuakini, a brother of
Kaahumanu, and, also, called John Adams, who had
acquired something of the English language and manners. He politely conducted us to his own home and,
afterward, to the house of Mr. John Young, who has
long resided here, has the rank of a chief and is now
acting secretary to the king. By him, and by Captain
Adams, an English settler with him, we were welcomed
to the Sandwich Islands. We then waited on the king
with the most important message that could be sent to
any earthly potentate. Read to him the official letter
of Dr. Worcester to Kamehameha and the letters of
Captain Reynolds to Kamehameha, and his son Liholiho,
and had them interpreted by Mr. Young and Thomas
Hopu and, through them, made known to his majesty the
views of the American Board and the wishes of the mission family. We presented the spy glass, furnished by




JOURNALS AND        LETTERS, 1890-1822         77
the Board, which the king accepted very thankfully. He
seemed pleased with the object laid before him and disposed to weigh the subject deliberately, expressed a degree of approbation and seemed far from being in haste to
give an answer to our message. All, indeed, both king
and chiefs, honorable women and common people, whom
we heard speak on the subject, expressed their approbation
of our doings in the general term, maikai, it is good. The
word gave us much encouragement.
Kailua Harbor, April 5, 1820. In the dawn of the
day, as we passed near shore, several chiefs were spending
their idle hours in gambling, we were favored with an
interview  with Hewahewa,2 the late High Priest.     He
received us kindly and on his introduction to Brother
Bingham he expressed much satisfaction in meeting with
a brother priest from America, still pleasantly claiming
that distinction for himself. He assures us that he will
be our friend. Who could have expected that such would
have been our first interview with the man whose influence we had been accustomed to dread more than any
other in the islands; whom we had regarded and could
now hardly help regarding as a deceiver of his fellow
men. But he seemed much pleased in speaking of the
destruction of the heiau and idols. About five months
ago the young king consulted him with respect to the
expediency of breaking taboo and asked him to tell him
frankly and plainly whether it would be good or bad,
2 Hewahewa: "The late High Priest " of the taboo system, which
for ages had held the people in bondage. The taboo system was
the device of the priests of heathen worship, the first prohibition of
which forbids women the pleasure of eating with their husbands
and to this was added, by the cunning priests, hundreds of restrictions; sample of which is: the forbidding of woman to eat the
banana and another, the declaration putting the whole people under
a ban upon the death of a high chief, in which case no canoes
could be launched and no fishing prosecuted for a given number
of days or weeks. The penalties for the transgression of a taboo
were heavy, the death of the offender being a frequent penalty.




78        THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
assuring him at the same time that he would be guided
by his view. HIewahewa speedily replied, maikai it would
be good, adding that he knew there is but one "Akoohah"
(Akua) who is in heaven, and that their wooden gods
could not save them nor do them any good. He publicly
renounced idolatry and with his own hand set fire to
the heiau. The king no more observed their superstitious
taboos. Thus the heads of the civil and religious departments of the nation agreed in demolishing that forbidding and tottering taboo system which had been
founded in ignorance, cemented with blood, and supported
for ages by the basest of human passion. They had, indeed, heard of the Christian's God, but gave little evidence
that they understood His laws, or loved His character,
or feared His Holy Name. Whether they conceived him
as worthy of their homage or not, they were convinced
of the vanity of idols and the folly of idol worship.
Before we returned to the brig the favorite wife of the
king expressed a decided opinion in favor of our settling
in the Islands and requested that we might stay. The
king, knowing her attachment to him and willing to try
her feelings, said to her pleasantly that if he admitted
and patronized the missionaries he could be allowed but
one wife, and he should not want her. As a gentle reproof, she rose from the mat on which they were reclining
and attempted to leave him, but he detained her and
turned it off playfully. Whether he felt the difficulty
or not, we cannot but feel that polygamy is one of the
great barriers to the progress of Christianity here.
Kailua, April 6, 1820. Today the royal family came
on board the brig to dine. Liholiho, dressed in what
his taste would consider a princely style, having a Maro
around the waist, a green silken scarf on his shoulders,
beads on his neck and a wreath on his head, was made
acquainted with the first American ladies he had ever
seen, and was seated at the head of our table and appeared
with great civility. It gave us great satisfaction to have
the heathen ruler and his suite sit down with us at




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1820-1822


79


our own table, and in his presence to implore a divine
blessing of the King of Heaven.
April 10, 1820. All the brethren went on shore to
make one more united effort to obtain permission to land
and reside at Kailua on Hawaii, and upon the other
islands. We found that Kaahumanu, who yesterday had
sailed in a double canoe on a fishing expedition, for whose
advice Liholiho pretended to be waiting, had returned
unsuccessful. She had been the favorite wife of Kamehameha and possessed more property and power than any
other woman on the islands. Her return was regarded
by the missionaries as a very favorable event. Keeaumokn
(Governor Cox), a chief of great influence, a brother of
Kaahumanu, who speaks English and is considered as a
substantial friend of the whites, arrived from Oahu at
the very moment when the important question was
pending.
April 11, 1820. Tuesday, Brother Bingham being
somewhat exhausted with the long continued negotiations
and seriously indisposed, Brother Thurston and Dr. Holman went on shore to hear the result, a result highly
creditable to the government and satisfactory to us and,
we believe, honorable to the Great Lord of Missions. Our
joy is mingled, however, with the painful thought of so
speedy a separation. The decision of the government is
that two of the brethren with their wives and two of
the native youths should remain here and be furnished
at the public expense with lodgings, water and fuel and
with fresh provisions and be allowed to commence their
appropriate work with the promise of protection and that
the rest of our number should be allowed to proceed to
Oahu and there be accommodated with convenient houses.
The king was told that if we did not do them good he
might send us away from his realm. It was the pleasure
of the king that the doctor should remain with Thomas
Hopu and William Tenui. It was easily agreed among
ourselves that one of the ordained missionaries should
remain here and maintain the standard of the gospel.




80        THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
The trying question, "Which of the two?" was decided
by ballot and Brother Thurston was, to our mutual satisfaction, appointed to occupy this important post.
April 12, 1820. Wednesday. A busy, trying, joyful
and important day. Brothers Thurston and Holman and
their wives, Thomas Hopu, and William Tenui, landed
and took up their residence at Kailua. The day was spent
principally in preparing and removing their effects from
the brig, dividing out to them such portions of the common stock as seemed desirable and necessary for their
immediate use, and in making the best arrangements in
our power for their comfort and usefulness. As the brig
lay about a mile from the shore the boats were employed
all day in transporting their baggage to the beach, several
of the king's men removing them from the beach to a
small house formerly occupied by Dr. Elliot, now designated for the temporary use of the Mission. After tea,
they who had willingly determined to commence their
work here, took leave of the Thaddeus and of most of the
remaining members of the Mission family and repaired
to their lodging on heathen shores. They were accompanied by Brother Bingham and Captain Blanchard and
were commended to the grace and protection of Him who
said: "Lo, I am with you alway!" and were left to the
peculiar privations and enjoyments of their new and untried situation.
April 13, 1820. Today the brig Thaddeus sailed from
Kailua with the remaining passengers for Oahu. Passing
to the leeward of the intervening islands of Maui, Molokai,
Lanai, and Kahoolawe.   After a voyage of thirty-six
hours the brig cast anchor in the offing of Honolulu on
the 14th of April. Thus ended the eventful voyage of
18,000 miles of the little brig, covering one hundred and
seventy-five days. Brother Bingham went early on shore
to call upon the authorities to inform them of the permission to land, granted by the king and chiefs at
Kailua.
April 15, 1820. Renewed our researches on shore, but




I  I v R   Hiran DmIinjbamn




I
I I I




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 180-1822


81


could not do much business in consequence of the absence
of the governor.  Delivered to Mr. Marin, a Spanish
settler and interpreter, a letter from Captain Winship,s
which authorized him to put us in possession of Captain
Winship's houses until he should have further orders.
The king's vessel, brig Neo, from Hawaii, arrived today
with a messenger bringing the general orders of government with respect to us. George P. Kaumualii, who also
left the Thaddeus at Hawaii, arrived in the Neo. He
informed us that a native who had stolen a piece of calico
from the king, at Kailua, was there convicted and put
on board the Neo in irons and thrown overboard, on her
passage hither, and drowned. Death is the penalty for
stealing the king's property.
April 16, 1820. Sabbath. Enjoyed the privileges of
public worship, probably for the last time on board the
Thaddeus. Boki (the governor) arrived in port this
afternoon, but we are told that through the influence of
strong drink he is now unfit for business. This is a stubborn foe with which we shall be obliged to contend, far more
formidable than the guns of the port or all the weapons
of war on the islands. And it is a grief to see that most
white men who have intercourse with these people are
in league with this "enemy of all righteousness."
April 18, 1820. This morning the brig Thaddeus entered the inner harbor of Honolulu in safety and anchored
within a few yards of the shore.
Honolulu, Oahu, April 19, 1820. Having at length succeeded in making the necessary arrangements, casting
ourselves again on the care of Divine Providence and putting ourselves in the power and possession of pagans and
strangers, on this interesting day we disembarked from
that board which had borne us in safety across the mighty
waters, and here took up our abode in this uncivilized
s Captain Winship brought to Honolulu the first bricks that the
Hawaiians had seen, hence he gave a new word to the languagepohaku Winihepa,a Winship Stones."




82        THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
heathen land, the scene of our future labors and sufferings
and, probably, the resting place of our bones when our
toils are over and our pilgrimage is ended. As a specimen of the kindness of some of our neighbors, Captain
Pigot and Mr. Green (with their usual politeness), anticipating our wants prepared for us a supper in American
style, such as we were unable at present to provide for
ourselves. As soon as the bustle of landing was over and
our lodgings in order, and the cottages were comfortably
fitted up, we erected an altar unto the Lord Our God
and, agreeable to a previous arrangement with our
brethren who landed a week before at Hawaii, presented
our united offerings of thanksgiving, and praise to
Jehovah, that He had preserved our lives, graciously
delivered us from the "perils in the sea," given us a
prosperous passage, and ministered unto us so propitious
an entrance among the heathen.
April 26, 1820. Perhaps a decent monument recording
the death of this distinguished heathen ruler, Kamehameha I, presented by the American Board to his affectionate people, might do much towards securing their
confidence and good will and be highly gratifying to the
young king, both as a specimen of art and as a token
of honor to his father and to his nation.
May 2, 1820. Brothers Whitney and Ruggles sailed for
Kauai with George Kaumualii, the son of the king of
Kauai. Two English whale ships have arrived.
May 12, 1820 Communication was opened with missionaries of the London Missionary Society at Tahiti.
May 16, 1820. Captain Starbuck took the first package
of thirty letters to the States.
May 20, 1820 A priest and his wife were this afternoon led by our door in irons, attended by an armed
guard and a noisy crowd, to the home of the governor
to be tried on the charge of "praying a woman to death."
Mr. Bingham and Captain Pigot together went down in
order to witness the trial, but the prisoners whom they
found seated on the ground at the door of the governor's




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1820-1822


83


house, apparently cheerful and unconcerned as if they
had intended no harm, were shortly sent away and confined. This singular, but long established superstitious
custom of praying to death malefactors, or persons charged
with crime, or unknown thieves when property is lost,
is now contrary to law and we understand the penalty
is death.
May 2S, 1820. Arrival of the brig Pedlar, Captain
Meek, bringing the first letters from the Board and friends
in America. Favors have been received from Captain
Meek, Captain Babcock, whose vessels are lying in the
harbor, and from Mr. Hunnewell.
June 19, 1820. Today we fix on a spot for the erection
of our buildings. It is called Kawaiahao and is a pleasant
situation on the road that leads eastward to Waikiki,
about a half mile from this village, in the midst of an
extensive plain, having the open sea in front and the
rising mountains in the rear. One of the three houses
which Boki has engaged to build for our accommodation
has been nearly raised this morning. The timber, small
but durable, has been cut for some time and is brought
fifteen to twenty miles on the shoulders of the natives.
June 28, 1820. Messrs. Whitney and Ruggles have returned from the visit to Kauai and tell of kindness received, and of the affecting meeting of George Kaumualii
with his father, the king, who believed his son had died
in America but now is alive. Presents were received by
the mission from King Kaumualii and wife and son,
mats, tapas, hogs, oranges, cocoanuts, and calabashes. He
acknowledged Liholiho (Kamehameha II) as his master,
and sent him    many presents.   The interpreter for
Kaumualii, former king of Kauai, is an intelligent
native, considerably advanced in years, has been to America
and is attached to the people, is disposed to use his influence in our favor, speaks English tolerably well and
will probably be a good interpreter for a preacher. He
once dined in New York with General Washington, who
finding that he was a native of the Islands when Captain




84         THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
Cooke was killed, gave him clothes and showed him much
kind attention.  The condescension and generosity of
Washington to this unlettered stranger is worthy to be
imitated by his successors and by thousands who revere
his name.
July 9, 1820. Governor Boki and his wife Liliha are
being taught to read by Mr. and Mrs. Bingham.
Kalanimoku is very friendly and wishes us to instruct
him.
Sept. 11, 1820 Sabbath. Mr. Bingham held a preaching service on the L'Aigle, Captain Starbuck, who showed
great kindness to the missionaries. We have now forty
scholars in our school, taught daily, among these are
George and Hannah Holmes,4 at whose home Sabbath
services are held and family worship maintained. Great
effort is made to interest and hold the scholars together.
Oct. 11, 1820. Dr. Holman, one of the first company
of missionaries, sailed in the brig Anor, Captain Hale,
for Kauai and America.
Oct. 25, 1820. Mr. Daniel Chamberlain finished stoning up our well. The first well that has been dug successfully in Honlulu.
Nov. 1, 1820. Captain Allen of a Nantucket whaleship, said to be a Quaker, called and gave the mission provisions to the value of sixty dollars.
Nov. 5, 1820. The Sabbath is beginning to be observed and quietness is noticeable.
Nov. 26, 1820. Today we received letters from Brother
and Sister Thurston, dated from   Lahaina.   The king
seems to have commenced in earnest his removal from
Kailua to Oahu. On the 22nd of October he returned
from  an excursion to Kealakekua to his residence at
Kailua, and Brother Thurston soon commenced prepara4The writer remembers these two estimable half-white people
who were resident on the Ewa corner of King and Fort Streets
where now stands the Odd Fellows' building and whom he knew
when he kept store on the ground now occupied by the Metropolitan
Meat Market.




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1820-1822


85


tions for proceeding with him to Maui. On the second
instant the king and royal family embarked for Maui,
leaving Brother Thurston and wife to follow when the
vessel should return. November 10th Brother Thurston
notes in his journal: "It is seven months today since
we landed in this place. We have great cause for gratitude to God for His mercies since we have been here.
Our health has been pretty good most of the time and
we have been comfortably supplied with provisions by the
king. Since his departure we feel ourselves almost alone.
Most of the inhabitants of Kailua have gone with him.
Thomas Hopu has recovered from his illness in a good
degree. He, Mrs. Thurston, little Daniel Chamberlain,
and myself, with three or four domestics, composed our
little assembly today." On the 14th they put their effects
on board the brig Neo and in the evening went on board
to embark for Maui, found the little vessel stowed with
men, women and children to the number of 475, besides
hogs and dogs in considerable numbers which rendered
the passage somewhat unpleasant. In two days they
reached Lahaina, landed the next morning and took their
lodgings in the house built for Dr. Holman, where they
will probably remain until they embark for Honolulu.
The illness of Thomas Hopu, alluded to, consisted principally of a trouble in his head, from which he has not
been entirely free for several years and which has considerably injured one of his ears, and often caused him
considerable pain and inconvenience. After Dr. Holman
left the struggling station a native doctor attempted to
cure the disorder in Thomas's head. He rolled up a large
green leaf, called in this country a ti leaf, pointed one
end of it into the affected ear and, requesting all to be
perfectly still, placed his mouth over the other end, muttered a prayer to the god of his forefathers, and breathed
three times into the ear, relying on his faith to effect the
cure. We find relics of superstition among these people
aside from the ruins of heiau and idols. It must be long
before all the rubbish can be removed.




86


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


Dec. S1, 1820. This morning, after a sermon by
Brother Bingham from John iii: 5, on being born of
water and of the spirit, the infant daughter of Brother
and Sister Bingham, Sophia Mosely, and the infant son
of Brother and Sister Loomis, were publicly and solemnly
dedicated to Christ by baptism into the name of the Holy
Trinity, administered by Brother Thurston.   Brother
Loomis' babe, the first white child born in the Sandwich
Islands, they call Levi, the name of the first tribe of men
consecrated to the priest's office. It was a pleasant and
solemn season and our house was filled with more than
ordinary numbers, who were more than usually attentive,
and those who were particularly interested as parents,
enjoyed the peculiar privilege of setting the seal of God's
covenant on their beloved offspring in this public dedication.
Jan. 1, 1821. The king purchased Cleopatra's Barge
for 8,000 pickles of sandalwood, valued at Ten ($10.00)
Dollars a pickle, $80,000? and on January 7th Mr. Bingham preached on board of Cleopatra's Barge with an attendance of many of the captains and seamen of the vessels in port.
Jan. 8, 1821. All the articles received from Boston are
truly acceptable, and we are particularly thankful to the
Board for remembering us as to flour. We have had but
little flour and some of the families have very much felt
the need of the bread to which they had been accustomed,
and for which they could find no substitute, though others
in the family are satisfied with the taro as a substitute,
generally.
We have planted about a quarter of an acre of corn
for an experiment. It came up well and a worm similar
to that which sometimes cuts off the young blades of
corn in America, has destroyed about half of it and a
smaller worn is now feeding upon the larger leaves of
the remainder. Our garden vegetables have a similar
fate. Taro, potatoes, sugar cane, and bananas seem to
be but little injured by any insect or reptile.




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1890-1822


87


Jan. 10, 1821. Yesterday and today Captain Turner
landed the frame and boards of our house,5 sent from
Boston, for the freight of which the owners make no
charge, while they generously confer on us a most important temporal favor. To fit up a room for a school
and public worship, with comfortable seats, we bought
today of Captain Turner and Captain Suter 1000 feet
of boards and plank at Fifty ($50.00) Dollars, the market
price. The timber, boards, etc., were placed in Gov. Boki's
yard.
Feb. 1, 1821. Captain Daniel Chamberlain overhauled
and repacked the timber and boards for our house.
Captain Suter returned from  Maui yesterday.  He informed the king that he had landed a house frame for us
and placed it in Governor Boki's yard. The king replied,
"maikai."
Feb. 5, 1821. Brothers Bingham and Thurston visited
the king again and found him awake, cheerful and friendly,
and ready to return their aloha, or salutation. They
thanked him for former kindnesses and told him as our
good friends in America had been so kind as to send us
a house frame, they wished his approbation to set it up.
To this he gave a decided negative, pleading the example
of his father who, he said, would not permit any foreigner
to build a house on his islands, except for him. This
was taken as decisive. We had been told that it was
taboo, so that we should not be allowed to build without
an effort. Soon after Brother Bingham appealed to his
compassion, saying that our wives had been accustomed
to having good floors to live on and we feared that if
they were obliged to sit, and work, and sleep on the
damp ground they might be sick and die, especially as
the seasons were sometimes wet, and our present houses
5 This House, the oldest building standing in Honolulu today,
January -, 1917, and known as The Old Mission House, is on King
street, a few hundred feet eastward of Kawaiahao Church, and is
an object of much interest to residents and visitors alike.-Editor.




88


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


would not last long and ventured to propose, again, to
set up the new house. The king replied, "hanahana" (do
it). But he added, "When you go away, take everything
with you."
March 16, 1821. Excursion to Koolau. This morning
Brothers Thurston and Bingham, with the children of
the family and others, members of the school, set off on
a walk to visit the district on the opposite side of the
island. Reached the precipice at the distance of seven
or eight miles in the period of three hours, enjoying the
prospect. The descent of the precipice is by a very irregular and rugged path, winding at first by a gentle
slope along the side on the impending rocks, and then
by steeper effects where the traveller must cling with his
hands and creep from crag to crag, a distance of 150
to 200 feet ascending and descending, and then passing
off in an angle of about 45 degrees along that part of the
mountain, which projects more into the valley than
where you first arrive at the precipice. Down this steep
our little company descended where it would be impossible for any domestic animal to ascend without the aid
of human hands. Formerly the traveller descended and
ascended by ropes at another perpendicular part of the
rock, before this singular path was discovered. Having
walked about a mile into the valley of Koolau, secluded
as it is by mountains from the rest of the island, which
is itself secluded from the rest of the world, joined by
a number of the natives of the valley, our adventurers
sat down under a shady tree upon a little hill. Three
of our pupils read and interpreted to the listening natives
the first of Mrs. Barbauld's hymns in prose. After singing one of the songs of Zion in this strange land and
a prayer being made to the promised instructor of the
heathen, Brother Bingham preached a sermon to this
little group of thirty or forty souls, the first, doubtless,
ever heard in this valley. Honolii interpreted and closed
the interview by a prayer in the language of the country.
The design of the discourse was to make known some of




A Pim~.itive 1"ii, H1msc with l  m ~roilpilny of 11,VIImoI
nata the door
The FirstFrained  icm,  of Tloidithiii  whichl mt~ 1.oiled fror
1o0t111 Ja01 1 lo x 18 1111 0Ii wh11h sxald1010 xx   es  I&o
King. Stre




-I




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1820-1882            89
the first truths respecting the character and works of
the Creator and Redeemer of the world. At 2 o'clock
P. M. our company, consisting of more than twenty,
began to retrace their steps and at 3 o'clock regained the
height of the precipice in safety, but with much toil and
sweat, and here joined in thanksgiving to our preserver.
Then, proceeding a little further to the place where the
four stones be that are called gods, sat down upon the
grass to a comfortable meal provided by Hannah Holmes,
lifting up a prayer for blessing and returning thanks to
Jehovah.
April 28, 1821. Today all the brethren have been engaged in digging the cellar for our new house and in
the digging we discovered the skeleton of a human being.
For want of stone we are building the walls of mud and
straw, which we think will answer very well. The cellar
is now completed and it will be a valuable store room.
May 4, 1821. Captain Chamberlain procured of Captain Brown 1000 feet of boards to enable us to finish our
house. The market price is fifty dollars a thousand.
To explain the following passage from the Mission
Journal of date July 30, 1821, we add the information
that King Liholiho with Governor Boki and others left
Honolulu professedly for Ewa, but the king refusing to
land at Ewa ordered that the boat be headed for Kauai,
and, after a dangerous voyage, landed the next day at
Waimea, Kauai. Messrs. Bingham and Ruggles had preceded the king to Kauai in the ship Tartar.
July 30, 1821. Received a letter from Brother Bingham by the Tartar, which arrived today, dated July 25th.
After mentioning the singular manner in which Liholiho
left Oahu and his arrival at Kauai, with some other
events, he writes: "You will be surprised if I tell you
that last evening Kaumualii (the king of Kauai) in a
very formal manner and, in the presence of a number
of chiefs, of Mr. Jones, the Consul, of Captain Masters,
and others, gave up to Liholiho his Island, his vessels,
arms, ammunition, men, etc., with full liberty to place








90         THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
over them whom he pleased, stating also that he had
formerly made a treaty with his father Kamehameha
acknowledging him to be his superior. Naihe, a chief of
Hawaii, made a short speech confirming what had been
said respecting the treaty. But you will be gratified, as
well as surprised, to hear that Liholiho, after a profound
silence for some minutes, replied: 'I did not come to
take your Island. I do not wish to place any person over
it, nor to take anything from you, but I wish you to
keep your Island just as you have had it before' This
was followed by a general shout and the kings smiled
together in this bloodless ratification of a former treaty
of peace." For some time past considerable has been
said respecting the probability of a war between these
two kings, but we are happy to learn that amity subsists
between them and we hope it may continue.6
August 9, 1821. The men engaged to build a house for
the worship of God commenced putting up the frame
today. It is to be fifty-four feet by twenty-one or twentytwo. The timber is not quite as good as we expected, but
it will form a convenient place for public worship on the
Sabbath; and it is to be hoped it will make a favorable impression on the minds of the people and induce more
of them to attend our meetings and excite a more general
inquiry respecting the religion of Jesus.
August 10, 1821. Commenced building our cook house
of stone and mud, ten feet square, with an oven of brick
in one side which will be an important addition to our
cooking facilities, though there is a small oven attached
to the stove.
January 7, 1822. First monthly concert of the year.
6 When some weeks later King Liholiho (Kamehameha II) returned to Honolulu he brought with him King Kaumualii of Kauai
who soon after became the husband of Kaahumanu, formerly the
favorite queen of Kamehameha I, and thus the alliance between the
two parts of the group was cemented. Kaumualii died in Honolulu in May, 1824,




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1820-1892       91
A day of spiritual interest. Commenced the first printing
ever done in the Sandwich Islands, the operators of the
printing press having fitted up for the purpose one of
the thatched houses built for us by the government. Governor Cox (Keeaumuku, Governor of Maui), who seems
to take as friendly an interest in our work as any of
the chiefs, was present and assisted with his own hands
in composing a line or two and in working off a few
copies of the first lesson of Hawaiian syllables, having
the composing stick put into his hands and being shown
when to take and how to place the types and then to
pull the lever. Several gentlemen, also, were present,
Captain Masters, Captain Henry, Mr. Hunnewell from
America, and Mr. Butler, a resident of Maui, who also
took an interest in this novel scene, while one of the
highest chiefs of these islands aided in commencing the
printing of his native tongue. He, too, congratulated
himself upon the achievement. But our interest is in view
of future and distant results, which cannot but be happy.
April 15, 1822. Today our hearts have been cheered
by the arrival of the Sloop Mermaid, Captain Kent, with
Messrs. Tyerman, Bennet, and Ellis, together with nine
natives from the Society Islands. Gladly do we welcome
these friends and servants of the Lord Jesus to these
shores, to our house and table, and to every comfort
which our circumstances will furnish. About nine o'clock
in the morning we met them on the beach near the
present dwelling of the king. We had the pleasure of
introducing them to his Majesty Liholiho. After a short
stay with him we conducted them to the Mission House,
bidding them welcome to our humble lodgings and frugal
fare while they remained at these islands, which will
probably be about three weeks. Two of the natives whom
they brought with them are chiefs and have their wives
with them. They have for some time been professors
of religion and are expecting on their return to be left
at the Marquesas for the purpose of commencing there
a missionary establishment. May the Great Lord of




92     THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


Missions go with them and prosper their effort to build
His kingdom in these now heathen islands.
EXTRACT FROM THE JOURNAL OF MRS. SYBIL BINGHAM,
WHEN THE TAHITIAN DEPUTATION VISITED HAWAII
Four families united in one, all having children, all
having infants, with eighteen or twenty native children
divided among them, two native youths, Thomas and
Honolii, one young man, Mr. Harward, from New England, constituted, at that time, the Mission family at
the station. One framed house, containing five rooms,
fourteen by twelve, above and below, with some unfinished
spacee not inclosed in rooms, with a store room and eating
room in the cellar, was the habitation in which the four
families dwelt and in which they sought to make comfortable their truly welcome guests.
Here we could all have been comparatively comfortable
had it not been for the burning sun of June and July
beating upon the roof and unclapboarded sides of the
house. I would here say we seldom, at any time of the
year, suffer from the heat if not exposed to the direct
rays of the sun. There is, uniformly, a breeze sufficient
to render the air agreeable. But the house is so thin,
and the exclusion from the air such, that the heat was
very uncomfortable and it was favorable for us that our
engagements called us out most of the day. But our
health was preserved in good measure and our minds
rendered comfortable and happy. Some plans of usefulness were devised and, I trust, through Grace assisting,
some feeble praises were offered to our Divine Benefactor
for his unfailing mercies. But ways and means must be
devised and labor done that so many might be fed each
day with food convenient for them. On our return from
Kauai Mrs. Loomis superintended the domestic concerns,
though hardly able to keep about from the great exertion
she had made, but more particularly exhausted in consequence of a walk several miles into the country and




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1820-1822


93


without rest on her return. Mrs. Chamberlain, having
a care of the washing and ironing, with the daily charge
of the visiting gentlemen, her husband, and one or two
of the children being ill, and located up stairs, felt it
difficult to have the care of the cellar kitchen. I was
exceedingly wearied out by the peculiar hardships of my
passage up, after my labor at Kauai, and hardly fit to
undertake business to which I was unaccustomed. In
two or three days Mrs. Loomis gave up and took her bed.
Mrs. Chamberlain felt it her duty, rather than mine, to
take the place below. She kept it ten or twelve days,
when Mr. Chamberlain had a most violent attack of
rheumatism  and required her whole attention.   Mrs.
Thurston had commenced a new term in my school, committed to her care when I left it for Kauai, and considered
it desirable that she should finish the quarter. There was
no alternative, my duty was plain. I went below, stood
at the helm and, except a few of the first days of my
labor, had the care of seeing that fifty were fed three
times a day. The morning I commenced Mr. Whitney,
with his family, came up from Kauai, making the fifth
family in our household. You will be ready to say, if
there be a spot for them, they have come at the right
moment. But being in a new place with two children,
who both cried all the time, I never looked for Mrs.
Whitney out of the chamber. I stood it thirteen days and
hoped to have persevered, but the fears of my kind husband
were aroused, he saw that change must be made for the
school, if but for a little while. Mr. Chamberlain and
Mr. Loomis were both too ill to leave their room. I
went into the school, Mrs. Thurston took the post, stood
it five days and said some other way must be devised.
Mrs. Loomis, too, seriously needed a nurse. Mr. Harward
was then prevailed upon to try the kitchen a month. During this month God was pleased graciously to restore
prostrated health and strength in a good degree, so that
less difficulty was found in managing after that. As for
things to put on the table we sometimes had beef, pork,




94        THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
fish, potatoes, butter, cheese, flour, sugar and, sometimes,
we were destitute of all of them and of the most of them
at a time, but whatever might have been the fare, a bystander would have pronounced it generally a cheerful
meal. Though we sometimes wrought hard and fared
coarsely, yet God was pleased to allow us daily the hope
that we were strengthening each other's hands in holding
up the standard which, in His kind providence, had been
erected in this distant land. To make the picture true
very many bright, pleasant spots should be put in, but
my pages are lengthening and I will only add now that,
notwithstanding all these things, those few months were
a very interesting part of our missionary life, and a
period, I think, which will long be remembered with
gratitude.




XIII


JOURNAL AND LETTERS, 1822-1828
M AY 9, 1822. Kaumualii and Kaahumanu having
expressed a wish that Auna and Mr. Ellis
might remain here as teachers the Deputation
laid the subject before us and very particularly consulted
our views respecting it, proposing to locate Mr. Ellis
here to enter into our labors to assist, particularly, in the
acquisition of the language and in the translation of the
scriptures. We assembled in the sitting room and engaged in special prayer for special direction in this new,
unexpected, but deeply interesting business. What could
we do? The thing had not been sought by us or by them.
We had, indeed, thought that such a thing might be
desirable, but did not suppose it would be practical and
had not ventured to drop a single hint of that nature,
not even among ourselves.
May 11, 1822. Messrs. Tyerman, Ellis, and Bennet of
the Deputation, with Mr. Bingham, started on a tour of
Oahu going by boat to Pearl Harbor and thence walking
to Waialua and through Koolau to Kaneohe and, climbing
"The Pali," returned down Nuuanu Valley to Honolulu.
August 2, 1822. The king, with his favorites within
the family, are engaged to receive instruction in reading
and writing. He requested that one hundred Hawaiian
spelling books might be immediately made ready to put
into the hands of his people, assuring us also that when
his debts should be paid all his people should be permitted
to learn. This we regard as a favorable and an important crisis in the progress of the mission, and the
books will be furnished.
95




96


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


August 4, 1822. Sabbath. The chiefs and people gave
good attention to the preached word. Mr. Ellis preached
in the morning and afternoon. Mr. Bingham assisted in
giving out the hymns that had been composed by Mr. Ellis
in the Hawaiian language and, for the first time in public,
offered one of the prayers in the same language.
August 5, 1822. The king's dwelling house, which
stands crowded in between the fort and the harbor, became emphatically a school house. The king himself, his
wives and favorites, engaging in good earnest in the employment of learning to read and write. Equally diligent
is Governor Cox or Keeaunoku and his family at his
own home, besides sending ten pupils to the school in
our yard at the house first built for us by the government.
August 6, 1822. Kaahumanu and her husband Kaumualii requested that their people might be furnished
with forty books and commenced learning to read their
own language. It was truly interesting to see this dignified and powerful heathen chiefess drop her hand of
cards and take a book from a Christian to learn in a
childlike manner the rudiments of the art of reading.
When she had learned the letters a, e, i, o, u, she said
to her women "Ua loaa iau," "I have got it," with something perhaps of the feelings of the mathematician who
leaped from the bath exclaiming "Eureka, Eureka," when
he had discovered the solution of a difficult problem.
Naihe, a high chief, and Kapiolani his wife, and Kuhio,
a favorite, are also engaged in learning to read.
August 7, 1822. Mr. Ellis preached to the people this
afternoon. Just before the service Mr. Bingham went
with Kaumualii to the house of Kaahumanu to induce
her, if possible, to attend meeting with her company.
She immediately ordered her covered wagon to be made
ready and, being drawn by her servants, rode with several
others to the chapel, attended by a large company of
chiefs and people. Then Kaahumanu taking Mr. Bingham's arm and walking forward of the group came to
the house of God as the bell was ringing for the service.




i_:::_i_;;:::::_:::::::::: i
I_::
r i _
II
-
~r*
I








JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 18t2-1828


97


August 9, 1822. At several places in Hawaii, by the
express order of Kaahumanu and Kaumualii, the idols
which had been laid aside and not destroyed, were brought
forth and burned. In the windward part of Hawaii one
hundred and two idols were committed to the flames in
one day by their command.
August 11, 1822. Sabbath. A peculiarly interesting
day. Mr. Ellis preached in the morning to a very full
house, the king and queen being present. At the opening
of the service the marriage of Thomas Hopu to Delia, a
promising native woman who has been instructed in the
family of Mr. Thurston and who gives some evidence of
loving the gospel, was publicly solemnized, the ceremony
being conducted by Mr. Bingham in the Hawaiian language. Agreeable to the practice in the Society Islands
the parties subscribed their names to the following note
in a blank book provided for the purpose, together with
the witnesses, as follows:
MARRIED BY REV. H. BINGHAM,
AUGUST 11, 1822:
Daniel Tyerman
George BennetTho                     pu
James Kahuhu                   Delia
This is, doubtless, the first Christian marriage ever
'celebrated in these Islands.
Translation of the first recorded Hawaiian letters, from
King Liholiho to a chief of Huahine, Society Islands:
Hawaii, August 16, 1822.
Mahine:
I will now make a communication to you. I have compassion towards you on account of your son's dying. My
love to you with all the Jbtiefs of all your islands.
I now serve the God of you and of us. We are now
learning to read and write.




98


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


When I shall become skillful in learning I will then
go and see you.
May you be saved by Jesus Christ.
Liholiho Kamehameha II.
August 22, 1822. The cutter Mermaid sailed with the
Deputation that came from Tahiti, Messrs. Ellis, Tyerman, and Bennet having made a very opportune, acceptable and useful visit of four months. Before they left
Mr. Ellis was invited by Kaumualii and other chiefs to
bring his family and settle in these Islands.
August 31, 1822. Three hundred persons are now
learning to read on Maui.
Sept. 1, 1822. For the last two months from three hundred to four hundred natives have attended the Sunday
Chapel Services.
Captain Elias Grimes, of the brig Owyhee, writes that the chiefs of the Northwest have heard
of the work of the missionaries to Hawaii and the chief
Skitegates wishes to visit the Islands, and put his family
under the instruction of the missionaries. How pathetic
the desire for the light that had but begun to send its
rays 2000 to 3000 miles over the ocean waves.
Nov. 30, 1822. Captain Chamberlain returned from
Kauai having erected a house for Mr. Whitney and
family at Waimea, Kauai.
Feb. 4, 1823. Rev. Mr. Ellis, wife and four children,
accompanied by three Tahitian teachers with their wives,
have arrived from Tahita by the schooner Active, Captain
Charlton, to assist us in our missionary work. Mr. Ellis
preached at once in the Tahitian language and was affectionately received into fellowship.  Mr. Ellis brought
letters from the Agents of the London Missionary Society,
Messrs. Tyerman and Bennet.
Feb. 28, 1823. The Hawaiian Clerical Association has
been founded by the ordained missionaries. Mr. Samuel
Whitney, who left his college course at Yale to come with
the first company to the Islands, was examined and or



JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1822-1828       99
dained to the gospel ministry. At about this time Captain D. Chamberlain left with his wife and six children
for return to the United States, having with them the
warmest sympathy and full concurrence of their associates.
April 27, 1823.  The ship Thames arrived this day
from Boston bringing the first reinforcement to the mission, consisting of Rev. Wm. Richards and wife, Rev.
Charles S. Stewart and wife, Rev. A. Bishop and wife,
Mr. and Mrs. James Ely, Mr. and Mrs. Goodrich, Dr.
and Mrs. Blatchley, and Mr. Levi Chamberlain. A colored woman, Miss Betsey Stockton, also accompanied Mr.
and Mrs. Stewart.
May 18, 1823. The missionaries were requested to conduct prayers at the Palace.   Rev. Ellis opened this
service.'
June 26, 1823. Messrs. Ellis, Bingham, and L. Chamberlain visited the high chief Kalanimoku to review with
him nineteen or twenty hymns that had been written in the
Hawaiian language, principally by Mr. Ellis. These met
Kalanimoku's hearty approval. There are on Oahu at
this time several Tahitian teachers who were accompanying Mr. Ellis en route to the Marquesas, but were landed
by the Captain at Honolulu.    One of these valuable
Tahitian teachers was Auna.
Keopuolani, one of the widows of Kamehameha I,
mother of Liholiho and Kauikeaouli, became an earnest
follower of the teachings of the missionaries and was
baptized by Mr. Ellis at Lahaina in September 16,
1823.  She died the same day and was buried with
Christian services led by Mr. Ellis who preached from
the text: "Blessed are the dead that die in the Lord."
The funeral was attended by a large concourse of
1 This service, commenced by Mr. Ellis, was continued for
twenty years, by one or another of the members of the mission, leading at a stated time of day, and on a designated day of the week.




100


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


people who manifested their great love and affection
for this distinguished chiefess, the first baptized Christian of the race.
In a letter from the Mission of October 23, 1823,
we find the following:
Plain, humble, comfortable dwellings, and food, with the
means of imparting instruction most advantageously to
the nation, is all the pecuniary aid we expect or desire
from the churches or the Board. These, together with
the prayers and counsels and kind influence of our friends,
we need in order to prosecute our work at all. We need
them to promote cheerfulness and vigor to perform our
itinerating tours on foot, to preach in every district and
cottage and village, to study and master this rude language, to translate and publish the Scriptures, to perform
no small share of domestic labor and, at the same time,
to teach 150,000 rude natives all the arts and duties of
social and civilized life from the a. b. c. of the language
to the highest possible attainments.
King Liholiho, while paying external respect to the
missionaries and making some effort to learn to read,
led a reckless, dissipated life.  Once a missionary
visited him and after much entreaty the king made
the following promise: "Five years and I will become
a good man." In 1823 he conceived the idea of visiting England and, though the chiefs used every effort
to dissuade him, he was immovable. The main reason
for his going was love for roaming. An extract from
the Mission Journal, Honolulu, Nov. 27, 1823, tells
of his departure, as follows:
This has been an interesting day to the people, one
which will doubtless be memorable in the history of the
nation. About 10 o'clock A. M. the king took an affec



JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1822-1828 101
tionate leave of his people, leaving the wharf in the boats
of the L'Aigle, and accompanied by his favorite wife
Kamamalu, Governor Boki and his wife Liliha, Kaihikukui, Kekuanaoa, and Manuia, amidst the wailing of the
multiude that thronged the shore, and the roaring of
cannon, embarked for London on board the L'Aigle which
was standing off and on at the mouth of the harbor.
Two of the five wives which the king had when the Mission arrived he has put away, as we suppose, some time
since, and two of the three remaining he has left behind.
The government of the Islands and the public business of
the king, he has left in the hands of Kalanimoku and
Kaahumanu, and nominated Kauikeouli, his little brother,
to be his successor in case he should not return. Under
the steady management of those to whom the government
is left, we apprehend no embarrassment to the cause of
the mission in consequence of the absence of the king
and queen for though the king has been decidedly a
patron to the mission, yet his loose habits have never
ceased to have an opposite tendency. We cannot but hope
the effects of this singular and unlooked-for enterprise
of the king will be salutary on his own mind and manners and on the general improvement of the nation and,
in some way, facilitate the work of the Mission. The
prospect of this would have appeared to us, however, much
more fair had Mr. Ellis been allowed to accompany the
king as an interpreter and guide, instead of the man
whom the captain seems to have chosen in his stead.
Jan. 1 1824. We are happy to notice that Kaikioeva
sent back to us today from Lahaina Mr. Whitney's trunk
and most of its contents, which had been stolen on the
28th  of November.    The young prince, Kauikeouli,
caused his kahu, his chief steward, to be removed and
discarded because he encouraged stealing, lest, as he said,
he should himself be chargeable with that fault. Opiia,
who was one of the wives of the late Kamehameha, as
she sat at tea with the family some days since, said she
had in her possession a large silver spoon with the initials




102


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


of Mrs. Bingham's name, which she had deciphered on
the handle. It had been stolen from Mrs. Bingham
nearly two years ago. Opiia said she received it from
one of her women who had it from a boy. She sent immediately for it and very cheerfully restored it.
Jan. 12, 1824. The brethren and sisters, Messrs.
Ruggles and Goodrich and their wives, who were assigned to the station at Hilo were desirous to proceed and
no one would be responsible for their detention provided
a conveyance could be obtained. A meeting was called
to consider the expediency of chartering a small schooner,
under the command of Mr. Hunnewell, which, it was soon
ascertained, might be obtained for the purpose of transporting the detachment, with their effects, for one hundred dollars. Before noon it was unanimously resolved
to charter the schooner and make immediate preparations
for their embarkation for Hilo.
April 15, 1824. A letter has been received by the
brethren from Messrs. Thurston, Bishop, and Ely, from
Kailua giving the pleasing intelligence that Kamakau, an
active chief at Kaawaloa, had applied to them for Christian baptism and had given them satisfactory evidence
of a radical, saving change of heart, which, in their view,
rendered it suitable, with our consent, to propound him
for admission to the church. Kapiolani, also, they represent as in a very interesting state of mind, but does not
offer herself as a candidate for baptism because, as she
says, she is too wicked yet, but hopes to be better by
and by.
Extract from a letter dated Hilo, Dec. 17, 1824.
Friday. This morning we heard that Kapiolani was
on her way to visit the volcano and spend the Sabbath
there. We thought it expedient that one of us should
go up there and spend the Sabbath with her.      Mr.
Ruggles being destitute of shoes it was thought advisable
for Mr. Goodrich to go. About eleven o'clock A. M.




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1822-1828            103
he set out and arrived at the volcano about three P. M.
on Saturday. Not finding Kapiolani there Mr. Goodrich
spent the Sabbath with a company of her people, whom
she had taught to regard the day by resting from their
labors. They were there building a house for her accommodation when she should arrive. Mr. Goodrich preached
to the people from Matthew iv: 17. Kapiolani did not arrive until Tuesday noon of the twenty-first, having too great
a regard for the Sabbath to travel on that day. She is,
doubtless, the most zealous advocate of any of the chiefs
for the spread of the gospel among the inhabitants of
these islands. On arriving at the house prepared for her,
her first request was to have Mr. Goodrich select a hymn
and lead in prayer. This was a pleasant and happy season. The next day, Wednesday, Dec. 22, after attending
family worship and breakfast, Kapiolani and attendants,
about fifty in all, accompanied by Mr. Goodrich, began to
descend into the crater. The descent, about four hundred
feet, is quite steep, then for a considerable distance it is
more gradual. Kapiolani and most of her company descended to the ledge, which is from a few feet to a mile
wide and extends nearly around the crater about five
hundred feet from the top. Below the ledge is a descent
of three hundred or four hundred feet, still more difficult
in consequence of so many chasms in the lava which, in
many places, is broken off and fallen down. Upon the
brink of the ledge, above mentioned, the whole party sat
down and Kapiolani addressed them, saying: "Jehovah
is my God he kindled these fires, I fear not Pele."  She
then ate some of the ohelo berries, which were considered
sacred to the goddess Pele and tabu to women. Then,
at her request, they united in singing and one of her
attendants led in prayer.
We return to Extracts from the Missionary Journal,
Honolulu:
March 9, 1825. The whale ship Almira arrived in the
roads this morning and the report was circulated that the




104


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


king and queen were dead. Mr. Bingham and Mr.
Chamberlain hastened on board to ascertain, if possible,
whether the unwelcome rumor was well founded or not.
The letters of the Corresponding Secretary in Boston
assured us of the death of Queen Kamamalu and papers
received from the ship Peru, in the course of the day,
fully confirmed the distressing fact that both the king
and queen of the Sandwich Islands were dead. The inquiry arises at once what will be the effect on the nation.
As soon as it was communicated to Kalanimoku he wrote
a note announcing it to Kaahumanu and Opiia at Mona
and they returned him answer immediately, encouraging
him to pray with the heart to God that He might show
mercy. At Kalanimoku's request the chiefs came down
from Manoa and in a consultation concluded to send
letters forthwith to the chiefs on the other islands, apprizing them of the sorrowful event, and giving them
their official advice.
March 10, 1825. Kalanimoku and Kaahumanu dictated letters to the chiefs stating the principal facts,
charging them to keep the people quiet, to direct their
prayers and thoughts to the God of Heaven and to wait
for their orders to assemble in a common council for
the good of the nation. The letters being copied in a
fair hand by Mr. Levi Chamberlain, Kauikeouli, and the
two administrators of the government, who dictated them,
signed them with their own hands, and Qpiia was sent
with them to Maui and Hawaii. At her departure we
joined with them in prayers at the house of Kalanimoku.
It being thought desirable for Mr. Chamberlain to visit
stations at Lahaina and Kailua, he sailed with Opiia.
May 6, 1825. At sunrise the frigate Blonde, commanded by Lord Byron, a cousin of the poet, and which
had been some time looked for with solicitude, appeared
off Diamond Head, having on board the bodies of the
king and queen and the remainder of the party that
sailed in the L'Aigle. Four of the number have been
cut off by death. Kapihee, who was called in England




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 182-1828        105
the Admiral, died at Valparaiso on their return. The
Blonde came to anchor in the roads about nine o'clock
and fired a salute of fourteen guns, and was answered
by the same number from the fort and battery. About
eleven o'clock Governor Boki and his party landed at the
king's wharf. The chiefs had assembled at Kaahumanu's
house to receive them. As they stepped from the boat,
Hinau, the commander of the fort, dressed in uniform,
took the hand of Boki and one of us the hand of Madame
Boki. In the meantime Kaahumanu and a few others
advanced slowly and the two parties approached within
two or three yards of each other and as their eyes met
they stopped and lifted up their voices and wept. The
scene was to us exceedingly affecting. Governor Boki
stood and, with strong emotion, raised his hands and eyes
toward heaven and wept with a loud voice. Remaining
at a little distance for some minutes, while floods of tears
rolled down their faces, the parties met and embraced
each other in the warmest manner, while the guns of
the fort made them welcome, then proceeded slowly toward the house, interrupted at every step by friends successively saluting those whom they rejoice to see safely
returned, while the sad events of their tour seemed to
overwhelm them all with grief. They clasped each other
in their arms, hung on each other's necks, touched noses
and kissed each other until they were nearly exhausted.
Scarcely a word was exchanged between them for half
an hour. After this burst of feeling was over the principal
facts that had occurred during the separation were briefly
touched upon and when they had spent nearly a half
hour about the doors and in the rooms of Kaahumanu's
house, they retired to the chapel to present their offerings
to the Lord. Governor Boki met his brother Kalanimoku
at his own house, who received him cordially without
noise and accompanied him to the church, which was filled
to overflowing. A hymn was sung, an appropriate passage of Scripture was read and a prayer offered. Governor Boki, by request, made some remarks and very




106


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


distinctly recommended the religion of the Bible and
manifested a serious desire to observe it himself. The
interesting exercise was closed with prayer. Dr. Davis,
the surgeon of the Blonde, who had been sent by Lord
Byron to see Kalanimoku, who is ill, called very kindly
on the family and by request prescribed for the case of
Mr. Bingham's child, who is quite low. In the afternoon,
by request of Kalanimoku and Boki, Mr. Bingham addressed a note to Lord Byron to assure him of their kind
regards and to request him to favor them with his company on shore tomorrow, as the present was a time of
great sympathy among their friends. Had a pleasant
interview with Boki in the evening. He says the King
of England, George IV, with whom he was honored with
a personal interview, told him to take good care of the
missionaries for they were sent to teach the nation the
good word of God and to enlighten them and do them
good.
May 7, 1825. Agreeable to arrangement Lord Byron
and the scientific gentleman of the frigate Blonde landed
in the early part of the day under a salute and were presented at court. They were introduced by Boki and Mr.
Charlton to the Regent Kalanimoku, to the young King
Kauikeouli, to the young princess, and to the old Queen
Kaahumanu, and the other chiefs, all assembled and arranged in order in a neatly thatched hall about fifty feet
in length. At the head sat the young king and his
sister upon a sofa, with several superb kahilis poised
near them. On their right down the side of the hall were
seated the high chief women and on the left in like
manner the chief men of the nation. A little in front
of the center of this line sat Kalanimoku with his interpreters and Christian teachers. All were dressed in
European fashion. As Lord Byron, and the officers of
the Blonde, including several young noblemen, the scientific gentleman and the chaplain were introduced, those
who were assembled to receive them all rose respectfully,
except the young King and the young Princess. When




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1822-188 107
they were made acquainted with the different individuals,
Lord Byron delivered the presents from  the King of
England, a gold watch, and a likeness in wax of Liholiho
to Kalanimoku, a silver tea pot to Kaahumanu, and a
full suit of royal Windsor uniform, with hat and sword,
to Kauikeouli, which were delivered to him by the hands
of two young noblemen. They were much gratified with
these tokens of respect and kindness from King George
IV, and expressed their thanks. Kalanimoku said to
Lord Byron, "I am made very happy by your coming to
this country, and by your kindness toward us." Lord
Byron said he was very happy to have this service to
perform for his King and country, and that he desired
only to show them kindness. Kalanimoku proposed, if
agreeable to Lord Byron, they would now have prayers
together, to which he cheerfully assented and one of the
missionaries being called upon offered a prayer suited
to the occasion, partly in English and partly in the
Hawaiian language. Lord Byron spoke in respectful terms
of what had been achieved by the Mission, and when he
had put the royal uniform upon the young King led him
to Kalanimoku and Kaahumanu, expressing his sincere
desire that he might attend well to the instructions of the
missionaries and become wise and good.
May 8, 1825. Lord Byron before leaving the islands
sailed for Hilo, caused that bay to be surveyed and visited
and explored the great volcano of Kilauea. His uniformly kind and honorable deportment made a deep and
favorable impression on the chiefs and people in favor
of the Christian religion.
June 8, 1825. Last Sabbath at a meeting of the church
and congregation, after the various public services of the
former part of the day, ten persons, including several
chiefs of the first rank, made a full declaration of their
desire to be numbered among the disciples of Christ.
Among these were three sisters, Kaahumanu, Kaniau, and
Opiia, honorable women, wives of the celebrated Kamehameha, the present Regent, Kalanimoku, Kapule, lately




108


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


the Queen of Kaui, Kapiolani, the interesting wife of
Naihe, Kealiiahonui, the son of the late King Kaumualii,
Laanui, the husband of Opiia, Kalu, the husband of
Kapule, and Richard Kalaalulu, from the Foreign Mission School. They are therefore propounded for entrance
to the church after three or four months further instruction and trial, if they continue faithful.
July 17, 1825. Kalanimoku desirous that the new
meeting house should be opened for public religious worship on the approaching Sabbath, and having given orders
to the carpenters to hang the doors, set in the windows,
and fit up the seats, came up this afternoon, though still
feeble from the effects of his recent illness, attended by
Opiia, Kekauluohi, and a great concourse of people to
view the house, and give directions about spreading the
mats. With the exception of Kalanimoku, the whole
company set off after rushes and grass to strew over the
house, previously to putting down the mats. It was interesting to see several of the highest chiefs in the nation
following one after another with burdens of grass, presenting their free-will offerings of labor to forward the
work. All united cheerfully and seemed to experience
a high degree of satisfaction in according assistance. The
house is commodious and will accommodate a large audience; the dimensions within the posts are seventy feet by
twenty-five; the pulpit is at the north end, on each side
of which is a door, one for the entrance of the chiefs,
the other for the mission family. The building is surrounded by a strong, high stick fence, one hundred and
twenty-five feet by one hundred and fifty-five and the
enclosure is to be planted with bananas, sugar cane, etc.
July 20, 1825. Kalanimoku, with his attendants, forming considerable of a company, came up to visit his new
house situated contiguous to that of Mr. Ellis, which he
has been building in modern style at considerable expense
and which is now nearly finished, and proposing to tarry
in it during the night he asked Mr. Ellis if it would not
be well to have prayers there. Mr. Ellis, pleased at




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1822-1828           109
having an opportunity of directing his thought to the
true God, most readily answered in the affirmative and,
having made known the fact to the brethren at the Mission House, invited their attendance. Happy we all were
to see this highest chief in the nation so ready to have
erected in his new habitation an altar of praise to that
God of whom his fathers were ignorant.
Oct. 21, 1825. A most important question was discussed at the last General Meeting, namely: the letters
to be used in writing this Hawaiian language and the
sounds to be represented by the various letters. Uniformity of usage being most desirable. By vote of the
Mission the number of letters was fixed at twelve,
namely, a, e, i, o, u, h, k, 1, m, n, p, w, giving them the
Italian sound.
Mr. Bingham has begun a translation of the Gospel
of Matthew and it is hoped that by Divine aid he may
be able to complete the translation of the New Testament in the course of a year, if other labors do not
prevent. He has finished in a manner the first chapter
today, having spent a little time on it almost daily for
the last three weeks, comparing the Latin, English, and
Tahitian versions with the original Greek and endeavoring to produce from the original a version in the Hawaiian
language as clear and correct as the genius of the language and our acquaintance with it will admit. A considerable number of words must doubtless be introduced
from the Greek into the Hawaiian version as there are
many terms and many ideas for which there is nothing
in this language to answer. Even the common terms,
faith, holiness, throne, dominion, angel, demoniac, which
so frequently occur in the New Testament, cannot be
expressed with precision by any terms in the Hawaiian
language. The natives call an angel either an "Akua,"
a God, or a "Kanaka Lele," flying man.




110


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


Extract from  letter by Hiram  Bingham, William
Richards, Elisha Loomis, and Levi Chamberlain, from
Oahu, March 10, 1826:
Could you see more than twenty thousand of the
islanders under the influence of Christian instruction from
books in their own language and from the pulpit, and
as many hundreds maintaining the duty of family and
private devotion and many individuals, among whom are
the most distinguished persons in the nation, giving pleasing evidence of a radical change of heart and of fitness
for the fellowship of the churches, you would not, we
are persuaded, for a moment, think your operations here
had been entirely in vain, even if nothing more were to
be achieved.
From A. Thurston and A. Bishop to Secretary J.
Evarts, from Kailua, Oct. 23, 1826:
Soon after the first appearance of a special attention
to religion in this place our congregations became overflowing and great numbers were obliged to remain without
for want of room in our place of worship. It soon
became apparent that another more capacious house was
needed. In about five months the ground was prepared,
the timber hewn, and the frame erected. The posts,
fifty-one on each side, were firmly set into the rock blasted
out for the purpose and an area of stones was then built
upon the site three feet above the former level, firmly
enclosing the posts on every side. Early in July the
people were again called out to thatch the building when
about four thousand came, bringing with them the materials. In little more than a month the thatching was
completed and by the first of September the house was
finished and ready for use. Its whole length is one hundred and eighty feet, its width seventy-eight feet. It is
built of the firmest and most durable material that the
islands afford and is pronounced by good judges to be




JOURNALS AND        LETTERS 1822-1828       111
the largest and most elegant native building ever erected
and will remain good for twenty years. The floor is
overspread with a thick layer of rushes and covered with
mats. It has a good pulpit painted and furnished with
cushion and hangings. On Wednesday, the 4th of September, several of the missionary brethren and principal chiefs
having previously arrived from Oahu and Maui, the
dedication of our place of worship to the service of Almighty God was solemnized. There were supposed to be
not less than six thousand persons present, including the
scholars of forty schools who, with their teachers, were
present on the occasion. It was indeed a day of jubilee
with us and such as had never been witnessed before on
this island. On the following day the people were again
assembled in the open air in front of Kaahumanu's dwelling house where they were successively addressed by Governor Adams,2 Naihe, Kapiolani, Hoapili wahine and
Kaahumanu on the truths of Christianity, the speakers
publicly making known their determination to follow its
precepts and obey its sanctions in the government of the
people and by their own example confirming at the same
time their purpose to suppress the vices and superstitions
that were once so prevalent in the whole island.
The call of the people for the Scriptures is loud and
daily repeated. They carefully collect and write down
every text or historical sketch of Scriptures that they hear
from us and receive it as the word of God, to which
they are bound to render obedience. In the course of
another year there will, in all probability, be at least
ten thousand persons on this island capable of reading
the Holy Scriptures with facility could they be obtained
to put into their hands.
2 Kuakini, one of the highest chiefs, and one who at one time
was governor of the island of Hawaii, and at another time governor
of Oahu, was named by foreigners as Governor Adams, and is often
referred to as Governor Adams.




112       THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
POINTS OF INTEREST IN THE MISSION RECORD OF 1825,
1826, AND 1827
The missionaries having gained much influence with
the ruling chiefs, decrees were made stopping Hawaiian
women from going on board of foreign ships that might
touch at the various ports of the islands.
This aroused the rage of some of the officers and crews
of certain vessels touching at island ports.
At Lahaina, in October, 1825, Mr. Richard's life was
threatened by a mob of the crew of the British whaleship
Daniel. His house was attacked, but the mob was driven
away by the natives.
In January, 1826, the cruising schooner Dolphin, of
the United States Navy, arrived at Honolulu and on the
26th of February a company of sailors entered the house
of Kalanimoku and demanded the repeal of the law, or
decree, mentioned above, and being driven away made
an attempt to kill Mr. Bingham, but were finally scattered by the natives who rallied to protect their missionaries.
Two other attacks were made by ships' companies upon
Mr. Richards at Lahaina, in the first of which, in 1826,
Mr. Richards being absent his house was invaded and
property destroyed. In the second, in the fall of 1827,
cannon balls from the ship John Palmer were fired at
the mission house by the crew, while the captain was
detained at the Governor's house.
In January, 1827, the officers of the American Board
published in the papers of the Eastern States Mr. Richards' statement of the acts of violence of the crew of
the whaleship Daniel, Captain Buckle, at Lahaina. These
papers reached Honolulu in the fall and aroused the
anger of Captain Buckle whose ship had touched at Honolulu. So great a tumult was raised by the Captain and
3 The writer, years ago, saw in the cellar of the old Richards
house in Lahaina the cannon ball that had made a round hole in
the wall of the house some years before.:   f:




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 182-1828       113
his sympathizers in Honolulu that Kaahumanu called
a council of leading chiefs and summoned the missionaries for an investigation. Mr. Richards was called from
Lahaina to answer for the offence of having written to
Boston regarding the outrages of the ship's company of
the Daniel. The hostile foreigners were invited to make
their charges against the missionaries. Their chief complaints were founded upon Mr. Richards' letter to Boston.
When Mr. Richards appeared in person the complainants
hastily retired. The council decided that as Mr. Richards
had written only the truth, he was entirely innocent.
December 17, 1827.     Mr. Richards writes from
Honolulu:
It appears to me that the hand of Providence has never
been more visible in any of the events that have transpired, since the establishment of the mission, than in
the recent difficulties. There has never appeared so much
unanimity of feeling among the chiefs, and never so
strong attachment to us. The common saying is: "If
one of the missionaries must die, let us all die together."
They seem to be more and more convinced that we are
seeking their good and that in this respect we differ from
our enemies. The minds of the chiefs have been occupied in devising means to put a stop to the crying sins
of the country.
April 14, 1828. Mr. Richards writes from his home
at Lahaina: "We remained at Honolulu until January 8th
when we embarked on board the Missionary Packet and
reached Lahaina after a quick passage of twenty-six hours.
The evening we anchored was somewhat rainy and it was
too late for the people to call on us that night, but the
next morning as soon as our doors were open, the people
began to call to express their aloha (love). The number
who called before breakfast we estimated at one thousand.
The attachment of the people to their teacher was never
more apparent. Many of them had been made to believe




114


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


that I should either be sent from the Islands or executed
here, and when they actually saw that we had returned
without injury, they were prepared to express their joy
in the strongest manner. Many seemed not only to believe, but to feel that it was because the Lord is on our
side. A day of fasting and prayer on our account was
observed the week we left, and from that time little
circles continued to meet to pray for us until our return.
You may well suppose, therefore, that the meeting was
an interesting one to us all."
The missionaries at Lahaina write later of the influence of the trial and acquittal of Mr. Richards on
the people of Lahaina:
There never was, probably, any occurrence which so
much endeared the missionary to the people or they to
him. It seemed also to be the commencement of a renewal of attention to religious concerns. As the fruits
of this attention we trust that a good number will at
no distant period be united with the church.
But the influence of these occurrences is not confined
to Lahaina or to Maui. The general meeting of the chiefs,
which took place in consequence of the above mentioned,
apparently untoward event, was one of the most interesting councils which has ever been held in the Sandwich
Islands. The ostensible object for which they were assembled was to hear the complaints of Captain Clark
against Hoapili, and of Captain Buckle against Mr.
Richards. The real object for which they were assembled,
was to establish laws for the nation. And this object was
accomplished. It was, doubtless, hoped on the one part
that every obstacle in the way of crime would now be
removed and everything like law or "Kapu" be banished
from the Islands. But this was the very meeting at
which was enacted the first laws that ever existed on the
Sandwich Islands. In these laws the chiefs were united,
and to them the king affixed his name.




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1822-1828          115
The first law prohibited murder on penalty of death.
The second law prohibited theft; penalty, confinement
in irons.
The third law prohibited adultery; penalty, same as
above.
Viewing the subject in all its bearings, we think that
scarcely anything has occurred in the history of the mission which has, on the whole, done more to promote the
interests of civilization and Christianity, than the occurrences of which we have been speaking.
Among items of vital interest to the Young Mission, was that Messrs. Thurston and Bishop at Kailua
had 6000 scholars learning to read with weekly congregations of from 2000 to 3000.
At a general meeting of the mission, held at Kailua
in October, 1826, there was discussed the condition
and prospects of the children of the mission. Also the
need of more missionaries, which was pressing in view
of the early departure of Mr. E. Loomis and family.
Mr. Loomis, spoken of as much beloved, sailed January
3, 1827, via Tahiti and Valparaiso. Dr. Blatchley had
left a few months earlier.
The ordination of Mr. James Ely took place at
Kailua January 4, 1825, while that of Mr. Samuel
Whitney to the gospel ministry by his fellow missionaries at Honolulu November 28, 1825, and the
ordination of Mr. Joseph Goodrich at Kailua October
25, 1826.
A letter from Messrs. Thurston and Bishop, from
Kailua, dated October 10, 1827:
These islands have externally embraced Christianity and
are rapidly coming under the influence of its precepts
and sanctions. "You have obtained," said Mr. Young to




116


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


us one day, "in three years by the preaching of the
gospel what I have labored in vain for more than thirty
to accomplish." Alluding to the customs and usages of
Christian countries which are now taking the place of
their former practices, he said:  "These are the very
things which I have so often attempted to persuade the
king and chiefs to adopt; I have set before them in the
plainest manner the superior advantages of civilization
over savage customs, but could never gain their assent;
the uniform reply of the king was: 'Pela i Hawaii nei'
(these are the customs here at Hawaii), but as soon as
you bring them under the influence of the gospel you
can mould them as you please." It was observed to him
that no country since the promulgation of Christianity
has become civilized but through the preaching of the
gospel. He replied that, in his opinion, the gospel alone
is able to save this people from extinction, for until missionaries came they were going to ruin as fast as possible.
From letter by Mr. Richards from Lahaina April
14, 1828:
The particulars of Mrs. Bishop's last sickness and death
you have already received from another pen. She was
a much loved and useful member of this mission, unwearied in her exertions for others, always more ready
to suffer herself than to see others suffer, and a mother
not only tender but faithful.
The 30th of March, 1828, was a day not to be forgotten,
for in the annals of the mission there has been no day
it will be more pleasant for us to remember, none the
events of which are more directly connected with the
immortal interests of the nation, and none to which the
people will longer look back with gratitude and joy. I
refer to the arrival of the second re-enforcement of missionaries, consisting of Messrs. Andrews, Clark, Green,
Gulick, Judd, Shephard, and the Misses Ogden, Ward,
Stone, and Patton. Many a time within the last few




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1822-1828      117
years when I have taken my pen to write you, I have
felt like saying: "Send us no more of our accustomed
food, we will live on taro, bread fruit and the other productions of this island; send us nothing more of all your good
things, but oh! do not compel us to see our numbers
diminishing, our strength wasting, the enemy advancing,
and yet have no prospect of aid."
Letter from  the newly arrived missionaries, dated
April 27, 1828:
Through the goodness of our Heavenly Father we have
been brought safely to these ends of the earth. On the
29th of March, while looking eagerly for land, Hawaii
burst upon our view. A sight truly welcome after almost
five months residence on the ocean. In a little time we
were favored with a delightful view of Mauna Kea, as
it lifted its snow-capped summit far above the clouds.
A thousand interesting associations now rushed upon our
minds and almost overpowered our feelings.   In the
evening the wind breezed up and wafted us rapidly towards Oahu. The next day was the Sabbath and we
attended public worship for the last time on board the
Parthian.  The weather was uncommonly pleasant and
several of the islands, to which we have come 16,000
miles in order to labor for our Saviour, were in full view,
About three o'clock in the afternoon we cast anchor in
the outer harbor of Honolulu. As it was the Sabbath
and we were some distance from land, we thought it not
best to go ashore until the next day. But as an opportunity offered a line was addressed to Mr. Bingham informing him of our arrival. Before dark the three
brethren then at the station, Messrs. Bingham, Goodrich,
and Chamberlain, came out to the Parthian and bade us
a joyful welcome. The interview seemed much more like
the meeting of long absent friends than of entire
strangers. The next morning, on our way to the Mission
House, we called on Kaahumanu and were introduced




118


THE PILGRIMS OP HAWAII


to her by Mr. Bingham. She received us with cordiality
and expressed much joy that new missionaries had arrived and seemed only to regret that there were no more.
She accompanied us to Mr. Bingham's, where we were
introduced to other chiefs, who received us with the same
cordiality. We then united in a song of praise and in
devout thanksgiving to that Being who had brought us
safely through the dangers of the deep to this interesting
field of labor now white for the harvest.
Under date May 8, 1828, Mr. Goodrich writes from
Hilo:
We welcome Mr. and Mrs. E. W. Clark to iHilo. A
company of sixty, including Mr. and Mrs. Goodrich and
Mr. and Mrs. Clark, set off for a visit to the volcano.
They spent the first night at Olaa and the next day
reached the volcano. These two ladies were the first
foreign ladies to see the fires at Kilauea. After four
months spent in teaching, Mr. and Mrs. Clark returned
to Honolulu.
On November 22, 1828, mention is made of the manufacture of sugar and molasses by Mr. Goodrich, the first
ever made in Hilo.
Regarding Hawaiian songs, dirges, and recitations
Mr. Richards says:
Many of these ancient songs are really admirable. Of
these songs, the dirges are generally the best. In these
dirges they often recount the exploits of the subject, or
rather give an outline of his character. This is done in
language highly figurative and, often, truly beautiful. I
have attempted in my intercourse with the people to
draw a line between the immoral songs and those valuable
specimens of which I have spoken, but this is extremely
difficult.




A Papi La Tree bearing perhaps over twog lhundred poundhs of fruit




04




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 18-1828         119
From   letter written by L. Andrews, J. S. Green,
and W. Richards, from Lahaina, October 15, 1828:
With the present system even the laboring class of
people have opportunity to attend school, religious meetings, etc., and that, too, without interfering with their
regular employment, for the schools and religious meetings merely take the place of their former boxing games,
cock fights, hulas, hooluas (or hill side sliding games),
etc. We think, too, that we much more effectually encourage industry by proposing some new, valuable and
interesting employment than we should do by merely
recommending to the people to spend more hours in their
old employments. Indeed, it is well known that no people
was ever industrious that was not enlightened. While on
this subject we remark further, that we do not think it
possible that there should ever be any material or, at
least, any rapid improvement in general industry until
there is a radical change in the system of government. The
tenure by which property is held is so feeble and the
rules regulating its sale and descent so unsettled and so
lax, that no strong motive to industry can exist, unless
it is to obtain learning and religion, which no civil power
can take away.
The corner stone of the new church building was laid
on Monday, September 14th. The only ceremony on the
occasion was a short address and prayer. At the particular' request of Hoapili the building receives the name
of Ebenezer.4 It is 104 feet long and 50 feet wide. The
stones of which the house is built are volcanic, easily
hewn, are rather light and porous, but are very tenacious
and will resist the action of the weather.
You will recollect that Miss Patton was one of the
number who joined this station in May last. Soon after
we had opportunity of showing to the people that what
'The building here mentioned was doubtless erected upon the,ite on which now stands the Wainee church of Lahaina.




120       THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
we inculcate on them as duty and propriety respecting
marriage, we also practice ourselves. On the first Monday in September the montly concert for prayer was
attended with the people at an earlier hour than usual,
after which we had our meeting in English, and at an
early hour in the evening Mr. Chamberlain and Miss
Patton were united in marriage. All the high chiefs and
a number of our particular friends were present. On the
19th of the same month they sailed for Honolulu. We
deeply feel the loss we sustain in the removal of Miss
Patton from the station, where for the last four months
she has done so much to make herself useful and the
families comfortable and happy,




XIV


JOURNAL AND LETTERS, 1829-1834
K    IEV. E. W. CLARK describes a journey taKen
on foot in company with Mr. Levi Chamberlain:
We left Honolulu April 30, 1829, and landed at
Waipio, Hawaii, where we were delighted with the scenery
and the hospitality of the people, who loaded our boats
with baked hog, taro and poi. From there we went to
Hilo where we spent the Sabbath. There were probably
not less than three thousand hearers at the house of
worship. From there we went on to the volcano arriving
there about 10 A. M. The feelings with which I gazed
upon this sublime and awful spectacle can be more easily
conceived than described. Nothing ever reminded me so
forcibly of the power of that Being "Who spreadest out
the heavens like a curtain and hangest the earth upon
nothing." The volcano was in very brisk action. After
leaving the volcano we travelled to Punaluu, where we
spent the Sabbath with the head man of the village and
preached to about one hundred and fifty people. Thence
we proceeded to Honuapo where we found three or four
hundred people assembled to hear us. This place had
been visited but a few times by the missionaries, but the
Sabbath was well observed and schools were established.
The next day we went on to Amalu where a Christian
marriage was performed, the first probably ever performed
in Ka-u.  Thence we proceeded through Waiohinu to
Kahuku. Here we were received by the head man of the
121




1292      THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
place, the comfort and neatness of whose home and yard
surpassed anything we had seen since we left Hilo. We
were surprised to find so much appearance of civilization in this distant and obscure part of the island. But
on inquiring we found that the man and his family had
formerly lived at Lahaina and enjoyed the instruction
of the missionaries. We proceeded over the rough broken
lava, slept on the ground and finally procured a canoe
which took us the last fifteen miles to Kaawaloa, Kona.
A short time since Kaahumanu and other chiefs, accompanied by Mr. Ruggles, removed from the house of
Keawe at Honaunau the bones of twenty-four ancient
kings and princes. The bones were put into two coffins
and deposited in a common burying ground at Kaawaloa.
We arrived at Kaawaloa a little after dark and were
heartily welcomed. It was a time of deep interest. We
felt that we were in the midst of a revival of religion.
Mr. Ruggles' house was almost constantly thronged with
inquirers. We noticed with pleasure the stillness and
propriety with which the Sabbath was observed. About
fifteen hundred attended public worship and listened
with serious attention to the preaching of the gospel.
A considerable part of this number came from six to
ten miles in canoes. The canoes, one hundred or more
in number, came in with the utmost steadiness and regularity in the morning and returned in the same manner
in the evening. This was more observable since, on any
other day, they would have been remarkably talkative and
noisy, but not a loud word was to be heard, or hardly
the sound of the paddles. A captain of a ship in the harbor
observed that the greatest curiosity he had seen at the
Sandwich Islands was the people coming to meeting in
their canoes. From Kaawaloa we visited Kailua, Messrs.
Thurston and Bishop's station, where a considerable number have lately been received to the church. From here
we returned toHonolulu having been absent six weeks.




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1829-1834      123
From letter written by Messrs. Thurston and Bishop
from Kailua, dated October 1, 1829:
We have been satisfied that the seeming want of true
conviction in many is to be attributed to the fact that
their former sins were those of pure ignorance, committed
without the least knowledge that there was any better
way, and that as their minds became gradually enlightened by the truth, and the Holy Spirit began to operate,
it was in this mild way, rather than by the terrors of
the law, that they were brought forward. The first converts at Kailua, Hawaii, were baptized on March 9, 1828,
two men and four women. Kuakini (Governor Adams)
is a thoroughly consecrated man.
From  letter written at Oahu, dated October 10,
1829:
A new church built in an improved native style by
the people, 196 feet by 63 feet, was dedicated in Honolulu
on the third of July with appropriate and very interesting
exercises. It was filled at an early hour and many assembled around the doors. Probably five thousand were
present, besides some foreigners. The young king (in
imitation of Solomon) first addressing the congregation,
said we had assembled to consecrate to the Lord this
house which he had built for Jehovah, his God, and'
expressed his desire that all his people might worship
Him, listen to the voice of His ministers and obey His
word. After the dedicatory prayer Nahienaena, the king's
sister, made some very suitable remarks in support of
what had been said by the king.
Letter of the Oahu Station:
October 29, 1829. The Gospel of Luke is now in the
hands of the people; Acts is complete and a part of the
Psalms, and portions of Genesis, Exodus, and Leviticus.
We make steady progress.




124


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


From letter by Mrs. Thurston, from the Sandwich
Islands, dated October 16, 1829:
I am placed in a situation replete with cares and
responsibilities to my own children, I have to blend the
duties of the servant, the playmate, the mother, and the
preceptress. My wardrobe, my house, my table, all hang
suspended on my own exertions and the imperfect services
of natives. Added to this, I am mistress of a public
house, which may well be compared to public houses in
America on public days. During the forenoon it is necessary, in order to live, to have our house under a Kapu
(taboo), that is, people are not allowed to visit it. Yet, to
this general rule, chiefs and principal teachers must be
made an exception. Afternoons our doors are open to any,
to all, and our house is thronged. However, of the four
families from the brig Thaddeus, who still remain in
the field, ours is the only one that has not, by gratuitous
passages, sent home the precious gift of a child to personal friends. To send away children at an age so early,
while I am sustained in active life, is a thing at which
every feeling of my heart revolts.
From   letter by L. Andrews, dated November 3,
1829:
I would beg leave to remark here that Miss Ogden has
been, and is now, most persevering and indefatigable in the
business of teaching, besides being of great help to Mrs.
Richards in her family. As a teacher of children and
of female schools she has been extensively useful. And I
see no reason why the number of such helpers could not
be multiplied to the great advancement of knowledge,
industry, virtue and piety.
From letter of Rev. P. J. Gulick written in 1829
from  Waimea, Kauai:
January 7. I started to attend the examination of
schools. The want of roads and bridges was felt, but




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1829-1834 125
still travelling is much more pleasant to me in this land
of hills and valleys, of brooks of water, of fountains that
spring up out of the valleys and hills than it would be
in a dry and thirsty land. But the most interesting
object which came under my view was the school house.
There is at least one in every considerable village. They
are thatched buildings constructed with care, and large
enough to afford a commodious place of worship for the
inhabitants in their respective vicinities.  At the examination 850 readers passed in review, they read in
various parts of the books which they had studied and
acquitted themselves very much to our satisfaction. One
hundred and fifty-two men and forty-two women, most
of them neatly dressed in European style, were also examined in the art of writing. They wrote on slates and
manifested a very pleasing evidence of improvement.
When these exercises were finished the whole company,
including many hundreds of spectators, removed from the
church to the Governor's house. Here were assembled,
I suppose, about 5,000 to hear certain new regulations
published and old ones newly enforced.
A letter by Levi Chamberlain, from Honolulu, dated
August 16, 1830:
I do not know that you have been informed of a very
singular expedition fitted out from these islands last
December. If you have not, some account of it may not
be unacceptable:
By a ship from Port Jackson, New South Wales, which
anchored at this port in November, 1829, a notice was
communicated to Governor Boki that somewhere in the
South Pacific Ocean an island had been fallen in with
abounding in sandalwood. A person who arrived in
the ship, and who had made some observation as to the
situation of the island, proposed to lead an expedition
thither. The bait of sandalwood in abundance proved
too tempting to be resisted. The governor immediately




126


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


formed the plan of an expedition.   The brigs Kamehameha and Becket were forthwith put in readiness, each
vessel was supplied with a considerable quantity of ammunition and two hundred soldiers equipped for the
former and one hundred for the latter vessel. Besides
the soldiers there embarked quite a number of the chiefs,
people for their attendants and the cutting of sandalwood. On board the Becket there were one hundred and
seventy-nine persons. On board the Kamehameha, of
which Boki had the charge, there were probably not far
from three hundred people, including the soldiers. Hastily
equipped, the expedition sailed on the second day of
December, 1829. Kaahumanu was absent at the time from
this island; had she been present she would, doubtless,
have protested against the mad expedition and prevented
its sailing. Infatuation seemed to be marked on the very
face of it and many of the merchants and residents
strongly remonstrated against it and advised Boki to
abandon it, but he was determined on carrying it into
execution and sailed. The first notice received respecting
the fate of the expedition was in June, 1830, by a vessel
from Canton. This vessel had been fitted out here, in
connection with the ship before mentioned from Port
Jackson, for a trip to the newly discovered island for the
purpose of obtaining sandalwood, had visited the island
and fallen in with the Becket and reported that the expedition was likely to be closed with disaster. On the
third day of the present month the Becket arrived and
communicated intelligence of the most distressing kind.
Out of the one hundred and seventy-nine which left in
this vessel only twenty returned and eight of these were
foreigners. All that the survivors could relate respecting
the other brig was: that the two vessels anchored together
at the Island of Rotama, one of the New Hebrides, from
which Aramango, the sandal wood island to which they
were bound, was distant only a few days' sail. Here Boki
stopped four days and took on board a considerable number of the natives of the island to assist in cutting sandal



JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1829-1834 127
wood and then set sail for Aramango. The Becket
stopped about ten days longer and then followed. Owing
to light winds and calms she was ten days making the
passage. When she arrived nothing was to be seen of.
or heard from, the Kamehameha, except that a small
vessel, recently arrived, reported having seen floating in
the neighborhood of the island some pieces of a wreck.
A boat was dispatched to make the circuit of the island
in search of the wreck, in case the vessel had been cast
ashore, but nothing was found which they could identify
as belonging to the brig. The Becket remained at the
island about five weeks, but owing to the hostility of the
natives and sickness among the people on board they
were entirely defeated in the object of the expedition.
Nothing more was heard concerning the Kamehameha,
and the conclusion was that she had either been wrecked
on some small islands that lay in their way, or had been
blown up at sea. The latter opinion is entertained by
some of the foreigners, as there was much powder on board
and very little caution observed in regard to fire. A very
dark cloud rests upon the fate of the vessel and of all
on board. There is not a doubt entertained by judicious
persons who have heard the circumstances that the vessel
is lost and that all on board have perished. The intelligence filled many hearts with anguish which burst out
in loud and continuous wailing for many days.
From letter by Levi Chamberlain, Honolulu, dated
December 5, 1831:
When Governor Boki left the island to embark on the
expedition for sandal wood, which proved so disastrous
to him and his associates, he committed the government
of the island of Oahu into the hands of his wife Liliha.
But neither the administration of Boki nor that of his
wife gave satisfaction to the high chiefs. The high chiefs
here meant are Kaahumanu, Kaikioewa, John Adams
(Kuakini), Hoapili and his wife Kekauluohi, Kinau, and




128


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


Naihe.  The conduct of Boki was considered highly
reprehensible by Kaahumanu, who would gladly have removed him could she have done it without endangering
the peace of the nation. The almost absolute certainty
of Governor Boki being lost has rendered it necessary
that a new governor should be appointed. This has been
done and the present chief magistrate is John Adams
(Kuakini). He is under Kaahumanu who takes possession of this island agreeably to the grant of the king.
As soon as the chiefs, who had now returned to Maui,
had been apprised of the attitude of the governess (Liliha,
who was making warlike preparations to retain her authority) they dispatched her father Hoapili to mediate with
his daughter and, if possible, induce her to meet the
chiefs in council at Lahaina. This he effected and called
in all the arms of both parties, deposited them in the
armory of the fort and took possession himself of the
key. The difficulties in the nation having been happily
settled and the government of this island committed into
the hands of Governor Adams, an occasion for uneasiness
arose from another quarter in consequence of an attempt
of the chiefs to effect reform and establish good order.
The traffic in ardent spirits was too lucrative to admit
of its suppression without strong expressions of dissatisfaction on the part of those whose gains were touched,
and it was to be expected that an attempt to shut up
gambling houses and to secure to the Sabbath its peaceful observance, would excite very strenuous opposition,
and so it was, and the mission was accused of being the
instrumental cause of all the restrictive measures adopted
by the chiefs.
From letter by G. P. Judd, Ionolulu, dated August
19, 1830:
Every arrangement having been previously made we
set off from Kailua on the morning of the 24th of February to go to Waimea, Hawaii. The High Chiefess




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1829-1834      129
Kapiolani in her own double canoe, Mr. Richards and
family in another, belonging to Naihe. Mrs. Judd, Miss
Ward and myself in one furnished us by Governor Adams.2
There were in addition half a dozen single canoes, which
were loaded with people and baggage. The weather was
fine. Our little fleet of nine sails was wafted gaily along
by the sea breeze, aided occasionally by the rowers, as we
dashed through the rough waves resounding from the
rocky projections of the shores.  Landed to dine at
Kalihulu. Arrived at Puako at 3 P. M. where we spent
the night; there Kapiolani gave the people orders to
carry our baggage to Waimea by land. Next morning
we proceeded by water to Kawaihae, four miles distant
from Puako. There we remained during the day and
following night under the hospitable roof of Mr. Young.
Meanwhile Kapiolani, in connection with Mrs. Young,
made the necessary arrangements for carrying the ladies
and children in chairs, lashed on long poles manned with
six or eight men each for the ladies, and a cot for the
children. Calabashes for water and poi and fish, completed the preparations.
February 26, 1830. Our party is now increased to one
hundred and thirteen, forty-three having joined us at
Kawaihae. We began to move before sunrise in order to
avoid the extreme heat of the sun. Our road was only
a narrow footpath, which, for the first two miles, led
through an uneven and rocky country that gradually became more smooth and verdant as we proceeded. About
five miles from Kawaihae we came to a running stream;
here the people had provided refreshments of baked hog,
taro, potatoes, etc., of which the natives partook freely.
The remaining part of our way was through a more level
country covered with green bushes and grass. We arrived
at Aalii, Waimea, about half past twelve. This place
affording the best house in the district we took up our
abode here for the present. The house was, however, too
2.See footnote at the bottom of page 111.




130


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


small to accommodate us and all our baggage. A small
but comfortable house was put up immediately for
Kapiolani.
March 19, 1830. Governor Adams arrived with all his
train. He intends spending some months with us to catch
wild cattle.
March 21, 1830. Sabbath. Our congregation has increased every Sabbath since our arrival. Today it has
received a great addition owing to the arrival of the
governor. There cannot be less than one thousand people.
Governor Adams addressed them in a very appropriate
manner. The people appear particularly anxious to gain
religious knowledge. Our house, during the week, is
literally crowded with visitors who come expressly to
hear instructions. They usually manifest their desire by
saying they are ignorant and wicked and wish us to
instruct them in the word of God.
March 25, 1830. Kapiolani with all of her train took
leave of us today. We all were much affected with her
kindness in coming to this place with us. She has exerted
herself, all in her power, to make us comfortable, careful
to see that we were first served and best accommodated.
She has also rendered essential service by hastening the
progress of our building, and conversing with the people
when our time was otherwise occupied. May she receive
a heavenly reward for all her labors of love.
April 3, 1830. Removed to Mr. Richards' new house.
Find ourselves very pleasantly situated in a spacious
native house containing three separate apartments, well
spread with new mats and provided with suitable doors
and windows; it stands on the eastern bank of the stream
called Waikoloa (Duckwater).  Another house stands a
few feet distant, so constructed as to afford room for
kitchen work and a large apartment, which will be used
for a school or lodging room as may be most convenient.
This establishment stands on a level spot nearly surrounded with trees, in sight of lofty mountains, evergreen
hills, and an extended plain diversified with dark thick




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1829-1884      181
woods, open pastures, low shrubbery and fruitful plantations, and will, when enclosed and completed, be a delightful country seat. A similar establishment is now in
progress on the other side of the stream, which will be
finished in the course of a fortnight.
April 23, 1830. Yesterday morning, the weather being
clear and inviting, I set off in company with John Honolii
and other natives to visit the top of Mauna Kea. I
rode a mule furnished me by the governor. We ascended
until about two P. M. when we were overtaken with a
violent thunder storm. We were compelled to take shelter
in a cave and the storm continuing to rage we remained
all night. Arose early this morning, left the mule and
proceeded on foot. The atmosphere was clear. We had
a delightful view of the scenery below, which certainly
surpasses anything I have seen before and clouds soon
obscured our sight for the rest of the day. Reached the
snow about noon and ascended a short distance, but found
myself too much fatigued to ascend to the summit; there
was indeed little inducement the prospect was so obscured
by clouds. I therefore descended bringing with me a
large bundle of snow. Arrived at the cave at five P. M.,
bestrode the mule and reached home about nine o'clock
in the evening.
April 24, 1830. Sent the bundle of snow to Governor
Adams, who had never before seen any except on the
distant mountain top, he appeared much gratified with
tastinrg and handling it.
April 25, 1830. The natives finding us more at leisure
flock to our houses in greater numbers, if possible, than
before. They now come mostly in companies of forty or
fifty, in single file and solemn pace, and seat themselves
at our door. One person is spokesman for the whole,
and he having declared their manao (thought) waits for
questions or instruction from the missionary.
May 20, 1830. Visited the valley of Waipio in company with Mrs. Judd, and Miss Ward. The view from
the top of the precipice is very beautiful and will recom



132


THIE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


pense any one who will take the trouble to visit it from
Waimea. We descended the valley down a steep precipice
two thousand feet or more in height, the lower half of
the distance we passed by seating ourselves on bundles of
leaves and sliding down with great rapidity, not without
fear on the part of the ladies. Attended meeting with the
people of the valley assembled in a large house. They
appear more interesting and better informed than any
inhabitants we have seen in this region.
June 6, 1830. Governor Adams (Kuakini) has commenced building a large meeting house. It will be about
one hundred and twenty feet long and fifty feet wide; the
timber, partly collected, will be large and of the best
quality; the spot selected for it is a pleasant site near the
road about a hundred rods from our houses. The governor has begun this house, without any solicitation on
our part, from a sincere desire, we hope, to promote the
cause of religion. It is a great work and although commenced with spirit will not be finished in many months.
From letter by E. W. Clarkc, Honolulu, dated April
20, 1881:
Providence, in a mysterious way, removed the former
governor and prepared the way, we trust, for better things
at this island. Governor Adams has entered upon his
new station with a vigor and decision which surprises us
all. If he goes on as he has begun, ten grog shops will
no longer in this village yawn upon him who passes on
the streets and send forth their loathsome and pestiferous
exhalations. He has given orders for their entire suppression and he is carrying these orders into execution
with a strong hand. He is also in a fair way to suppress
Sabbath breaking and other vices. We, of course, receive
our full share of reproach for these measures, but we feel
little concerned so long as we turn not aside from the
great and good work to which we have devoted our lives.
November 19, 1831. Letter of Rev. Samuel Whitney,




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1829-1834     133
Waimea, Kauai: We send our two sons, Samuel and
Henry Martin, to the United States by Captain Hussey,
ship Cypress.
From  letter written by H. Bingham, Oahu, dated
April 21, 1831:
I have been told that our young king has ordered that
a cask of spirits on board of one of his brigs be poured
into the sea. The British Consul, I was told, has applied
to the government for permission to buy up some alcoholic drinks for His Britannic Majesty's ships of war when
they shall touch here, but permission was not granted.
Others, it is said, applied to the governor for the privilege
of selling to foreigners only and not to natives. Governor
Adams' reply was amusing: "To horses, cattle, and hogs
you may sell rum, but to real men you must not on these
shores."
From letter by Levi Chamberlain, Honolulu, dated
November 6, 1830:
I am now superintending the erection of a new building designed to be a store house for the mission and a
dwelling house for myself. This work I should never
have undertaken merely for my own accommodation, notwithstanding my need of a better dwelling than a grass
house. When this work is off my hands, if I am spared
to complete it in the enjoyment of health, I hope to
have more time to labor for the heathen in the way of
teaching and examining schools.
October 29, 1831, Rev. Wm. Richards writes:
That he considers Wailuku as a more favorable point
for missionary work than Lahaina. The Wailuku congregation now numbers three thousand and seven hundred, and they are collecting materialsfor a church building.  He says that Rev. Lorin Andrews has been appointed to found a High School two miles back of Lahaina




134


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


(afterward called Lahainaluna), which was established to
raise up teachers and helpers for the missionary work.
May 17, 1832. The fifth company, known as the
fourth  Reenforcement of Missionaries, arrived   at
Honolulu in the ship Averick. For their names see
the Appendix.
June 5, 1832. Kaahumanu, after a few days illness, died at her residence in Manoa Valley. With her
dying breath she bore most beautiful testimony, saying
to Mr. and Mrs. Bingham regarding her Saviour: "I
shall go to Him and shall be comforted." She was the
youngest wife of Kamehameha the Great, and was the
virtual Sovereign of the Islands from the departure
of Kamehameha II (Liholiho) for England, November
27, 1823, till her death June 5, 1832, a period of
eight years and six months. She was at first haughty
and overbearing in manner but a great change came
over her in 1825, when she received baptism and from
that time until her death, her life, example, and teachings were exemplary and contributed powerfully to the
spread of the gospel throughout the Islands.
From letter by D. Baldwin, Waimea, Hawaii, dated
August 10, 1832:
We reached this place about the middle of January and
found the people anxiously waiting our arrival. They
expressed great satisfaction that their teachers were come;
numbers were engaged in preparing food for us and they
all testified their good will by bringing in for our comfort
such supplies as the land afforded, consisting of sweet
and Irish potatoes, taro, onions, fowls, ducks, turkeys,
eggs, and hogs. The houses which were previously built
here for two mission families, as well as the house of




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1829-1834      135
God, we found all in good repair. The former have
afforded us very comfortable shelters from the strong
winds and frequent rains, which we find here; and the
latter, calculated to hold about three thousand people, has
afforded as good a place for worship as most have on
these islands. Mr. Bishop came up with us as a temporary
associate till we should acquire the language. On the
first Sabbath in February the church was organized in
Waimea. This land was ever crowded with people as the
fields and hillsides give evidence. The work is inviting.
Mr. John Young, now eighty years old, lives in Kawaihae
and has showed us the kindness of a brother. His wife
is a chiefess, a member of the church and a great aid
to our work. We are strengthened by the arrival of Mr.
and Mrs. Lyons.
From letter by P. J. Gulickc, Waimea, Kauai,
October 25, 1832:
We would gratefully acknowledge the kindness and
courtesy we have received from the only ship masters
who have touched here this fall, namely: Captain Tabor,
ship Cadamus of New Bedford, and Captain Braiton of
the Ann of Nantucket. Their conduct was obliging and
friendly throughout.  With regard to Captain Braiton,
I am utterly unable to express the pleasure and encouragement that his visit has afforded us. His whole course
of conduct was such as we expect from none but those
"that love our Lord Jesus Christ in sincerity," and
whose hearts are truly in our work. Brother Bingham,
having heard of the state of our congregation and the
urgent need of more laborers at this time, arrived here
night before last and is now engaged conversing with the
anxious. He just now remarked that he did not see how
the present state of feeling could be accounted for without
attributing it to the Spirit of God. Indeed the divine
sovereignty has been strikingly displayed in some cases
that have occurred here. Persons have come from almost




136


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


inaccessible parts of the island where, I have good reason
to believe, the Gospel was never proclaimed by an ambassador of Christ, and yet appear deeply distressed from
a sense of their sins. Frequently they can give no definite
account of the origin of their conviction; but, as they
often express it, they were afraid on account of sin and
their soul and body troubled, therefore they come here
to inquire after salvation. It is enough to chill one's
blood to hear their confessions, and still more painful
to reflect on the state of society which these indicate.
This state of society, however, when contrasted with that
of the same people twelve years ago, indicates a wonderful reformation. And this reformation, its enemies themselves being judges, has been effected under God by our
elder brethren, through their influence over the chiefs.
And, considering the character of the nation, chiefs and
all, I esteem it a work truly wonderful, a very essential
and a happy preparation for that internal reformation
which is, I trust, now going on with increased power
and rapidity. There are now four hundred and twentyfive persons in our congregation who study the Scriptures
on the verse a day system. Mu and Kuihewa, two elderly
men from Koloa, fifteen miles east of us, were hopefully
converted last June, while we were all assembled at Oahu
at the General Meeting. Their hope has from the first
appeared remarkably bright, their conscience tender, and
their deportment uniformly humble and consistent. They
appear to be peculiarly attached to each other, so that
although they have called frequently I have seldom seen
them separately. Mu is the pagan priest alluded to in
my letter of last fall. While conversing a few minutes
with them this morning he could not refrain from weeping; this has very frequently been the case for the last
eight months. He says his priestly office had a special
reference to the business of fishing. When fishermen
were about to engage in their occupation they were accustomed to solicit his prayers in their behalf and when
they returned successsful, before any of the fish were




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1829-1834      137
eaten, an offering from what had been taken was made
to the god. Having gone through certain ceremonies the
offering, at least the chief portion, became the property of
the priest. While he was praying it is said all present
were required to prostrate themselves. The part Mu
took in these things now appears to him the most guilty
part of a wicked life.
Koloa, Kauai, 1835. Mr. Gulick writes:
You will have heard that Messrs. Brismade & Company,
known later as Ladd & Company, have leased a fine
tract of land in Koloa with a design to cultivate cane
and manufacture sugar.   In consequence of this Mr.
Hooper, of that firm, has become our neighbor. He
seems very pleasant and obliging and we hope the enterprise will prove successful and a blessing to the nation.
From letter by W. Richards, L. Andrews, E. Spaulding, and A. Chapin, Lahaina, dated November 15,
1832:
Before closing what we say of the appearance of those
who are examined for church membership it may be
well to relate, as nearly as we recollect, the experience
of one who was examined last Saturday evening and who
appeared more than usually interesting. The name of
the man is Malaihi. He is a member of the high school
from a distant part of this island, Maui, and Mr. Richards
has long known him as a man of promising character
and apparently very conscientious in all his conduct. His
parents were formerly worshippers of the shark, and he
was taught by them to believe in the miraculous power
of the shark. With those that worshipped that monster
it was tabu to eat his flesh and it was universally believed
that should any one violate the tabu death would be
the immediate forfeit. We requested the man to give
us an account of his religious feelings from the time that
he first heard of the true God down to the present time.




138


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


His eyes glistened with tears while he replied: "Soon
after your arrival at this island I began to learn to read
and as soon as I had learned so as to be able to read
a little, I was stationed as a teacher for the others. But
I thought nothing about God and nothing about my soul.
I did not regard your instructions any further than to
learn to read. The meaning of what I read I did not
regard. About the time that Governor Hoapili went
around this island (August 1825), I was taken sick and
came nigh unto death. Then I began to think of my
end and felt anxiety for my soul. I conversed with my
mother, but the spirit of our former god came upon her
and she said: 'It is nothing but the palapala (book)
that has brought this sickness upon you. The god is
angry with you for learning that new thing and you
are about to die for your folly.' I then argued with
myself as to what there could be in the palapala to kill
a man or make him sick. And, besides, how does the
shark know that I have been learning the palapala? And
even if he does know it, how can he effect my sickness?
I was perfectly sceptical, I did not believe in his power.
Then I said to my mother: 'If your god were here I
would eat him, I have no belief in his divinity. When
he gets hold of us his anger is very visible, but I know
nothing more of his power. His flesh would be sweet
to me and I would eat it if I could get hold of it.'
"My mother was astonished at the audacity of my language and endeavored to convince me of my presumption.
But not long after this I obtained some of the flesh of
her god and it was quickly devoured by me. I waited all
that day for death to come, but he came not, and all that
night but he did not arrive. This made it very clear in
my mind that it was not in the power of such a god as
that to send death, and instead of my being in his power
he, rather, was in mine. From that time I have fully
believed that there is another God, who made both me
and the shark, and that it is He who sends life and
death at his pleasure. I recovered from my weakness and




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1829-1834 139
ever since that time it has been my desire and my business
to seek that God and learn His will. I read His word,
but Oh! how little do I understand! I hear the preaching of the gospel and I love to hear, but when I go
away it is not clear that I am benefited at all. I often
retire to some secret place to pray, but when I arrive
there I find my heart is left behind. I say a few words,
then weep at my awkwardness and return again. This
much I know, I have believed and sought, and desired,
but my heart has not arrived at that which I wish. What
I should be is quite clear in my mind, but I am not that,
I am altogether another thing. Knowledge I have obtained, but my heart, Oh, when will that be right? That
is the only difficulty with me." Here tears prevented
him from going further. We have mentioned the case
to show that, while the greater part appear comparatively
stupid, there are some who exhibit strong feeling.
From  letter by E. W. Clark, and J. S. Emerson,
Waialua, December 3, 1832:
As Mr. Emerson was not acquainted with the native
language, it was thought best that Mr. Clark should
spend a few months at Waialua and aid in commencing the
station. Accordingly Mr. Clark and family left Honolulu
on the 18th of July for Waialua. They proceeded about
twenty miles in a double canoe. They then left the
water side and crossed over the island about twenty miles
further to Waialua. Mr. and Mrs. Clark rode on horseback and the two children were carried by natives. In
a few days Mr. and Mrs. Emerson arrived in a small
schooner, after a passage of about twenty-four hours. We
were accompanied to this place by Laanui, who, since
the death of his former wife, Piia, has had the charge
of the district of Waialua, first under Kaahumanu and
now under Kinau. He has now taken up his residence
at this place and affords invaluable aid to the missionaries stationed here. He gave us a small thatched house




140


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


standing on the premises which we selected. Two other
thatched houses were immediately erected by the people
free of expense to the mission, which, with some improvements since made, afford tolerable accommodations for
the present, for one or two families. A large and substantial meeting house is also building under the direction
of Laanui. The frame is nearly completed. The house,
when finished, will be in no ways inferior to the one at
Honolulu, except in size and in construction of the pulpit.
From letter by J. S. Emerson, Waialua, December,
3, 1832:
The field is large and apparently white for the harvest.
A good part if not all the people around us appear favorably disposed toward us and our object so far as they
know anything about it. There is one great obstacle to
the gospel, it is ignorance, gross ignorance, among the
people. One of the school teachers has said lately that
when we first came to this station she was afraid to come
and visit us because she thought that we were the gods.
1833. Our meeting house, of which we spoke the last
year, has, after a long struggle and much delay, been
completed. It is built of firm materials and is one of
the best specimens of native workmanship I have seen.
It will contain one thousand five hundred or one thousand eight hundred people to be seated in native style
and if proper care is taken of the thatch it will doubtless
be a good building for quite a number of years. The
house was dedicated on Wednesday the 25th of September, at which time all the people in the several districts
belonging to this station who wished to be considered on
the Lord's side were requested to attend. The house was
filled. Mr. Bingham was present and preached. Mrs.
Emerson has a school of about forty women, most of
them teachers, and another of about forty children, all
of whom are readers in these two schools; she has occupied the forenoon of each day four days in the week.




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1829-1834      141
As to our situation in the midst of this people we feel
happy and contented, although alone we are not lonely.
We have no time to indulge in gloom or despondency for
we have a great work in hand and woe, woe to us if not
found faithful and diligent. At the organization of our
church we chose an individual, Kuokoa, to the office of
Deacon and publicly read and explained to him the passages of Scripture that relate to the duties of his office.
A few days after he came to me and said that one of
his duties was to feed the hungry in the church and
another to provide, so far as in his power, for the wants
of their teachers. He added that if at any time my
family were in want of food he wished me to inform
him and he would either furnish it himself or see that
some of the brethren in the church did. He has been as
good as his word, so far as articles of native food have
been wanting, but we have rarely found occasion to ask
for them. During the last four months the chief at
Waialua has kept a careful and, I suppose, accurate account of the births and deaths in the district of Waialua.
Births had been but twenty, deaths forty-four, yet no
special sickness in the place. At this rate of decrease the
native population in the Sandwich Islands would, in forty
years, be reduced to about one-third of the present number.
From   letter by D. Baldwin, Waimea, Hawaii,
November 21, 1833:
In September we went to Kohala for seven weeks. The
people had built a house for us in Kohala and asked
when we would come. They furnished us everything we
needed in the way of food. We were especially pleased,
when word was given at the close of the first service for
the children to separate and sit in a place by themselves,
to see about two hundred gathered together as chattering
as a flock of birds. Mrs. Baldwin, aided by native
teachers, attended to them while I superintended the
adults. About one hundred or one hundred and fifty of
these thoughtless little immortals thronged us, for several




142


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


Sabbaths as we returned to our house, till we reached the
yard. Their curiosity was not much to be wondered at
as a white woman was probably never in the district before and some of them had, doubtless, never seen one.
No crowd of little ones, in any other part of the world,
ever touched our hearts with such compassion as these.
I was told that a sick woman lay in a village hard by.
As she was unable to attend the meeting the evening
before, I thought I must go and tell her of the gospel
lest she should die before I came round again. I went
and found a middle-aged woman lying with ulcers in the
feet and limbs. She had been confined from the first
arrival of the Gospel in the island, had never seen a missionary before, nor ever been at a religious meeting or
at a school. After telling her such things as I thought
best adapted to her spiritual wants, I remarked that I
could say but little as we must soon be going, but there
was a great fountain of truth in the Bible. She must
get some of the people to read it to her every day. She
replied, and so did some of the by-standers, that she
read it herself and immediately pulled out, from her side,
a dirty copy of one of the Gospels. I wondered at her
being able to read, and the more, as her eyes looked inflamed and dim, but was informed she had acquired the
art, with the assistance of such as came to the house,
while she was lying sick. She showed some knowledge
of divine things. I asked her where she learned these
things. She said: "Native teachers told her what they
had heard of the missionaries at Kailua."  I asked her
if she prayed; she blushed, which I thought might be because she was ashamed of the duty, but, presently, said:
"Yes, I pray, but it is awkward and not, I suppose, as
you pray." After talking as long as I supposed best to
stay, and praying with her, I departed rejoicing that God
could accompany by his spirit truths which we might
think were lost and forgotten.
I made a visit to the Heiau of Mookini in Kohala,
built by Kamehameha. This, I was told, was the most




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1829-1834 143
famous temple on this island, perhaps on all the islands, for
human sacrifices. When I asked how many human victims
were offered there, the reply was: ua lau, ua lau, ua lau,
etc. There were four hundred and four hundred and
four hundred, etc. In a word, the expense of this one
heathen temple was greater than that of all the churches
in the United States, and even in the whole Christian
world. It was an expense of blood, of life, of souls. And
what a reign of terror must there have been among this
simple-hearted people when tabus were laid on the district and their appointment carefully concealed from the
people, that every one might be caught and made a victim
who was found out of his own doors, and when the
minions of the priest roamed about by night to catch the
unsuspecting and innocent.
I am on the whole much pleased with the progress
made in children's schools and in the qualification of their
teachers during the last year. But the art of governing,
both in the family, in the school, and in the nation, must
be very much cultivated before schools can be a very efficient means of improvement in the hands of native
teachers.
April, 1833. By the ship Mentor there arrived at
Honolulu Rev. and Mrs. Benjamin Parker, and Rev. and
Mrs. Lowell Smith. This being the sixth company, or
the fifth reenforcement. Soon after the arrival of this
reenforcement the Mission gathered for their Annual, or
General, Meeting at Honolulu, and held prolonged discussion as to the location of the several couples and the
sending of missionaries to the Marquesas Islands.
In accord with the vote of the Mission Meeting of
June, 1833, three families, the Alexanders, Armstrongs,
and Parkers, proceeded by way of Tahiti to the Marquesas
Islands, where they remained eight months, during which
period they encountered the utmost dangers and privations possible, short of loss of life.  They were most
warmly welcomed by their brethren upon their return
to Hawaii.




144


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


Extracts from  a letter by W. P. Alexander, from
Taiohae, Marquesas Islands, dater September 4, 1833:
I learned yesterday that when the Missionary Packet
lay at anchor here for three days a year ago, a plot was
formed to kill all on board and take the vessel. A man
of considerable importance conceived the design, but as
he could get but one chief to join him he could not
execute it.
Taiohae, April 3, 1834. In view of all the facts which
we had gathered we felt on Monday evening as if it was
time to halt and seriously consider the whole state of this
mission. We therefore agreed to observe Tuesday, the
first of April, as a day of fasting and prayer to God for
direction in the path of duty. In the afternoon when
we met together for conference and united prayer, in
view of the facts before us, we unanimously agreed that
it is our duty to abandon this field, embracing the first
good opportunity of returning to the Sandwich Islands.
The population in this field capable of being brought under
the influence of missionaries is too small to justify the
Board in sustaining a mission here, when such vast fields
are calling for their efforts. Considering, therefore, the
numbers and situation of the people and the danger of
our situation among them and, considering the wants of
one hundred thousand in the Sandwich Islands, it appears to us to be the path of wisdom and duty to abandon
this field and return to the Sandwich Islands.
Honolulu, May 13, 1834. When we finally left the
Marquesas the crews of both vessels laid hold with vigor
and before it was dark had all our goods on board the
two ships. Before we got our goods all aboard, however,
the natives grew almost furious with a desire to get them.
Before Mr. Parker had succeeded in getting his removed
they pulled over one side of his house and tore away
all his partitions. About dark we got aboard ourselves
and felt grateful that we got off so well. Yesterday we
astonished the brethren here by our arrival.




XV


JOURNAL AND LETTERS, 1834-1838
F     ROM   letter written by A. Thurston, D. Baldwin, and R. Tinker, Honolulu, July 15,
1834:
Mr. Ruggles, on account of his declining health, decided, with the approbation of the mission, to embark
in the ship Telegraph, Captain Sayre, for the United
States. He and his family sailed in January last and
with them Lucy Bingham and Emily Whitney, to be
educated among our intelligent and Christian population.
On the 23d of May it pleased the Lord to afflict us in
the death of Mrs. Rogers. It was an event we looked
not for, an admonition to be always ready. She was
buried in the same grave with her two infant children.
Mr. Shepard, of whom we have heretofore spoken of as
one near the grave, continued with us the last twelve
months ready to depart and, at times, apparently on the
point of going, and then reviving again so as to devote
some attention to the reading of proof sheets and to
other business of the printing department; labors to
which he was ardently devoted even to the last for it was
his heart's desire to supply the nation with the word
of life. He died on the morning of the Sabbath, July
6, 1834.
As to your inquiries in reference to the chiefs, we would
say: while Governor Adams had charge of Oahu he still
acted as governor of Hawaii, and has now returned
thither. Hoapili resides at present at Honolulu as a
counsellor in the affairs of the nation, but is the governor
145




146


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


of Maui. It is not easy to say precisely how many of
the chiefs are entitled to a seat in the national council.
As to the authority of the Prime Minister it may be remarked that Kaahumanu derived her authority from
Kamehameha on account of the minority of his sons,
and shared it in common with Kalanimoku.       When
Kalanimoku died all that authority, the king being yet
a minor, was left with Kaahumanu who, at her decease,
willed her authority, as well as lands, to Kinau, who now
bears the office of Prime Minister. She acts as governess
of Oahu, but her power as Minister of State depends
much upon the voice and influence of the king.
From   report of Sandwich Island Mission to the
American Board, July, 1834:
When the people are sick medicine is sometimes called
for, but it commonly happens that the missionaries do
not know of the illness of their neighbors till called to
attend their funerals. The service on such occasion is
performed sometimes at the house and sometimes at the
grave. The corpse is usually wound up in black kapa
without a coffin. So far as recollected only one of fifty
whose funerals were attended the past year, was buried
in a coffin. A few only attend on funeral services, ten,
fifteen, or twenty, for whose benefit a portion of Scripture
is read, a few remarks made and a prayer offered.
From  letter by Mrs. Thurston, Kailua, October 23,
1834:
When we went down to Oahu to the General Meeting
of the Mission last June, we repaired immediately to
Mr. Bingham's. His family was soon collected in the
parlor and it was at once suggested to our minds that
the presence of Mr. and Mrs. Whitney were alone wanting
to make out all that remained of the pioneers of our
mission. Being in a neighboring house they were immediately called in and for the first time since quitting




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1834-1838 147
the brig Thaddeus, 1820, all whose feet continued to press
the soil of the Sandwich Islands were together in one
spot. Mr. and Mrs. Whitney had no children by their
side. They, four in number, were far away from their
parents and from each other. Mr. and Mrs. Bingham
appeared with two little children. Two they had sent
home, and two they had laid in their graves; ourselves
with our four children alone appeared an unbroken
family. Mr. Whitney remarked that his heart never came
so near breaking as when he sent away his last child.
"But," he says, "if I had not sent away my children
1835 would not find me at the Sandwich Islands." Mr.
Richards had seven children, the most numerous family
of any upon the ground. With the exception of Mr.
Goodrich's family, who will ere long, probably, sail for
America, our three families alone furnish children over
six or seven years of age. Still, at our last General Meeting, no less than forty-seven children of the mission were
brought together. The missionaries daily assembled in
a retired school house, near the Mission House, so that
the children were allowed at any hour to go from one
to the other and often used to attend the meetings and
we were sometimes amused to see the scene which was
spread out before us. One father would be seen with a
child on his knee, another with one slumbering at his
feet, a third walking to and fro on the vacant end of the
house, leading one by the hand. Here a little boy by
his father's side would be making dogs and horses not to
be distinguished; there a group formed trying their skill
in drawing geometrical diagrams, or, perhaps braiding,
the rushes at the feet furnishing facilities; while at a
little distance their mothers would be seated engaged in
a book or plying their needles. In this way I have seen
twenty children displayed through the house, while their
fathers were engaged in their discussions In our situation I approve the motto: that the missionary best serves
his generation who serves the public, and his wife serves
her generation who serves her family.




148


4 THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


A wooden house sent out from America to Mr. Stewart
by his friends was, by the mission, sent to Mr. Thurston.
It is placed in our large retired yard at Kailua, Hawaii,
and both yard and house are specially devoted to the
accommodation of our children. It has been to me like
the shadow of a great rock in a weary land. Here is
our school room  and sleeping apartment.  Our other
house, which is capacious, is open to all our household
employments performed by natives. There, too, is Mr.
Thurston's study so situated that his school and people
can ever have access to him without in the least annoying
my department.
THE FOLLOWING PERSONS WERE LOCATED AT THEIR
SEVERAL STATIONS BY VOTE OF THE MISSION
IN 1834:
Mr. Gulick is stationed at Koloa, a new post on the
southern shore of Kauai.
Mr. Alexander is to occupy one of the two remaining
stations near the north end of the same island.
Mr. Clark is removed from Honolulu to Lahainaluna
to assist in the instruction of the High School.
Mr. Tinker is to remove from Wailuku on Maui to
Honolulu to take charge of the periodical paper, Ke
Kumu Hawaii, and perform such other missionary labor
as he may be able.
Mr. Smith removes from Molokai to take a new station
at Ewa about fourteen miles west of Honolulu.
Mr. Armstrong is to occupy a new post on East Maui,
as he and the brethren of that island shall determine.
Mr. Parker is to take one of the vacant districts on
Hawaii or Oahu at his own discretion.
From letter by E. TV. Clark, Honolulu, September
28, 1833. Rejoicing in the arrival of Rev. John Diell
as Seamen's Chaplain of Honolulu, he says:
Much time must yet elapse before the Bible can all be
translated and corrected for a uniform edition. Besides,




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1834-1838 149
the Sandwich Islanders are not yet a reading people.
Although twenty thousand or more can read, a small
portion only of this number have acquired the habit of
reading books for the sake of knowing and understanding
the contents. They need more school instruction, more
mental discipline in order to read our books with profit.
Great multitudes, however, and even all our readers would
derive much advantage from having the Scriptures, and
other books, in their own hands; and they ought, I think,
all to be supplied, at least with the New Testament, as
soon as possible.
From  letter by L. Andrews, Lahainaluna, October
1, 1834:
As soon as practicable after the General Meeting of
1831, Mr. Richards and myself commenced the examination of several sites in the neighborhood of Lahaina for
the location of the school. We at length fixed upon the
present spot, which has since been named by the scholars
Lahainaluna, or Upper Lahaina. It is situated back of
Lahaina about two miles and its elevation above it has
been estimated at seven hundred feet. Hence we look
down upon Lahaina as upon a map. As yet there is
no road, except a foot path and that a poor one, from
the school to the sea shore. The site was in a wild, barren, rude state, but by cultivation and irrigation is capable
of being made very fertile and pleasant. The prospect
is extensive and fine. As soon as the site was fixed upon,
notice was sent to the different stations that the school
would commence on the fifth of September, 1831.
Previously to that time some scholars had arrived from
Hawaii, but none as yet from the leeward islands. During the week or ten days previous to the first Monday
of September a native house was put up for my family,
whither we removed. On the Saturday before the schbol
commenced some of the Lahaina scholars erected a lanai,
or shed, of kukui poles and grass for a school house. It




150


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


served only as a screen from the sun, as it would not
shed rain at all and from the materials it could last but a
few months. My own house was without doors or windows for several weeks, and it was about two months before we had any place for cooking except the open air.
The school commenced on the fifth of September, 1831.
About twenty-five scholars, chiefly from Maui and Hawaii,
were all that had assembled from their respective islands.
After the school had continued about two weeks, and it was
manifest the scholars were interested in it, I ventured to
propose the subject of building a school house. I told them
this school was designed to be a permanent one, that
many things yet remained for them to have, but that
we had no conveniences, that upon them depended the
success of the school, that when it was manifest that
they wished for instruction, and would do anything to
gain it, the good people of Christian lands would assist
them, that learning was not only a good thing, but it
was a duty to labor to obtain it, but that knowledge
could not be obtained without conveniences, such as a
permanent house, tables, seats, books, paper, etc., that
books would be made by us as far as we could make them,
but that we were not then able to build a house. They
all assented that what I had said was proper and that
they would work if I would show them how, that I must
be their teacher and their chief.  I told them that I
would be their teacher but not their chief. If they worked,
they must work willingly and cheerfully. It was for
their own benefit and not for mine. Such was the drift
of the conversation at that time. I dismissed them by
requesting them to think well of the matter and tomorrow we would talk more about it.
After school the next day I asked them what they
thought of a school house?  They said they had thought
some about it and their thought was they could build
one if I would show them how. The kind of building
was agreed upon the day before. As stones were convenient it was thought a stone house would be the quick



JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1834-1838 151
est and easiest to build. It only remained to settle the
time of commencing the work. As usual with Hawaiians,
some said next week, some next month, and so on, but
no one thought of the present as suitable. I asked them
what the harm of beginning now? They made several
objections without answering my question. I asked again,
what would be the harm of beginning now? They said
we know no harm, but it is not the custom of Hawaiian
people to be quick at work. I then said, those of you
who are willing to commence now, follow me, those who
wish to wait till next month may sit still. I then took
up such a sized stone as I could conveniently carry and
walked to the site of the contemplated house, twelve or
fifteen rods perhaps, where I laid it down. More than
half of the school very promptly followed and imitated
my example and all of them for curiosity or some other
motive within ten or fifteen minutes, came on to the
ground. We worked about an hour and I then dismissed
them. From this time on we worked regularly an hour
or two immediately after school both in the morning
and in the afternoon. I taxed myself to do as much as
any of them, though I could not carry very large stones.
In about fifteen days it was judged we had stones enough
collected for the body of the house and we commenced
laying them up. About the first of November the walls
were finished. The house was forty feet by twenty inside,
walls three feet thick. The building stood on a side hill
and we designed to have the floor an inclined plane or
rather steps at regular intervals. The walls, therefore,
were about eight feet in heighth at the upper end and
about twelve at the lower. When the walls were up it
was necessary that school should be dismissed to go and
get timber. The nearest timber suitable for beams and
rafters for the school house was twenty-five miles and
more of it, upwards of thirty. The sticks of timber were
divided out to companies and the school was dismissed
with a charge to return as soon as they could obtain
their timber. They went to different places on East




152


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


Maui where they supposed they should succeed best. As
there were then about sixty scholars the timber required
would be equal to one stick to a scholar and I supposed
a week or ten days would be sufficient.
After waiting four or five weeks, in which time I
scarcely heard from them, I sent for them to return
whether they had any timber or not. The fact was there
had been some very stormy weather; but the principal
reason of their delay was, that the chief at Lahaina had
given direction to the people in the neighborhood of the
timber to supply the scholars with food while thus engaged and the scholars, finding themselves so much better
provided for than they had been at school, were in no
hurry to shorten their stay. And, on the other hand,
the scholars told such marvellous stories about the difference between vowels and consonants and the position of
the mouth in pronouncing them and the wonderful influence of commas, semicolons, and periods on the meaning of a sentence, all of which they had learned at the
high school, that they were considered by no means unwelcome guests by their more illiterate neighbors. In
the course of ten days or so from the time I sent for
them they all got back. During their absence, however,
there had come a long storm of rain, together with a
strong wind, and as the house was built on a side hill
the rain that fell within the walls was prevented from
running off by the wall on the lower side and thus soaked
into the ground, rendering the foundation soft, when twothirds of the house fell flat to the ground. After the
scholars returned we held a council to consider what
should be done. It was thought best to rebuild the house,
but not until after the rainy season should be over, which
would be in a few weeks. We, therefore, laid aside regular labor and attended to study as well as we could, for
one-half of our lanai, or shed, had been blow away by the
wind.
About the first of February it was supposed the storms
of the season were over and we began to think of re



JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1834-1838      153
building our school house. We held a consultation and
formed a resolution to that effect. We altered the plan
of our building and somewhat enlarged it. The house
was now fifty feet by twenty inside and stood fronting
the sea. When the walls were again up, school was dismissed in order that the scholars might go and fetch their
timber, as most of it still remained in the places where
it was cut. The timber (most of it large and heavy,
particularly the rafters) was carried on their shoulders
or dragged on the ground with ropes except perhaps a
few sticks brought on canoes a part of the way. In a
week or two it was brought on the ground. And now
it became me to lay aside the mason and assume the
carpenter. During the months of April and May the
scholars were engaged in finishing the materials and covering the roof and, when not in the mountain collecting
aho and ki leaves for thatching, we had school as usual.
The house was just covered before our General Meeting
in June, 1832.
On the fourteenth of February we published the first
Hawaiian Newspaper ever printed at the Sandwich Islands.
Of the style in which it was got up I say nothing, as
we have but one sort of type and those had once been
so much worn out as to be thrown aside, as had also our
press. We called the paper, Ka Lama Hawaii, that is:
The Hawaiian Luminary.
From letter by E. W. Clark, Lahainaluna, November
10, 1834:
The High School is becoming a very important branch
of our work. It is clear to my mind, and I believe to
the minds of all the members of the mission, that if the
school cannot be sustained and carried forward, all hopes
with regard to the permanent success of the Gospel here
are cut off. I cannot well see how the operations of the
mission can be carried forward with any success without it. The land which has been given by the king and




154


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


chiefs to the school we regard as an invaluable help, as
it will afford the scholars the means of procuring their
own food and give us full control over the land in the
vicinity of the school, the importance of which we have
greatly felt.
November 14, 1835. We have been called to suffer a
severe domestic affliction.  Our oldest child, a beloved
daughter five and a half years old, was suddenly removed
from us in March last by the croup.
December, 1834. Rev. D. B. Lyman mentions that by
vote of the mission they have been directed to establish
a Boarding School at Hilo. Also, Mr. Lyman speaks of
tours made both in Puna and in North Hilo.
From Mission Letter of July 3, 1835, from    Honolulu:
Mr. Armstrong became very ill, their house being leaky
and damp, and on Thursday, January first, the natives
having very ingeniously constructed an excellent litter he
was removed from Haiku to Wailuku. The adult scholars
in his school volunteered their services on the occasion and
he was removed with great tenderness and care. We
acknowledge their kindness and are grateful for it.
The political affairs of the nation are more settled than
they were last year and the laws better enforced. The
king, though still greatly devoted to pleasure, is more
disposed to listen to the counsel of the older chiefs. He
is very respectful to missionaries, and occasionally attends
church. Kinau still holds the office of Prime Minister,
and the governors of the other islands are the same as
stated last year.
We love this mission better than father or mother,
brother and sister, friends and country. And it is the
affectionate solicitude we feel for it that leads us to say
again and again: "Brethren pray for this people and
for us, send hither more light, for the darkness is not
past, though the day has begun to dawn."
Habits of industry appear to be slowly gaining ground




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1834-1838       155
and nothing, probably, is wanting to render them general
but. proper incentives to labor. The quantity of clothing
worn by the natives is, we think, annually increasing, and
the frail native tapa is giving place more and more to
the foreign fabric and the American style of dress. Especially is this true at, and near, the several mission stations. Perhaps no article of foreign manufacture is so
much called for among these natives as our domestic
cottons, and none is probably more useful to them.
In consequence of the great trouble among seamen
touching at this port, because of rum, a petition was
drawn up during the last year and signed by twenty-five
ship masters praying the king to suppress all the grog
shops in the place. Soon after this another petition was
drawn up and signed by the high chiefs and more than
three thousand of the most respectable natives of Honolulu
and its vicinity, asking of the king the entire suppression
of the sale, manufacture, and use of ardent spirits on
the islands. In a letter like this we can only allude to
the painful subject, but we do earnestly pray the Prudential Committee, and all who wish to see the Redeemer's
Kingdom established in heathen lands, to do all in their
power to stay this dreadful tide of fiery ruin, which rolls
from our native shores and threatens to deluge whole
nations in its course.
A very large thatched building was erected for a meeting house at Kailua in 1826. Messrs. Thurston and
Bishop speak of it as being burnt down in 1835, and of
the resolve to erect a stone building, which will require
two years in the construction.'
From   letter by J. S. Green, Wailukcu, March 16,
1836:
Today, after making a few remarks to the people, I
called upon Bartimeus, the blind man from Hilo, to ad1 This the projected stone building is, doubtless, the large stone
church standing today (1917) at Kailua.




156


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


dress the congregation as he had just arrived. He did
so and afforded us great satisfaction by his excellent and
well told remarks. I am unusually pleased with this
man, he is so humble and well instructed in the things
pertaining to the Kingdom of God. He is going to make
the tour of East Maui. I trust he will be an instrument
of great good. May the Saviour go with him and bless
his exhortations to the salvation of some, at least, of the
poor benighted occupants of the island.
In a letter of Messrs. Green and Armstrong of date,
Wailuku, November 16, 1836, they mention the founding
of the Wailuku Girls' Boarding School. Mr. Armstrong
has charge of the church and pastoral work, while Mr.
and Mrs. Green and Miss Brown are beginning a girls'
industrial school. They speak of a dozen girls as having
successfully woven a piece of cotton cloth.  Governor
Hoapili advises the people to send their girls to the
school.
One of the missionaries who spends his Sabbaths in
Haiku has a congregation of three hundred.
From letter by Miss Maria Ogden, Lahaina, 1836:
Were I now in America with the knowledge I have
of the trials of a missionary life I would gladly go forth
to meet them all for the privilege of laboring for these
poor people. I ask no greater happiness this side of
heaven than to labor and die in the blessed work.
Mission Report of August 23, 1836, contains mention
of the initial gift for the building of the Kawaiahao Stone
Church. The king, as you will see, is very friendly as
shown by his gift of $3000 for the proposed new church
edifice.
From letter by Rev. J. S. Emerson, Waialua, April
27, 1837:
For the support of the ten schools under my care I
have paid out about one hundred and twenty dollars dur



The Hawaiian Stone Chnrch, Kan ajaba Hnolnulu 








JOURNALS AND LEERS, 1834-1838             157
ing the past year, about thirty dollars of which was contributed by the parents and friends of the children, the
rest has been obtained from the funds of the Board; and
could our patrons at home see the pleasing improvement
made by a few children and the stimulus given to the
teachers by the occasional bestowment of a shirt and pair
of pantaloons upon them, I think they would both pray
in faith and weep for gratitude that such small sacrifices
can be made to result in so much good. We have one
teacher from the High School who is doing well, all the
rest of our teachers have been trained up at the station.
From letter by Wm. Richards, Sag Harbor, Massag
chusetts, May 13, 1887:
On the 9th of December I embarked from Oahu with
my family, consisting of Mrs. Richards and six of our
children, together with Mr. Bishop's oldest daughter, nine
of us in all. We have left our two youngest children at
the islands. Mrs. Richards' general health is much as
it was when we left the islands, having some cough and
her general health being rather low. The rest of us are
all in good health.
New Huven, July 8, 1837. An opening has been very
providentially made for two of our children in the family
of a Mr. Williston, East Hampton. We have no distinct.opening yet for our three oldest boys, but do not feel
greatly anxious.
From letter of Lorenzo Lyons, May 26, 1837:
I cannot close the report without alluding to some of
the scenes through which I have been called to pass. A
fond and lovely son, an infant five months old, the youngest and tenderest branch of my family has been laid in
the lone grave. No missionary brother or sister was
present at the time to soothe the parents' wounded




158


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


hearts. Soon after, my eldest son was laid upon the bed
of sickness and brought so near to death that we despaired
of his recovery. But the Lord raised him up. But there
remained concealed from mortal view another trial of
a most overwhelming nature. This was the death, on
May 14, 1837, of one who was bone of my bone and
flesh of my flesh, the partner of my joys and sorrows.
the wife of my bosom, the counsellor and companion of
my youth. The blow I feel most deeply, but the Lord
has sustained me under it. Her career was short, but
useful. Angels, I trust, have welcomed her to a higher
and nobler sphere of action. But while I mourn the loss
of my beloved wife a laborer in the missionary work, I
rejoice at the seasonable arrival of my helpers.
January 15, 1838. The Lord is doing great things
for Waimea and Hamakua. He is driving his chariot
of salvation through the length and breadth of the land.
Sinners are fleeing for their lives, the word of God pursues
them with resistless power. The Holy Ghost pours its
naked truth all burning upon their souls. There is no
alternative but to yield and live or resist and die. Multitudes seem to prefer the former. The Lord is putting
a new song into my mouth so that I can sing as on an
angel's harp. The year of jubilee has come. Return ye
sorrowing sinners! or, rather,
"The glorious harvest now is come,
See sorrowing sinners flocking home!"
The first Sabbath in this month was a most interesting
and blessed day. Multitudes assembled together to worship God. The meeting house was too small for them
so that we held our worship in the open air under the
broad canopy of heaven. What need of a more spacious
temple? In the afternoon I had the blessed and delightful privilege of baptizing two hundred and twenty individuals and receiving them to the church of the Lord.
Among these were a number of children, some not more




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1834-1838 159
than seven or eight years of age. What a glorious
spectacle! The whole number received to this church
within the past six months is three hundred. About
sixty children among them.
From letter by E. O. Hall, Honolulu, April 19,
1837:
We bless the Lord and take courage, but, Oh, what a
dying people this is! They drop down on all sides of
us and it seems that the nation must speedily become
extinct. Three of Brother Dimond's native bookbinder
boys have died within two or three weeks, and last night
one of our nearest neighbors was called away who was
well yesterday morning. What we do for people must be
done quickly.
October 18, 1837. In May last I was walking up the
valley Pauoa, which is about two miles from Honolulu,
with one of the brethren who was down to General Meeting. In the course of our walk I discovered a number
of children who seemed to be idling away their time without any one to look after them. I inquired whether they
had a school to go to, they answered in the negative.
After some further conversation, in which I found they
would be glad to have some one look after them, I appointed a school the next Sabbath for the children. After
a week or two I requested all the adults to come also,
whether they could read or not, and about two hundred
came. These I supplied with books suited to their requirements. I divided the school into classes over which
I put the most intelligent natives I could find. After
a few weeks I got the children into week-day schools,
under their native teachers, visiting them on Tuesday and
Friday afternoons, instructing a class of the most promising myself. Thus I have continued to the present time,
and can say that I have found it a pleasant duty and an
agreeable relaxation from  the duties of the Printing
Office.




160        THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
From   letter by Artemus Bishop    to the American
Board in Boston, Ewa, Oahu, September 2, 1838:
We wish to be put on the same footing as all the rest
of the world are, who live on salaries, viz.: to have a
certain sum given to us as our own, to make the best
use of it we can, allowing each man to be his own judge.
This, we think, is the wise design of Providence....
Had we salaries to use as our own, even though they
were less than was heretofore been allowed us on the old
system, I have no doubt the Board's money would be made
to go much further than it has heretofore.2
2This marks the end of what was, perhaps, the most successful
experiment of the Common Stock System, known in Mission history.
Though the experiment had continued for eighteen years, it may
never have been heard of by the Socialist philosopher, Henry
George.




XVI


JOURNAL AND LETTERS, 1838-1839
FR0 ROM letter by A. Bishop, 1838:
Our congregation has increased to about four
times its former number. About one thousand
was the former number of regular hearers. We have now,
perhaps, four thousand on the Sabbath morning, but not
that full amount in the evening service. We have laid
aside the use of our chapel, and built a large lanai, or
shelter, where we meet in fair weather which is with us
the greater part of the year. The lanai is one hundred
and sixty-five feet long and seventy-two feet wide and
is filled by the crowd who mostly sit upon the ground in
a compact mass. The religious aspect of things, not only
here but throughout the islands, has been much improved
during the year past. Some of those for whom we had
hoped better things have already gone back to their former
sins and are excluded from Christian fellowship. Such,
I believe, has been more or less the case in all parts of
the islands, but we are not taken by surprise. It is no
more than what we had expected from the first, and no
human foresight or sagacity could have anticipated the
persons who should be of the number. This people have
much idle time on their hands, which we feel anxious
to have employed to some valuable end. It is a most
difficult task to teach industry to an idle people. But it
is necessary to the promotion of their Christian character.
An idle, improvident Christian is a contradiction in
terms. And such have ever been the lazy habits of this
161




162


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


people that they can not improve of themselves without
the influence and example of those who are willing to
persevere in teaching and encouraging them to work. A
little labor will suffice to provide a supply of food for their
own consumption and, besides this, the wants of nature's
children are few. Our Hawaiian Christians find themselves in consequence in possession of much idle time, and
their previous habits make it sit easily upon them. They
would be glad to hire out at day's work, but there are
none to employ them. Their time must therefore be
spent in indolence or, what is worse, in exposure to corrupting influences, to which their fondness for each
other's society peculiarly leads them. To this influence
our churches will continue to be exposed until some means
of employment can be devised which shall tend to raise
them from their poverty and degradation.
Mission Letter June 4, 1838:
Incipient measures have been taken for two establishments for the manufacture of raw silk; and one of sugar
is now in successful operation at the islands. These are
conducted by foreigners, men of Christian and moral
principles, who are giving encouragement to labor in their
immediate vicinity and are, therefore, haled as auxiliaries
in the work of civilizing the people. The past year has
been one of uncommon interest throughout all the Sandwich Islands. Though the enemy of souls, with his commissioned agents, has opposed the progress of truth and
righteousness, yet the Spirit of the Lord has lifted up
a standard against him. There has probably been no
period since the commencement of the mission when the
progress of truth has been so rapid and the victories of
the cross so numerous and glorious as during the year
that is past. At every station there has been a revival
of religion. A great multitude have professedly turned
to the Lord.




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1888-1839       168


From letter by Mr. R. Armstrong, Wailuku, August
4, 1838:
My public labors during the past year have been more
abundant than they have any previous year of my missionary life. From last January till May first I attended
more than twelve meetings a week, besides almost constant conversation with individuals in private. Indeed,
many days, I have been so pressed from daylight in the
morning till late at night as scarcely to allow me time
to eat, or spend half an hour with my family. At length
my lungs began to give way and I was obliged to slack
a little, though it must be at the expense of my work.
But while it has been a year of toil, it has also been one
of enjoyment such as the world cannot give. There are
a few individuals in the church whose attainments in
holiness seem to be of no ordinary stamp. Among these
are our excellent Bartimeus and the wife of Mr. McLane,
a Bostonian, a member of our church and a good man.
This woman is marked for her good sense, humble walk,
and untiring zeal, and unwavering constancy. Mrs. Armstrong has often told me that she exceeds any one in
prayer she has ever heard. She is a great comfort, as well
as a great help to us. I am always sure of one attentive
hearer and one ready for every good work. Among those
recently received to our church are an Englishman and
two sons of Americans. Prayers now began to be offered
with much fervency and often with strong crying and
tears, and the work from this time assumed a decided
character. Until now we were hoping for a revival, but
now we felt that we were in the midst of one. We had,
heretofore, held our morning meetings in a large school
house, which will hold about four hundred persons, but
we were now obliged to go to the meeting house in order
to get room. The meetings were opened as soon as I
could see to read a hymn and many of them were the
most solemn and interesting that I ever witnessed.




164


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


From   letter by W. P. Alexander, Waioli, Kauai,
August 25, 1838:
The showers of blessings which have been refreshing
the garden of the Lord in these islands of the sea, have
not been withheld from our field. I have never before
witnessed among the people so earnest an attention to
the means of grace and so deep concern for the salvation
of the soul.
From   letter by D. Baldwin, Lahaina, August 17,
1838:
I will attempt to give you a brief account of what God
has been doing for us, though I feel that neither tongue
nor pen can tell what our eyes have seen and our hearts
have felt. Such scenes were never intended to be fully
described here on earth. It will be enough that they
will be fully and perfectly unfolded at the great day when
the secrets of all hearts shall be made manifest and we
shall be prepared to unite with angels in joy unspeakable
and in giving all the glory to God. Our protracted
meeting commenced March 7th. The interest we had
observed among the people previous to the meeting now
became more general, and the cases of decided conviction
or awakening began to multiply. Indeed the little cloud
had already spread till it seemed to rest over the whole
population. There seemed to be an awe over the whole.
During the week of the meeting all business was, as if
by instinct, suspended. Even the work of preparing their
food, to which hunger prompts, was not attended to. It
was observed that no fires for cooking were kindled in
all the place, a change which positive orders from their
chiefs would hardly have effected at any other time. The
whole population seemed, during the week, to view the
time as a Sabbath and, to our view, even the hardest
seemed to have some sense that God was near. Those
were days of awful solemnity to us. We had heard of




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1838-1839      165
His pouring down the Spirit on parts of Hawaii, and
now we saw Him advancing in majesty toward us. We
bowed down in earnest before Him, entreating Him not
to pass by without giving us a shower of blessing.
Our congregations had increased in size before the protracted meeting. The house was almost always crowded
to excess. Probably two thousand were generally present,
while many went away who could not gain admittance,
and more deep solemnity, stillness, and fixed attention
could never be found in any part of the world. All
classes crowded to the place of worship. The children
thrust themselves in where they could find a little vacancy.
Old hardened transgressors, who had scarcely been to the
house of God for the whole fifteen years that the Gospel
had been preached at this place, were now seen there in
tears, melting down under the power of omnipotent truth.
The blind, whom we had never seen before, we now saw,
as we went to the house of God, led along the way, sometimes by a parent, sometimes by a child, and some, perhaps, by a grandchild, just as they were tottering over
the grave. Cripples, also, sometimes affected our hearts
deeply as we saw them laboring to get to God's temple
as hard as some have done to reach that of Juggernaut.
Two of these were seen, and are seen to this day, crawling
on their hands and feet to every meeting. One of them
we had none of us ever seen before and none of the people
seemed to know before that such a being was in existence
and now we had some hope that like the cripple who sat
at the gate called Beautiful, in soul at least, he had been
made whole. Though I have seen many revivals in the
United States, I have never before been in a place where
the Spirit of God seemed so ready to follow up every
truth exhibited before the people. Every sermon seemed
to do thorough execution. If terror was preached, the
people were terrified; if love was the theme, they were
melted; and those who had been before the most set
against the Gospel, were, in many cases, the first to fall
under its power. So evident was the effect of every effort,




166


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


both in awakening individuals and in making a general
impression, that I often felt as if I wished to preach the
whole twenty-four hours without any respite.
Mrs. Baldwin was sometimes able to attend meetings
for women and children, but one of our children being
ill during most of the time she was obliged to confine
most of her efforts to work at home. She, therefore, set
apart a room in the house where, when not engaged in
personal conversation, she could resort with pious women
for prayer and, when she was not able to be with
them, they prayed there by themselves, so that often that
room was a scene of prayer from morning till night. It
was sometimes literally a "bochim" and we trust that
many fervent supplications went up to heaven from that
sacred spot, to return in effusions of the Spirit on the
people. One of the earliest effects witnessed of the operations of the Spirit here was that old inveterate smokers
were abandoning their pipes and flocking to the house of
God. It was seeing these visible effects of the Spirit
that first seemed to give point and earnestness to the
prayers of Christians and some of them have continued
their earnestness and their apparent constancy in prayer
to this day. I have mentioned the interest that was early
manifested by many of the children. Parents were astonished to find their little ones not only becoming more
docile and ready to listen to them, but to find them often
alone praying to God to save their souls. For a long
time one could scarcely go in any direction in the sugar
cane or banana groves without finding these little ones
praying and weeping before God. I have myself turned
out a long way to avoid disturbing them. The excitement
took the most powerful hold of the central girls' school,
a school formerly taught by Miss Ogden, a school over
which she labored and prayed faithfully for many a year
but not seeing the fruit she desired. When she left them
six months previous, all were wild and many of them
exceedingly wicked. But the Spirit made a great overturning at once. There are upwards of one hundred in




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1838-1889            167
this school and, probably, there is not one of them that
has not had considerable concern for her soul.
November 13. I have formerly mentioned how powerfully the Spirit has taken hold of the school for girls in
the center of this place. They were almost universally
awakened to attend to the concerns of their souls and
comparatively few of them seemed to have returned to
their former stupidity. Only twelve from this school
have been received to the church, but there may be, perhaps, two or three times as many more who give evidence
of being bor again, who will, we hope, in due time be
gathered in. One of the twelve admitted at our last communion has already been called to her everlasting rest.
It is evident that Grace had made the most powerful
and rapid work in her soul and when we think of her,
a pure spirit before the throne of God, we cannot but
exclaim that if all our exertions this year had but resulted
in the translation to glory of only this one individual,
we should have reaped a large reward. One week ago
she was in blooming health. Her disease, a bilious fever,
was very rapid in its progress. Yesterday her spirit took
its flight and this afternoon we committed her body to
the silent grave. She was probably about twelve or fourteen years of age. From the time that her attention was
arrested at our protracted meeting in March last to the
day of her death, her heart had been evidently becoming
more and more deeply interested in the things of the
Kingdom of Christ, and this was the more decisive evidence of her piety inasmuch as she maintained this spirit
in the midst of three girls living in the same family who
had nearly lost all their seriousness. Her chosen companions have been companions in praying. She was often
found in the darkness of night in the groves of sugar
cane pouring out her soul to God. In her sickness, when
rational, she expressed great delight in departing to be
with Christ. I cannot tell how many times, as I have
looked down from the pulpit and seen this young disciple
like others sitting on the mats in front, her face looking




168


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


up as if to catch every word and the tears often coursing
their way over her cheeks, delight has thrilled my soul
at the thought that ten, twenty, and thirty years hence
she would be a shining pattern of piety, a mother in
Israel, a standing monument to silence gainsayers and
to point souls to Jesus, but in the case of this one God
had other purposes.
From   letter by A. Thurston, Kailua, April 12,
1838:
It is eighteen years this day since we took up our
residence on the shores of Hawaii. On the 12th of April,
1820, two families of us were left at this place, then the
residence of the king and most of the principal chiefs, and
the rest of the mission sailed for the island of Oahu.
The changes which have been effected in these islands
since that period through the blessing of God on the
efforts of this mission have been great and wonderful
as the facts, from year to year, given to the public have
fully shown.
From letter of H1. R. Hitchcock, Kaluaaha, Molokai,
November, 1838:
Several of the native brethren were sent out to the
outstations to converse with the people and they were
astonished to find that the Lord had preceded them and
had inclined the hearts of many to attend to His word.
They were absent one week and returned little less surprised at the power and goodness of God, than were the
disciples when they exclaimed: "Lord, even the devils
are subject unto us through thy name!" This visit of
these brethren to the distant places of the island had a
very beneficial result.  Besides the protracted meeting
at the station I have held two others, one at Halawa, an




a
Rev. and Mrs. Asa Thurston








JOURNALS AND       LET     RS, 18S8-1889   169
outpost twelve miles northeast of Kaluaaha, the other at
Kalamaula twenty miles west. Both were solemn sessions and the Holy Spirit was present at Halawa in a
most evident manner.    From  the commencement the
people seemed prepared to believe the word and every
successive sermon seemed to increase the fears of simners
and to make them the more earnest in inquiring for salvation. No means but the naked sword of the spirit were
resorted to on this occasion and yet there seemed to be
scarcely an unconverted sinner in the assembly, which
averaged during the meeting between four and five hundred. Never did I witness a more fixed and anxious attention to the word of God.
Lahaina, January 7, 1839. Rev. D. Baldwin writes:
The meeting house on the Sabbath for two months past
has been excessively crowded. We reckon that above two
thousand may find room in the house. During November we were in the midst of shipping season, and yet
that was the time when our congregations became more
thronged, which was a matter of astonishment to the
people. Not less than twenty ships were at anchor most
of that month and yet a pious stranger remarked to me
that the market was the solitary place, and the temple
of God the crowded place, a thing which had never before
been so seen in Lahaina. Hoapili and wife among the
highest chiefs, now tottering with age, appear well. They
are infirm, but always in the midst of the congregation.
She has a stately and gigantic figure and within a few
days I have heard her setting forth the Gospel principles
and duties to individuals in private with a majesty and
force which would not have disgraced an apostle. She
is an own sister of Kaahumanu and seems ripening fast
to join her in the holy throng on high. At this time
there is probably a deeper excitement of religious feeling
in the numerous retinue of these two aged chiefs than
there has ever been before since the Gospel came to these
shores.




170


1 THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


From letter of L. Lyons, Waimea, Hawaii, February
11, 1839:
I reached the valley of Waipio sometime in the afternoon. This valley is some twelve miles distant from
Waimea. Commenced a protracted meeting, after which
I laid myself down on a native bed, which is a little
softer than a board.  Fleas and mosquitos used their
influence to keep away sleep. Awoke, took breakfast on
kalo, breadfruit, etc., held several meetings, conversed
with church members, serious inquirers and impenitent
sinners. Held one or two meetings and then took a
canoe and sailed for Waimanu, a valley some three or four
miles distant. This valley can be reached by water when
the ocean is calm, otherwise it must be reached by travelling over a,umber of palis (mountain passes), some of
which are very steep. I never ventured this way. The
fatigue would probably be very injurious to the body.
The ocean today was rather rough. The head man said it
would do for fishermen, but not for me. Then said I: "I
am a fisherman and, therefore, will venture out." I ventured, the surf rolled furiously and threatened to swallow
up canoe and all in it. But the Lord prevented. Reached
Waimanu in safety, held meeting all Thursday. Preached
to adults and children, conversed with Christians and
sinners.  Took canoe and returned to Waipio, landed
without harm amid the swelling and dashing surf. My
nerves were not a little unstrung.
I often weep over the poor miserable natives when I
go out among them and behold their miserable dwelling
places, destitute of all articles of comfort, filled with
filth and smoke, forbidding an entrance, or even an approach. I have sometimes found a sick and apparently
dying person in a wretched hovel that I could not enter.
I would be obliged to stay without and talk and pray
there, the smoke and heat and filth and contractedness
would not allow me to enter. It is a wonder the sick
ever recover or the well keep well so long. Let it not be




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1838-1839      171
understood that all the houses are alike, in some of these
it is different, yet all are sickening enough. I said I
have visited the sick, this is not all, I have also endeavored to heal them by administration of medicine and
have sometimes tried to do something for their comfort
in the article of food. But it is so difficult to do anything
of this kind, that it is discouraging to undertake. Whatever is done must be done at our house. We must provide the dish, the spoon, the water, the fire, the flour,
the milk, the sugar, prepare the article and send it. Then
it is not certain it will be given to the sick. Others who
may have more of something else than love may devour
it. Such is heathenism.
From  letter by H. Bingham, Honolulu, April 26,
1838:
The Spirit of God is showered down upon the whole
extent of the Sandwich Islands and those of us who have
seemed to think the Gospel could hardly gain a lodgment
in the heart of this people because of their alleged stupidity, or ignorance, or want of conscience, are now constrained to admit that they can be as readily affected by
the Spirit of God as any class of men with whom we
have been acquainted. The protracted meeting here about
the time of Nahienaena's funeral appears to have been
crowned with many fruits.
April 19, 1839. Today is the nineteenth anniversary
of our landing at Honolulu and I have just witnessed the
examination of two hundred and seventeen children and
youths, some in reading, some in arithmetic, and some in
astronomy. There are now about fourteen hundred church
members in Honolulu being about equally divided between the two congregations. There have been about ten
thousand admitted to the other churches upon these
islands.




172


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


From letter by Titus Coan, June 6, 1839:
Since July last the pastor has made five separate tours
through Hilo and Puna, holding numerous protracted
meetings and preaching from twenty to thirty times a
week. These labors have been prosecuted from village
to village and from house to house by night and by day.
I suppose the great numbers added to our church is what
staggers the faith of many. A beloved missionary sister
in writing to us on this subject says: "If there were
only a few hundreds we could believe, but there are so
many it spoils it all." That was a frank and honest confession. The fact is that the church is not prepared to
see great things in the conversion of the heathen. Missionaries themselves are not prepared for it. At Kohala
I spent one week in company with Brother Lyons and
Brother Bliss in attending a series of meetings. A large
and solemn concourse of people assembled from day to
day and in increasing numbers to the last. God was
there. His spirit breathed upon the slain. There was
a shaking among the dry bones. The presence of the
spirit was indicated by the fixed eye, the gushing tear,
the quivering lip, the deep sigh, and the heavy groan,
God was there and the people were moved at the presence
of the Lord of the whole earth. God was there. His
power was felt. His arm was seen. His voice was heard.
His thunders shook the hosts of hell. He was there and
none but a sleeper could fail to see it-none but an
infidel could deny it. Pipes like the "books of those
who used curious arts," were brought in great numbers
and burnt, and most of the plantations of tobacco in
Kohala were destroyed.




XVII


JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1838-1840
F.R OM  letter by William  Richards, Lahaima,
August 1, 1838:
" The general subject of Political Economy is
every day increasing in importance and the time has
arrived when the rulers of the nation must have instruction on that subject. There is but one feeling in the
mission in relation to it. How to provide that instruction has at length become a desideratum in our minds.
The king and chiefs are fully impressed with a sense of
the importance of this subject and have said much to us
about it. They waited my return with anxiety and when
they found their request sent by me to the United States
of America was not complied with, they immediately requested me to become their teacher and offered to support
me if I would do it. After considering the subject for
several weeks and discussing the subject thoroughly with
the king and chiefs I at length accepted the appointment
and now act as the "Chaplain Teacher and Translator,"
for the king. They also expect from me free suggestions
on every subject connected with government and on their
duties as rulers of the nation, and in all important cases
I am to be not only translator, but must act as interpreter
for the king. It has been considerably trying to my feeling to turn aside in so great a degree from what is the
more common and appropriate business of the missionary. But I am satisfied that the spiritual as well as the
temporal good of the nation requires it, or at least requires
173




174


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


that some one should be devoted to the business in which
I am now engaged.
I have enclosed to your care a communication addressed
to the Hon. Benjamin F. Butler. It contains a treaty
or rather a proposed treaty between this government and
the United States. I have written to Mr. Butler, at the
request of the king, and hope he will lay the treaty before
the President and use his influence to have it ratified.
Any plan you can devise to forward this object will be
of great benefit to the Sandwich Islands. The treaty is
drawn up as treaties usually are between free and independent nations. Should it be ratified I think difficulties
between this nation and American citizens will be in a
good degree at an end.
From letter by William Richards, Honolulu, August
29, 1839:
I have already informed you of my engagement with
the chiefs entered into in July of last year. Since that
time circumstances have occurred which have made it
necessary for me to leave them entirely, or be more exclusively devoted to them. On the ninth pltimo the
French Frigate L'Artemise arrived demanding satisfaction from this government for alleged violation of
treaties. There was no middle course that I could pursue.
I must either desert my post as teacher of the chiefs or
I must stand by them openly and publicly. The former
course would have been to abandon the nation immediately
to French influence, Catholicism, and utter destruction.
For without some direct advice and aid they would not
have failed to so involve themselves as to either directly
or indirectly have brought down all the evils threatened
in the Manifesto of Captain Laplace. On account of this
state of things I determined to act openly and directly,
not only as interpreter and translator, but, also, to some
extent, as counselor for them.




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1838-1840 175
A  letter regarding Lahainaluna, by E. W. Clark,
September 20, 1837:
Besides about twenty adults the school now consists
of sixty-four boarding scholars. The annual expense of
one scholar we estimate at $30.00. Our most sanguine
hopes have been surpassed by the experiment of a boarding school thus far. The school is more easily governed
than any school of the same number of boys with which
I was ever acquainted in America. And notwithstanding
they are required to be in school, or at work, nearly all
the time and are brought under strict regulations, no
one has yet manifested any wish to leave the school. The
school might be enlarged immediately to any extent so
far as obtaining promising scholars is concerned. We are
satisfied there is no want of capacity or of disposition to
learn. We hope two or three have been born again.
And we fully believe that many others will be, if we are
faithful, and our patrons pray for them as they ought.
This is the great object to which we would direct all
our labors with them.  We have abundant proof that
those who are most enlightened are most likely to be
converted and to bring forth fruits meet for repentance.
And what so well calculated to wake up their minds as
school instruction.  We soon see a difference in the
very faces of those who have been instructed. Instead of
the stupid unmeaning expression of the multitude, their
countenances begin to brighten up with intelligence.
This has repeatedly been remarked upon by those who
have visited our school.
From  letter by G. P. Judd to the Oficers of the
A. B. C. F. M., Honolulu, October 9, 1838:
During several years past the chiefs have punished some
eight or ten persons for what they consider hoomanakii,
or idolatry, and on the recent visit of H. B. M. Sloop
Frigate, Captain R. Eliott, the Captain sent in a written




176


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


remonstrance against punishing any one for his religious
opinions. He, at the same time, allowed that the chiefs
have a right to forbid the Roman Catholic religion being
taught by foreigners or natives. The following copy of
Kinau's letter to him in reply to his remonstrance will
show you how the subject is received by ourselves:
aalekauila, October 1, 1838.
Salutations to you, Captain Eliott:
Your letter respecting the natives who are punished
for their adherence to the Roman Catholic religion is
just received. I am pleased with the manner in which
you have expressed the opposition of your views to our
practice on this subject. The Missionaries have likewise
explained the subject in the same manner that we ought
not to punish our people on account of their religion, but
the state of our country is peculiar. Perhaps I ought to
make known to you some of our transactions which will
explain the reasons of our conduct:
In the time of Liholiho we came to the conclusion that
the worship of images, which we had practiced from time
immemorial, was foolish and we deemed it best to overthrow it. We at once put a stop to the worship of
images and burnt them all with fire, all the temples were
overthrown and all the priests were thrown out of their
places, some with their own consent and some without it.
After that males and females ate together and dwelt under
the same roof. This was the cause of a rebellion on the
part of Kekuaokalani, and others of the party who favor
idolatry, and of his death in battle. Afterwards the
king enacted a law forbidding idolatry, whoever uses such
practices shall be punished the same as for any crime.
So it is at the present time. If any person is found
still reviving idolatrous practices in any part of the country he is immediately brought to punishment. And when
the Roman Catholic Priests came they sought out the ignorant, those who despised learning and those who favored
idolatry, and found them ready to join their party. They




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1838-1840 177
suspended their images about their necks and practiced
foolish things. We sent to turn them back, but their
hearts were rebellious and they would not hear, there
was therefore no alternative, in our opinion, but to punish
them. So we have done with all cases of persons using
idolatrous practices, and such is a law of the land.
You have not informed us what you would advise to
ward off the danger. What shall we do? Shall we return
to idolatry and to the shedding of blood?
I desire to make you fully acquainted with the reasons
of our present course, but cannot owing to the very short
time which remains for you to stay.
Perhaps we will look at this subject by ourselves. Perhaps it will be best to expel the British subject who is
here considered a teacher of that religion. What think
you of that? Perhaps it would be right, perhaps not!
I am yours with esteem,
(Signed) KAAHUMANU II.
From letter by Dr. Seth L. Andrews, Kailua, May
12, 1838:
We have recently received from  Honolulu the first
volume of the Old Testament in the Hawaiian language.
It is eagerly sought for by the people and is received
by them with manifestations of the most heartfelt
pleasure. I would you could see with what joy they take
the sacred volume from our hands, it would cheer your
heart and give you fresh courage amid the trials and
discouragements which press upon you.
From   letter by Edward Bailey, Kohala, Hawaii,
May 25, 18389:
Mrs. Bailey and myself came here on the 26th of
September, 1837, and commenced the Station. Some six
weeks or so after Mr. Bliss came on. We found here
a wild, heathenish people, the most so it was said of any




178


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


that could be found in the Islands. Much had, however,
already been done by the missionaries who had resided
at Waimea, so that we have not often seen the darkest
features of heathenism. It was, however, dark. No one
brought up in an enlightened land who has not been long
conversant with heathen can form any correct idea of
what it is.
From letter by Dr. S. L. Andrews, Kailua, November 9, 1838:
Governor Adams' cotton manufactory is prospering.
Several hundred yards of cloth have been woven, chiefly
twilled, and some of plaid. It is quite fashionable among
the natives and sells for fifty cents per yard. We have
the gratification of seeing many natives clad in Hawaiian
fabrics. Governor Adams is about sending to America
for some additional machinery. Four young men have
been instructed in weaving and are able to go through the
whole process with a little assistance from their teachers.
1839. The following letter from the Mission indicates the remarkable fact that in this year Hawaii was
accounted as nearer to Boston than was Oregon. The
missionaries in Oregon sought and received aid in
printing from Hawaii:
The Oregon Mission has in its correspondence with us
made frequent mention of their want of books, have sent
some manuscripts to be printed here and, at one time,
proposed to send men to learn the printer's art here, at
the islands, and at another time proposed to us to send
native printers from here. At our delegate meeting a
year ago we voted to send them an old printing press
and a few types, also to do printing for them at our
press. It, therefore, became a serious question whether
Mr. Hall had not better go on himself with materials
for printing and teach the art so that it can be carried




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1838-1840      179
on there and thus, also, afford his wife an opportunity
to try the effect of a change of climate. The physicians
very decidedly recommended the voyage. A ship bound
to the Columbia River arrived which offered good accommodations and Mr. Hall and wife embarked on the second
of March, taking with them a small press and types..
There has no unusual sickness prevailed at the islands
during the year till just at its close when a new and
contagious disease was introduced by a vessel from California under command of Captain Barker. It was probably thought the mumps was not a disease of sufficient
importance to demand any caution and, therefore, though
the late Consul Jones was on board no notice was communicated to the authorities of the place, and there being
no quarantine law, the fact of that disease being on board
was not known until one of the men affected with it had
come on shore and, as afterwards proved, communicated
the disease. It spread rapidly not only on Oahu, but was
soon communicated to the other islands and a large portion of the inhabitants, old and young, the strong and
the feeble, became affected with it. Great numbers have
died with the disease, not usually, however, in its active
stages, but as a consequence of it through ignorance, exposure, ill management, etc. In order to counteract these
evils we published in the Kumu Hawaii cautions and
advice which doubtless had some effect, but still the
disease has often proved fatal. Many of the children of
the Mission and some of the adults have had it, but with
them it has not proved serious. The late lamented Kinau
had scarcely recovered from that disorder when she was
attacked with a fit of paralysis, which closed her life on
the sixth day. She has sustained the highest rank in the
nation next to the king and, according to the constitution
of the government, no public act, even of the king, was
considered legal without her consent. Hence when he
was called upon to sign a document of a public nature
it was pretty uniformly his practice first to ask her approbation. Her station, therefore, was one of vast re



I80


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


sponsibility. For this station she had some eminent
qualifications. For stability of character she has left no
equal. She was ever awake to the best interests of the
nation and showed no ordinary skill in managing its concerns, even in the most troublous times. During the
whole period in which she was in authority she set her
face against the prevailing immoralities and gave satisfactory evidence of a readiness to make any personal
sacrifice for the sake of promoting Christian morals and
the general best interests of the nation. Only one week
after the death of Kinau the nation was again bereaved
by the removal of Kaikioewa, an ancient chief, and the
Governor of Kauai.
But perhaps the most important change we have made
is the removal of Mr. Cooke from his former sphere of
labor to that of a boarding school for the young chiefs
of rank, eight in number, the oldest of which is now
ten years old. We have for a length of time perceived
that the young chiefs were growing up more ignorant
than the common people. The chiefs have seemed unwilling to connect themselves with the Seminary or our
other boarding schools and we have ourselves hesitated
in encouraging them to do it. We have feared that their
connection with those schools would exert an unhappy
influence on the other scholars while they themselves
would receive less benefit than they would under other
circumstances. We have also felt that it was a matter
of immense importance that they should stand the highest
in the scale of civilization, that they should know by
their own delightful experience the happiness and the
excellency of a well regulated family. Heretofore the
chiefs have been unwilling to have their children excluded
from a train of attendants, which they considered as
necessary to the very existence of a chief. But now the
chiefs all manifest a readiness to dispense with whatever
the good of their children may require and have assented
to the plan of their being adopted into the family of a
missionary to be trained up entirely by him. They, them



JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1838-1840      181
selves, nominated Mr. Cooke, and the mission have appointed him to that business. The chiefs will defray all
the expense of the establishment except Mr. Cooke's
private support. From this school or family we hope
much. We continue to look with strong and ever increasing interest to our Seminary at Lahainaluna as the
most important of all the means in our possession for
supplying the Sandwich Islanders with a permanent and
educated ministry.
The Girls' School at Wailuku is at present in a very
prosperous state. The number of pupils has been increased
to forty-nine. The blessing of heaven seems to have
rested very signally on that institution. Several have been
hopefully converted and are respectable members of the
church. The labors of Miss Ogden, who was removed to
that place by the delegate meeting of last year, have been
very useful in teaching the girls to sew, knit and spin.
From letter of D. B. Lyman, November 29, 1839:
I have already said the school was opened the first of
October, 1836, with eight boys from this station and that
their number was soon increased to twelve. At the close
of our annual meeting in June, 1837, six of them entered
the mission seminary and new scholars were received
from the several stations on the island, increasing the
number remaining to thirty-one which continued the
same until the next annual meeting when a few falling
out for various reasons and being about to engage in
building, we deemed it not expedient to take a new
class. Consequently our number for the year commencing
with July, 1838, was twenty-eight. In April, 1839, having
erected a dwelling house for my family, and the principal
school building being so far advanced as to render the
scholars then in school as comfortable as in the building
before occupied, we relinquished the accommodations
previously occupied by our family to Brother Wilcox.
I took down the former school buildings to use the material in completing the accommodations on the new site.




18X


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


The following October, the school buildings being nearly
completed, the number of scholars was enlarged to fiftyseven, fifty-five of whom remained to the end of the year.
At the commencement of our present school year (which
is always at the close of our annual meeting) seventeen
of the scholars entered the Seminary at Lahainaluna,
four others were dismissed having acquitted themselves
decently well as scholars for about three years, but for
various reasons were not deemed the most promising candidates for the Seminary. Three of them are employed
as teachers and some of them may yet enter the Seminary
another year. In August a new class was received making the number for the present year fifty-three. The
present buildings for accommodation of the school are
situated on elevated ground in a comparatively retired
spot about a fourth of a mile from the shore, commanding an extensive prospect of Byron's Bay (Hilo Bay), of
the broad blue waters of the Pacific, and the two principal
mountains of Hawaii. They are surrounded by a spacious
yard, enclosed with a stone fence. Some parts of the
yard are designed for the cultivation of melons, bananas,
and other sections for play grounds. The enclosure is
entirely surrounded by the Kalo and sugar cane plantations of the school. I rejoice that you propose to make
more direct efforts than hitherto for raising up a native
ministry and qualified native teachers for these islands.
It should be done with as little delay as possible. I think
this will meet the warm approbation of all reflecting
Hawaiians.
From latter of H. R. Hitchcock, January, 1840:
Our visit at Kailua, Hawaii, was truly satisfactory. My
soul shouted for joy as I sat in the sanctuary there. and
listened to the praises of God, and witnessed the air of
civilization and good order that existed. It was more like
home than anything I have seen in the Pacific. A noble
though not well contrived house, handsomely finished
with galleries and seats, a congregation of say fifteen




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1838-1840 188
hundred or so, all seated in chairs or settees of their own
construction, and the fine singing from those recent barbarous voices all conspired to fill with pleasing emotions
and caused us to exclaim, what hath God wrought! But
a short time back and all that congregation were the
worshippers of demons and the perpetrators of all the
dark and horrible crimes inseparable from idolatry. How
changed! Could it be the very spot where twenty years
ago our dear Brother Thurston and his companion
camped down amid the howlings and the darkness of
savages, then not a ray of light from heaven. 0 could
those who have contributed of their substance for bringing about this change been present, they would think that
the few thousand dollars which have been expended at
that station had been received back again, and more than
a hundredfold.
From   letter by R. Armstrong, Wailuku, July 7,
1840:
My church and several others, agreeably to a resolution of our association, is organized on the Presbyterian
plan. I have three properly ordained elders, one of whom
is the good old Bartimeus who grows higher and higher
as he advances in life. These brethren are a great help
to me in managing the affairs of the church.
The stone meeting house at Haiku has been finished
and dedicated to the worship of God. It is a noble house
and well filled with hearers every Sabbath. The meeting
house here is ready for plastering and we hope to get
into it soon. This will be another good job off our hands.
These two houses together will not cost $500 in cash and
be completed in less than three years from the time the
work was commenced. Will it still be said that natives
have no energy, enterprise, or skill? At the close of the
feast at the dedication of the church at Haiku the king
expressed a desire to make an address, so the calabashes
were shoved aside and the multitude drew up together
until it presented an almost unbroken mass of faces, and




184


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


all wide awake to hear what the great Kamehameha III
had to say to them. His Majesty then addressed them
in a speech of about ten minutes, expressing his extreme
gratification in contemplating the spectacle before him,
he said it was the first thing of the kind he had ever
witnessed and thought it could not but result in good.
He then urged both parents and children to go forward
in the work of education. As to the moral influence of
such a celebration I would say that after observing them
for several years at Wailuku I never heard of any evil
results, but, on the contrary, they make the schools popular, are a very little expense and tend to remove the
impression that religion forbids all innocent enjoyments
and recreations.
July 27, 1840. Rev. D. Baldwin writes from Lahaina:
Hoapili, the Governor, died the third of January last
in the clearest triumphs of faith. His love for Christ
and his cause, his deep and affecting humility and tenderness, shone out during the last month or two of his life
in a manner which none of us had ever expected to see.
I can truly say that none of the good effects which I
anticipated from the revival of last year have failed, I
woald rather say my anticipations have all been exceeded.
I once told you we should have more efficient aid from
church members hereafter and now I can see that the
addresses and other efforts of native Christians to convert sinners are more efficient than before. This arises
in some degrees from deeper feeling in them, but still
more from their better knowledge of what conversion is.
Before, they looked too much at external reformation, the
revival brought them in contact with the heart.
From letter by A. S. Cooke, September 18, 1889:
At our last General Meeting a letter was received from
the king and high chiefs requesting a teacher to be devoted to their children. It being ascertained that both
they and their children would be pleased with us, the
Mission, by a large majority, voted that we should, if




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1838-1840      185
willing, relinquish our other labors and undertake the
(Herculean) task. I mentioned the majority for some few
did not vote for it because it was going to keep a distinction between the chief's children and those of the common people. We saw that the majority of them were
growing up in ignorance and that they did not attend
our common schools. The chiefs said they would furnish
a house and support the children, and it was thought by
some of our number that they would in a year or two
support us also. With all these reasons bearing upon
us we consented (unqualified as we were) to engage in
the undertaking. The design is for us to open school
as soon as a house shall be built of sufficient size. As we
may have occasion to speak of these children to you in
the future I will here give you their names, ages, etc.
Moses Kaikioewa is ten years old, son of Kinau, and
adopted by the governor of Kauai, who is now dead, and
leaves him governor of that island. Lot Kamehameha,
brother of Moses, is about eight years old and is adopted
by Hoapili, the governor of Maui, and will soon fill his
place. Alexander Liholiho is a younger brother still,
about six years of age, and is adopted by the king. Victoria, now a babe about one year old, is a sister of the
three foregoing and will take the place of Kinau. Auhea
now acts in her place. William Lunalilo is the son of
Auhea and is about four years old. Keliiokalani is about
the age of William and is a grandson of Aikanaka. David
Kalakaua is a brother of Keliiokalani and is about two
and a half years old. Jane Loiau is an adopted daughter
of Kauukulaii and about twelve. Bernice Pauahi was
adopted by Kinau and is the daughter of Paki. She is
about seven years old. She and Jane have attended our
school. Lydia Kamakaeha is a sister of Keliiokalani and
David, adopted by Paki, and is of the same age with
Victoria. These are the ten and we are expecting to
teach them all in our own language and for the present
in no other. They are all interesting children and we
begin to feel much interested in them.




186


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


From   letter by A. S. Cooke, Honolulu, July 27,
1840:
The house was completed about the first of April and
we entered it on the eleventh and during an interval
of about four weeks the chiefs furnished rooms for the
children after their own fancy by covering the floors with
fine native mats, a good bedstead, also a bureau, wash
stand, looking glass, etc., for each room. On the fourth
of May seven of the children commenced living with us
and the time for separation between them and the numerous attendants came. The first week was rather a melancholy time with the children and their accustomed train
of servants. For some days we were fearful, as we always
had been, that feeling would get the upper hand of
judgment of all parents and servants concerned. After
a few days it became still and we felt more than ever
that God had undertaken the work and was producing
this great overturning for some wise and benevolent end.
On the eighteenth, just two weeks after, four were added
to the former number. John Ii and his wife, who are
the appointed parents of the infant Victoria, entered this
same day as assistants in the care of all the children. Of
his standing you are probably somewhat acquainted. He
was Kinau's secretary.  He is an almost invaluable assistant as we can trust the children with him and feel
that our instructions will be complied with. There were
none present at the General Meeting, this year, that did
not give us their warm sympathy and prayers. We have
now a writing from the king and Kekauluohi in which they
commit the children to us and requiring    parents and
servants to furnish us with what is requisite for the support of the school.1
1 The above gives evidence of the most remarkable confidence of
the king and the highest chiefs in the benevolence and faithfulness
of this missionary family. Such a tribute of faith in their fellow
men is very seldom won from such a people and speaks volumes
for the Christian character and winsome tact of these rare missionaries.




XVIII
JOURNAL AND LETTERS, 1840-1842t
rF  ~ROM   letter by H. O. Knapp, Honolulu, February 4, 1840:
Mr. Cooke having been appointed teacher for
the children of the chiefs I commenced teaching, immediately after General Meeting, the school that he had
previously taught. The school was small at first, compared with the number of children that ought to attend.
It now numbers from seventy to eighty regular attendants,
exclusive of a number whom I have selected from among
them and brought into a separate school for myself, leaving the former to be taught principally by two native
teachers, whom I employed to assist me. I have a select
school of boys, of from twenty to twenty-five. It is increasing both in numbers and in interest.   Some of
them are those who formerly belonged to Mr. Cooke's
select school. Mrs. Knapp has also a select school of
from thirty-five to forty females. For the first term she
had two schools per day averaging about twenty-five
scholars.
July 27, 1840. Rev. William   Richards writes from
Lahaina: I think that the merchants generally are beginning to feel that they are indebted in no small degree
to the influence of the mission, procuring for them that
perfect security and patronage, and their facilities for doing business which have with but very few exceptions
commanded for the government the respect of visitors
from all nations. It is a common saying among the
business men here: "We shall all regret the day that the
187




188


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


influence of the American Missionaries is destroyed or
materially diminished."
From letter by Rev. Lowell Smith, Honolulu, January 3, 1840:
On the 27th of last August we dedicated our new meeting house to the worship of the living God. It is a very
pretty building, one hundred and twenty-five feet by
sixty feet, has sixteen glass windows and eight large panel
doors, is ceiled over head and will accommodate two thousand people and is well filled on the Sabbath. The building has cost about $2000, the most of which has been
raised by this church and congregation. They are, at
present, in debt only one hundred dollars towards it. It
is very easy speaking in this house, compared with the
old school house and shed where I have preached hundreds
of times during the months of religious excitement.
From letter, in behalf of the Mission, by J. S. Green,
B. W. Parker, and S. Dibble, Honolulu, June 1, 1840:
Rev. Charles McDonald, missionary teacher at Lahaina,
on Maui, who had long been in declining health, was
removed by death, September 7th, leaving an afflicted
widow and two orphan children. We should do violence
to our feelings did we not say that in the death of Mr.
McDonald the mission has sustained a severe loss.
Though he was cut down in the morning of his days,
though the term of his missionary life was short, being
less than two and a half years, and though, on account
of ill health, he was able to perform a comparatively
small amount of missionary labor, yet he did what he
could and gave promise of enlarged usefulness.
Soon after our last General Meeting Mrs. Angeline L.
Tenny Castle began to decline and though the best medical attention has been bestowed disease is not arrested.
Though not entirely confined to her couch, she has no
expectation of recovery. Her house she is setting in




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1840-1842      189
order. She is calm as the summer's evening and is waiting patiently and joyfully the coming of her Lord.
And now that Hoapili is gone his memory is sweet.
Those who saw and conversed with him while he was
waiting the summons of death were much affected with
his deportment. He seemed well nigh to have shaken
off what in health seemed like listlessness. He was wakeful and deeply interested in the prospect of the change
which awaited him. His humility was apparently deep.
He seemed to be emptied of self, to be lowly in his own
eyes. He cast himself with much confidence on Christ.
His attachment to the house, the word, and the ordinances
of God were marked. He was carried to the house of
God only ten days before his death, although he had the
dropsy and was unable to sit up long at a time. The
word of God and prayer seemed to be his delight and
from these he sought solace till he was insensible to
everything earthly. As he lay dying.he gave a charge
concerning his bones, strictly prohibiting wailing on the
occasion of his death, and desired that his grave might be
a humble one near the sleeping place of Mr. McDonald.
We are happy to add that these injunctions were complied with to the letter. We bless God for His grace.
His distinguishing mercy to this once dark hearted and
polluted chieftain. Surely may we say of the Gospel of
Christ, "It is the wisdom of God unto salvation to every
one that believeth."
We believe that in the midst of trials and temptations
the church has been making advances. Many of its members are growing in knowledge and are becoming rooted
and grounded in truth. Every year's experience convinces
us more and more that the Lord has a true people to
serve him in these islands and that this number is increasing from year to year, and we have abundant encouragement to labor and pray that Zion here may advance
and increase till she shall appear in all her beauty and
comeliness. The Holy Spirit has visited some of our
churches the past year in a special manner, though not




190


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


in so powerful a manner as two years since. One new
church has been organized the past year at Nawilwili on
Kauai and Dr. Lafon installed pastor, making in all
nineteen churches in these islands, connected with the
Board.
Although Mr. Bailey was added to the number of
teachers and Mr. Clark restored in the autumn of last
year, the Seminary at Lahainaluna has not yet recovered
from the effects of neglect. At the close of the year there
were fifty pupils in the Seminary. Of these fourteen have
finished their regular course. Mr. Dibble having returned,
will resume his labors in the Seminary. Another class
is about to enter and we cherish the hope that the labors
of former years will be resumed and carried forward with
efficiency and success.
The female Seminary at Wailuku, Maui, is in a prosperous condition. There are connected with it fifty-four
pupils.
The Boarding School for Boys at Hilo, under the care
of Mr. and Mrs. Lyman, numbered at the close of the year
fifty-five pupils. Of these twenty-five are members of
the church. Twenty from this school are now desirous
of entering the Seminary at Lahainaluna. The boys have
made commendable progress in their studies, are industrious, wakeful, and desirous of making further improvement. We cherish great hope of the school. It is proper
to remark that the pupils are from the Island of Hawaii
with a single exception. At Waialua, Oahu, Mr. Locke
has commenced a self-supporting and manual labor school,
and though it is in the incipient stages, something has
been done and we hope that success may crown his efforts.
A ground of hope for the nation is the influence of
Mr. Richards as the instructor of the king and chiefs.
A new code of laws has been framed and they are now
being carried into execution. These are an improvement
on their former laws, if immemorial custom and usage
can be called law. We earnestly pray that our hopes of
the ultimate prosperity and happiness of the Hawaiian




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1840-1842      191
nation may not be disappointed. What we can we shall
do to save the nation.
THE EDUCATION OF MISSIONARIES' CHILDEN
This subject came up at an early stage of business and
occupied no small share of our attention. The brethren
are not entirely agreed on this subject. Some are of the
opinion that children can be wholly educated at these islands. They may be retained here till they shall be prepared to enter academies, colleges, or boarding schools,
when they will need to go to the fatherland. Others think
that our children may be trained at the islands and retained, too, both safely and profitably. They are anxious,
therefore, that there should be a central seminary, well
endowed and vigorously sustained, where the children of
the mission may be congregated and educated. All the
brethren are willing that an experiment should be made
at Punahou, on Oahu.
We have reluctantly, yet on the whole cheerfully, recommended that Brother and Sister Bingham make a visit to
the United States. They go, if God so order it, with our
warmest approbation and sympathy. Receive them as beloved and approved laborers in this field of missionary toil,
and give them your confidence and aid. The committee to
supply Mr. Bingham's pulpit during his absence on his
contemplated visit to the United States, have written to
Mr. Armstrong requesting him to come from Wailuku,
Maui, for that purpose. They have also written to Mr.
Bailey to assist in the labors of the station at Wailuku.
From letter of the Mission of June, 1841:
We may suppose that many of our children will remain permanently in this their native land and that
through their influence good results may yet flow from
the school we have resolved to establish. The Lord has
graciously sent us instructors to take charge of the school
just at the time they were needed, and by the indications




192


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


of his providence encourages us to go forward. We have
resolved that the school be located at Punahou, a verdant
spot of ground a few miles distant from Honolulu, and
we have appointed Mr. and Mrs. Dole, aided by Miss M.
M. Smith, to take charge of the institution. We hope
during the present year to erect the necessary buildings
and get the school in full and successful operation.
Extract from Report, from 1840 to 1841, by G. P.
Judd:
Kapiolani, of whose holy life and estimable character
I need not speak, died on the 6th of May under circumstances peculiarly affecting. She came to Honolulu about
the 20th of March, by the advice of Dr. Andrews her
physician, to be operated on for a cancer of the breast.
She bore the operation, which was severe, without manifesting the least symptom of pain. So vivid was her sense
of the Divine presence that she seemed to be almost unconscious of what she was suffering. She was ready to
die and equally ready to live if that were the will of
God. About six weeks after the operation, deeming my
attendance no longer necessary, I gave her permission to
visit Maui as soon as she could procure a passage. In
preparation for leaving she took a long walk in the heat
of the day, which brought on a pain in the side. Erysipelas now made its appearance which after two or three
days affected the brain and she sunk away into palsy
and death.
While at the volcano of Kilauea I narrowly escaped
death through the merciful interposition of Providence.
Let down by the hands of a native I had descended six
or eight feet of the brim of a cooled caldron, twentyeight feet deep and two hundred feet wide, and crept
along under a ledge where I was crouched down on my
feet collecting Peles hair, when the falling of a few stones
warned me that an eruption was about to take place and
the next instant the bottom opened fifty feet from me like
an immense bubble eight or ten feet in diameter and




A Lake of Molten Lava, as seen a fsew years since at the V olcano of Kilauea, Haswaii








JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1840-1842           193
with a tremendous noise projected a column of lava to a
height far above the bank of the margin of the caldron.
The color of this jet was of the most perfect crimson
and the heat and glare too great for the eye to look on.
I raised myself to an erect posture, turned my face to the
wall with my hands upon a projecting ledge above, which
I found it impossible to mount without assistance nor
could I resume my former position and return the way
I came on account of the intense heat. Here I stood
perfectly helpless. God heard my prayer. When I had
given up all and resigned myself into his hands, Kalama
appeared on the bank, put out his hand, seized one of
mine which enabled me, by an extraordinary effort, to
throw myself out. It seems at the moment of the eruption the whole of the five natives who were with me ran
of, but Kalama more bold than the rest bethought himself of me and turned back only just in season for my
rescue, for just as he approached the brink the accumulated flood having filled the inequalities of the bottom
flowed directly under my feet. As I went over the ledge
I felt that I was burnt although, as it proved, but slightly,
on each elbow and one wrist. Kalama's face and ear was
blistered by the heat radiated from below.
From letter by P. J. Gulick, Koloa, Kauai, October
3, 1840:
Having deemed it a duty to send our oldest son, Luther
Halsey, to the United States and he having yesterday
embarked in the William Penn, Captain Bodfish, of Falmouth, it seems necessary that I say a few words to you
on that subject. So far as the Captain and officers are
concerned the passage is gratuitous. But as they cannot
speak for the owners there may be some expense attending
his voyage and he will probably need some aid in order
to reach my brother William at Forked River, Monmouth
County, New Jersey. If he should, you will be duly
informed by Brother Tinker, under whose care he goes,
and whose family accompanies him. If I could be so




194


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


situated as to support myself and family entirely without
interrupting my labors as a missionary and at the same
time be free to pursue such measures as I might prefer
in regard to my children and other affairs of importance,
this would be most agreeable to my feelings. Should
any imagine that these sentiments are the offspring of
a desire to lay up property for my children, I reply: I
desire nothing earthly for them except a good education.
Above all, I desire that they may all become faithful and
devoted missionaries.
Extracts from  Journal of J. P. Gulick, June 28,
1841:
While conversing with a family in the narrow valley
of Lawai, eastward from Koloa, an aged female, having
seen me, came from the opposite side of the valley bringing a pig which she begged me to accept. Knowing she
was rather indigent I declined receiving it and accompanied her to her hut. I there found that her husband
had been a cripple for years and not able to walk. And
seldom if ever, have I seen a more destitute hovel, house
it could not be called. It was about ten feet long, eight
wide, and six high at the peak of the roof. The roof
was so flat and so poorly covered with grass and leaves
that it seemed but an apology for shelter. A few tattered and half-rotten mats were their bed and was all,
save a little grass, which kept them from contact with the
earth. Some old calabashes were their only furniture.
This poor woman, in her deep poverty with a crippled
husband depending chiefly upon her and with scarcely
a change of raiment for herself, appears to have offered
me the richest present she could possibly make. Her conduct cannot be attributed to a desire to get into the church
for she was already a member. Nor is it probable that
she was influenced by a hope of receiving a valuable return, for, not knowing distinctly her situation, I had
never assisted her in the least.  She seemed to me to
verify the text: "God hath chosen the poor of this world




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1840-1842 195
rich in faith." I think she came as near to the example
of the widow we read of in the Gospel who cast her two
mites into the Lord's treasury, as any person I ever knew.
Feeling that she had received spiritual benefit through
my agency, she appeared to esteem it a small thing that
she should deny herself to bestow a temporal favor. On
my way home I called to see a blind man now sick and
who has often been led by his daughter to my house for
religious conversation. When seated beside him he took
my hand very affectionately and held it while I conversed
with him. He talked with animation. Spoke of himself
as a lost sinner. Said his hope was in the Saviour to
whom I had pointed him and that there he constantly
rested. After I had prayed with him he took my hand
again. Said he had thought much of me since I sent
him my aloha (which was a few days previous) and that
he had been very anxious to see me. When I spoke of
going he clasped my hand more firmly, saying: "I hold
you fast." Then lifted up his voice and wept like a little
child. He seemed to be overjoyed that I had called to
converse with him. It was a touching sight to see a
venerable, gray-headed man, a great-grandfather, so overcome with joy or gratitude for a favor, as he esteemed
it, from a fellow sinner.
September 12. The blind man above mentioned and
twenty-six others were received to the church and two
excommunicated members were restored.
November 21, 1841. Have become somewhat acquainted
with Mr. Damon and am much pleased with him, both
in the pulpit and out of it. Have never before seen such
large audiences in the Seamen's Chapel and they seem to
listen with interest,
Extract from letter by Abner Wilcox, Hilo, March
25, 1841:
The United States Ship Vincennes, of the Exploring
Squadron, recently visited Hilo. She anchored here the




196


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


ninth of December and sailed on the fifth instant, after
a stay of about three months. Commodore Wilkes spent
several weeks on Mauna Loa in making observations with
his pendulum and other instruments, which were carried
on to the mountain by natives. I have written you in
times past and sometimes when the pulse of the school
was so low that it was from a sense of duty rather than
otherwise. But now, when it beats more vigorously and
hope revives, it affords pleasure to write respecting the
schools. I think I may say there has been a very manifest improvement in our schools generally ever since the
time when the king and chiefs gave a helping hand by
enacting laws for the benefit of education.
From letter by Marc Ives, Kealakekua, May, 1841:
Mrs. Ives from severe fatigue was taken sick which
resulted in continued fever. For nine weeks she was
unable to raise her head in bed. Our little ones were
carried to the family of Brother Forbes, which, together
with their own, made a family of six children. This,
together with the adults and attentions to the sick served
much to reduce Sister Forbes' health. Brother Thurston
showed his happy face at the commencement of our afflictions and watched with Mrs. Ives two nights in succession. Dr. Andrews was here also as soon as the health
of his family would admit and unremittingly gave his
days and his nights to the care of the sick. Brother
Lyons and wife rendered us their assistance for two weeks.
I have spent my Sabbaths at Kealia about five miles
from this place, where our house of worship is located,
which holds from five to six hundred. My only means
of getting to this place is either to go in a canoe so
narrow that I can but just squeeze myself down into it,
so that I am subject constantly to be wet with water, or
else walk by land over a path composed of huge uneven
rocks with bits of sharp pointed lava.




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1840-1842           197
From letter by Rev. C. Forbes, regarding the Church
Building at Kealakekcua, Hawaii, July 22, 1841:
In the first place, every stone had to be carried by the
church members on their shoulders about an eighth of
a mile to the building. This was gratuitous labor. Our
lime had then to be obtained in the following manner:
The coral was taken from the sea and as there are no
reefs here it was procured at the bottom in from ten to
twenty feet of water by diving down, detaching a piece
and, if large, ascending to take breath, then descending
again with a rope which they made fast and drew up
the mass. In this way the canoe was laden and then
rowed ashore and the coral piled on the beach. Thus all
the limestone was procured. About thirty cubic fathoms
in all. It had then to be burned and for this purpose
they had to procure more than forty cords of wood, every
stick of which was carried from the mountain (from one
to two miles) on the shoulders of the church members.
After the wood was got and the lime burned it still had
to be taken from the beach up to the building, about a
quarter of a mile. This was done by the women in
calabashes, each one filling her calabash with lime and
carrying it on her shoulder to the building, in all about
seven hundred barrels of lime. In like manner they carried fully as much sand and about an equal amount of
water, making in all about two thousand barrels of sand,
lime, and water carried solely by the women in calabashes.
This labor of the female church members was entirely
gratuitous besides many contributions in other ways.
Then the plates, beams, sills, rafters, and posts, which
support the work overhead, joists, lath, etc., were still to
be got. This fell on the men, of course, and as we had
no cattle to drag large sticks (such animals are not owned
by any person who is a member of my church), the male
church members divided themselves off into companies,
according to the size of the stick to be dragged down,
and taking with them ropes each company selected their




198


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


stick going up to the mountain by daylight. The posts
and beams required from forty to sixty men for each
stick, generally they got down the stick by dark after
much toil over beds of lava and ravines, the distance was
from six to ten miles. In this way all our timbers were
obtained. Sometimes I went with them myself to encourage them and found that by the time we reached
the place where the timbers were, we had performed quite
a fatiguing morning journey, besides being benumbed with
cold, being thoroughly wet with the dew on the fern and
underwood through which we had to make our way.
Messrs. John D. Paris and W. H. Rice and their
wives were sent by the officers of the American Board
as missionaries to Oregon, by the ship Gloucester,
round Cape Horn to Honolulu, this being at that date
the shortest and safest route from Boston to Oregon
then known to the commercial world. Messrs. D. Dole
and Elias Bond were fellow passengers with Messrs.
Paris and Rice on the Gloucester, sent as missionaries
to Hawaii.
From letter by C. Forbes, August 17, 1842:
Brothers Paris and Rice of the Oregon Mission were
led by communications from that Mission to doubt the
propriety of proceeding till further light might dawn
on their case. Therefore, in accordance with their desire,
this mission appointed them both to fields of labor for
the time being. Brother Paris was to enter this field
and labor for Kau, which is a district almost enclosed
by mountains and the sea, and contains over four thousand souls. This was a great relief to us at this station
for the church members in Kau were numerous and
hundreds were anxious for instructions while we pressed
with labors in Kona could only make occasional visits




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1840-1842      199
to Eau and pass through, preaching to the crowds who
were eager to hear the word of God. At the time Mr.
Paris went there, there were about three hundred church
members, besides a large numbr of inquirers. He has
now acquired the language so as to preach very intelligently and takes the entire management of the church
and labor of that field. The attachment of the natives
to him is daily increasing and his influence manifested
by the eagerness with which they treasure up his instructions. Thus he labors, not knowing but the first news
from the committee will be a decision that he ought to
leave that interesting and important field and proceed
to Oregon. The question has often occurred to me within
two months, is it possible for me to sustain the labors
of this station many years? A negative answer is all I
can find ground for. I feel the encroachment of debility
and should act unwisely to conceal it from either myself
or you. There are two courses for you to pursue in
reference to your missionaries, particularly in this field.
First, leave us to sustain a burden that will inevitably
sink us prematurely to the grave (for such is the position
of affairs here that the work must be done, or soon there
will be no use attempting it). The second is, furnish
immediately the requisite number of laborers to sustain
the toil. For this latter (which I know is your desire)
there ought at least to be two able men in Kau and one
in Kapalilua.
From   letter by J. D. Paris, Honolulu, July 30,
1841:
I would just remark that this Mission is desirous to
have us remain here permanently and if the Board think
proper to alter the field of our destination we think,
as things are, and are likely to be for some time to come,
we would on the whole prefer being connected with this
Mission.




200


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


From   letter by A. Bishop, Ewa, Oahu, July 8,
1841:
Since the triumph of the French over the Sandwich
Islands Government in July, 1839, the moral aspect of
things at the islands has been deepening with gloom.
The repeal of the law forbidding the importation of
alcohol into the kingdom effected by the French treaty
was followed by a large importation and sale of the article
by the French Consul and others. The consequence was
disastrous. The former quiet town of Honolulu became
a scene of riot and noise, and the resort of the vicious.
Many members of our church, also, were drawn into the
vortex and were cut off. The example so boldly set at
the metropolis, at length began to spread to other parts
of the island. Matters grew, for a time, worse and worse.
Our congregations divided, the love of Christians waxed
cold, and with the introduction of intoxicating drinks, the
other concomitant vices of heathenism were also revived.
In the month of October, when this state of things had
arisen to its height, the king made this island a visit
from Maui. The state of things was duly represented
to him and supported by Commodore Wilkes, his officers
and the American Consul, he published a law prohibiting
his subjects the making and using of intoxicating drinks
and the evil has, in a good measure, been arrested and
order and quiet nearly restored. In the districts out of
Honolulu drunkenness has been entirely stopped. But
the evil it enacted is still felt in the depravity of mind
it produced, and the calamities it brought upon some of
our churches.
From letter by E. W. Clark, Lahainaluna, November
20, 1841:
Our present number of pupils is one hundred. A class
of about thirty left in April after spending four years
in the institution, and are now mostly employed as school
teachers.




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1840-1842 201
From letter by A. Thurston, from Kailua, on hearing of the death of his daughter Lucy in America,
December 22, 1841:
Many tears have fallen on reading the account of the
deceased loved one. But I have felt no disposition to
complain of the allotment of Providence with me or mine.
The Lord has done right. Instead, therefore, of complaining I would rather rejoice and praise the Lord, that he
gave us such a child and that she was with us seventeen
eventful years; that she was carried across the ocean in
safety and landed on the shores of our fathers, spent a
few days there giving evidence of her Christian discipleship and passed on to her heavenly mansion.
From letter by A. Thurston, Kailua, May 1, 1843:
The return of Mrs. Thurston with our two children,
Thomas and Mary, all in good health is a matter of
devout gratitude to the Father of all our mercies. He
has protected them across the mighty waters, and on the
evening of the twenty-fourth of October, 1842, they arrived at Kailua.
From  letter by E. Johnson, Waioli, Kauai, February 18, 1841:
On the death of our aged Governor Kaikioewa the laws
that he had framed for the good of the schools were
thought by the people to be dead likewise, and the children
greatly diminished in all our schools. But I rejoice to
say that the king has framed a code of laws for the benefit
of the children and youths of his kingdom. The laws
are so framed that no child between the ages of four
to fourteen can be absent from school, and all between
fourteen and eighteen, who desire it, can attend school
without being called to the work of the king or head man.




202


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


From letter by L. Lyons, September, 15, 1841:
I would speak of progress in mental and written arithmetic. There was a time when I could not have been
induced to believe that native children could make such
proficiency in these branches under native instructors.
The advances made during the last year have altogether
exceeded my highest expectations.
One scene of peculiar interest I must not pass unnoticed.
A company of candidates for the church stood before
me, among them were the gray-headed, the totally blind,
the deaf and dumb, and the child of ten or twelve years
of age. They had been examined together and were baptized together and sat down together at the table of the
Lord. Some of the number had travelled six or seven
hours, over giddy precipices and deep ravines, to reach
the place where the missionary was laboring. But why
receive to the church the deaf and dumb man, because
from all the evidence that could be gathered from signs
and general conduct we regarded him as a Christian. He
had forsaken sinful practices, was often found in the
attitude of prayer, struggling, apparently, to give vent to
his feelings in an audible voice, but poor man! this
privilege was not his. Yet, doubtless, his language was
intelligible to the ear of God. Whenever there was a
religious meeting he was usually present and appeared
as devoted and interested as any of the worshippers.
Whenever he discovered, what he doubtless considered as
sinful and improper conduct in others, he manifested by
signs and gestures his displeasure. As he indicated the
desire to come into the church, duty seemed to say, open
the door and allow the poor man to enter. "For he
maketh the deaf to hear and the dumb to speak." "The
eyes of the blind shall be opened and the ears of the deaf
shall be unstopped, then shall the lame man leap as the
hart, and' the tongue of the dumb sing; for in the wilderness shall waters break out, and streams in the desert?"
A large stone edifice whose extension of stately walls




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1840-1842          203
and two large panel doors and smiling windows, presents
an imposing form and whose interior, with the addition
of a boarded floor and well arranged seats and neat simple
pulpit, furnishes new attractions to the native worshipper. There the long toiling missionary, surrounded with
the churchgoing throng, may stand, cast his eye around
and, while he contrasts the present with the past, he is
constrained to exclaim: "Behold what God has wrought,"
what the Gospel has accomplished on the spot where once
stood the altars and the temples of a bloody idolatry.
From letter by Dr. Baldwin to Mr. Armstrong, from
Lahaina, January 16, 1842:
Hoapili wahine had but a whispering voice all day.
She retained her reason and showed out the genuine
disciple of Jesus to the last. When shall her place in
Zion be made good? She was at meeting all day last
Sabbath and again on Wednesday-today, in the upper
Sanctuary.
From Report of Mission Seminary at Lahainaluna,
May, 1842:
The whole number now living, who have been members
of the Seminary and have graduated, is one hundred and
fifty. Of these one hundred and five are usefully employed as teachers. Officers of government thirty-five, a
few of these also teach. In other useful employments,
seven. Doing nothing or worse, eleven. Of the above,
seventy-three are church members in regular standing.
Nine are Deacons or Elders. In conclusion, the teachers
would say that from past experience they are fully satisfied of two things: First, that the Seminary is among
the most important instrumentalities employed by the
Mission for the elevation and salvation of the people as
a nation and as individuals; and, Second, that it cannot
be carried on efficiently without a strong company of
patient and self-denying teachers.




XIX


JOURNALS AND        LETTERS, 1842-1847
FR    ROM letter by A. S. Cooke, Honolulu:
Mrs. Cooke, in June last, 1842, soon after
our return from Maui, was taken ill with
ophthalmy and, for a time, we were fearful she would
lose sight of both her eyes. The right eye was restored
in about four weeks, but the left eye had an ulcer which
broke and left an opaque substance over the sight rendering it almost blind. The chiefs, parents of the children
with us, have appeared to place very implicit confidence
in our management, never seeking to alter our plans, nor
finding fault with what we do. This was evidenced to
us by the manner they treated us while on a visit to
Maui in April and May last. It was the season of the
king and nobles meeting together to enact laws, and as
all would be together it was desirable to have all their
children with them. They sent a vessel on purpose for
us and we all went, teachers, assistants, and scholars.
The vessel was entirely at our control. When we reached
Lahaina the Premier and some of the chiefs came out
with a double canoe and took us on shore. After reaching
the house they prepared a sumptuous breakfast for us
in English style; they themselves serving as stewards
and waiters, except the king and premier who sat with
us. After breakfast they conducted us to a large twostory stone house built and formerly occupied by Hoapili.
Here we were to live by ourselves just as we did at our
home in Honolulu. I never saw a band of brothers and
sisters, especially so large a band, that had so few difficulties among themselves as these children,




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1842-1847'          205
Lahaina, July 18, 1842, Dr. Baldwin writes:
One of the most signal and unexpected interpositions
of Providence has occurred the present year, which led
the king and all the high chiefs to join the Temperance
Society. That put a new face upon all things around
us. It cut off in a day nine-tenths of the power which
unprincipled foreigners had before possessed over the king
and over the kingdom. I will give you a translation of
the pledge signed on that day, April 26, 1842, by thirteen
chiefs, by their children, members of Mr. Cooke's school,
and, since, by about fifteen hundred of the people of
different grades at this place. It is as follows:
"WE, the signers of this Pledge, unite ourselves in a
Society for the purpose of putting an end to the use of
intoxicating liquors in the Sandwich Islands. Therefore
we Pledge ourselves before God and men to forsake entirely the use of all intoxicating drinks. We will neither
drink distilled liquors or wine, nor anything that intoxicates. We will not drink in imitation of others, nor to
the health of others, nor for pleasure. We will not buy
or sell or give to others intoxicating drinks, nor will we
do anything opposed to the spirit of this Pledge, but will
do all in our power, and which is proper for us to do, to
put an end to the use of intoxicating drinks among all
men."
The officers of the Society, chosen at a subsequent meeting, were:
KAMEHAMEHA III (the King)                   President
D. BALDWIN                                  Secretary
PAKI
JOHN YOING
JOANE II         Executive Committee
D. MALO
A. MoKu




206


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


From letter by W. P. Alexander, Kauai, September
8, 1842:
I was surprised to find no allusion in your letter to
our school at Punahou for our children, a school in whose
prosperity I feel the deepest interest, for without it the
attention which many of us must bestow on our rising
families must materially cripple our missionary labors.
I hope the Board will aid us in cherishing that institution that it may become a blessing to our children, and
a joy to our hearts.
From letter by A. B. Smith, Waialua, October 11,
1842:
In the providence of God this station has been our
place of residence for four months past, and it devolves
on me at this time to communicate to you the sad intelligence that one of our number at this station is no
more in the land of the living. Yesterday we committed
to the silent grave the remains of our beloved sister, Mrs.
Locke. Her labors here are finished and she has gone to
receive her reward on high.
From letter written on behalf of the Mission by A.
Bishop, B. W. Parker, and R. Armstrong, Honolulu,
June 1, 1842:
To us all the idea of such a measure as the return to
the fatherland is always a dernier resort, and more paieiful than was the pang of bidding adieu to country and
kindred. But we see no other course which in certain
cases can be substituted for return to our native land.
During the past year there have been three deaths among
the children of the Mission. On the 15th of November
last, Henry, the only son and eldest child of Mr. Locke
at Waialua, was drowned in the river in front of his
house. He was not missed for some time and when found
the spark of life had fled. On the 30th of April the




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1842-1847 207
infant son and only child of Mr. and Mrs. Lowell Smith
was removed by dysentery now prevalent among children.
And within these few days now passed, the infant daughter
of Dr. Andrews was seized with the same disorder and
expired in the arms of its afflicted parents.
The merchants of these islands are receiving monthly
advices from  their American correspondents through
New York, Vera Cruz, and Mazatlan, which enables
them to obtain answers to their letters in the space of
a few months, while it takes us a year and a half or
two years from the time of our General Meetings in May
to get returns respecting our most important transactions. Since our last Annual Meeting Mr. Lorrin Andrews of the Seminary and Dr. Judd have left the service
of the Board though the latter engaged to act as physician
to the mission families for a season. Mr. Green also
announces to the mission that he has forwarded a request
for dismission from his services to the Board and expects
his connection with us will be dissolved in the course of
the present year. These changes taking place have embarrassed our operations and leaves our prospects in uncertainty. The renewed prostrations of health in the
instances of Messrs. Clark and Dibble and the retirement
of Mr. Andrews from the post he has so long occupied
has thrown the Seminary into a state bordering upon
suspension: an event which would inevitably have taken
place, if we had not succeeded in obtaining a suitable
man to remove to that institution. Mr. Emerson, of
Waialua, though at the sacrifice of much feeling on his
part, has cheerfully yielded to the invitation of the mission to remove to the Seminary. This arrangement will
enable the business of the institution to move on, but
will need a secular man to be placed there as soon as
one can be obtained as none of our present number can
be spared for that purpose. The subject of the circular
for raising up a native ministry has been before us and
meets with a response from all our hearts. It revives
a hope which we have long cherished as the means of




208


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


perpetuating the institution of religion, of which we are
now laying the foundations. Had we, at this moment,
fifty well trained and pious men ready to send forth as
ministers of the Gospel there would be ample room for
their labors in places more or less remote from our
several stations where missionary posts are impracticable.
We have long felt, likewise, that a native ministry must
sooner or later take the place of foreign missionaries and
be supported by the people, whenever the means of a
foreign support to us shall be withdrawn. Therefore it
was resolved that while suitable native candidates for the
Gospel Ministry are so few, and those most promising in
our churches are imperiously needed on their prospective
islands, it be recommended to the brethren of each island
to confer together on this subject and to enter upon the
work as individuals, or designate one of their number to
devote such a portion of his time as he and they might
deem proper to a class in theology and, also, to make
all such arrangements as may be necessary to carry this
suggestion into effect.
From letter by G. P. Judd, Honolulu, June 11, 1842:
On the 19th of last April, or thereabouts, I wrote you
as I was about to visit Lahaina at the request of the
king. On my arrival there I found that the minds of
the chiefs were prepared to press upon me the importance
of my engaging at once in their service and in order to
my becoming more familiar with the details of their
business it was necessary for me to attend the daily sessions of their legislature. This, of course, involved me
in their affairs more than is consistent for a Missionary
of the Board, and by the advice of Mr. Richards I accepted two appointments without consulting with the
brethren.
The following letter from Mr. Richards was written
while he and the chief Haalilio were on a mission to
America and Europe seeking from the leading powers




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1842-1847     209
recognition of the independence of Hawaii, then the
smallest nation on earth:
East Hampton, Massachusetts, January 7, 1843.
I arrived here on Wednesday night having spent one
day with my daughter in Brooklyn. The other four of
my children are with me here. These few days will be
numbered among the happiest of my life. I now know
that there is a joy, even this side of heaven, which far
exceeds anticipation and even the highest powers of conception. I hope to be profited during my whole life by
this meeting. God has been better to me than all my
hopes. I will praise Him for the past and my heart shall
trust in Him for time to come.
From letter by William Richards, London, April 3,
1843:
We addressed Lord Aberdeen an official letter, setting
forth the reasons for our request, similar to the letter
addressed to Daniel Webster. We then went to Paris,
taking letters from the best sources to Mr. Guisot. We
obtained easy access to him and laid before him a
memorandum of the object of our Embassy, viz.: Nullification of treaties, reasons briefly stated; Acknowledgment of Independence; Formation of a New Treaty and
removal of present Consul. He at once declared positively and strongly that Brandy should no longer be
forced upon us and that our Independence should be
acknowledged. He said the other points he would consider, and on our return from London he would give us
an opportunity to confirm our statement and throw light
on the subject and would endeavor to do that which is
right in the case. We returned much encouraged, feeling
that God prospered us. The news of the taking of
Tahiti, reached Paris the same day we did, and had a
very great tendency to forward our object. We returned
to London, having spent only four days in Paris. We
lost no time in communicating to Lord Aberdeen the result




Q10


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


of our visit to France, and day before yesterday we received his answer announcing the determination of the
British Government to acknowledge the Independence of
the Islands. We have also visited Belgium, and have had
an interview with King Leopold, and he will follow the
rest. You will not fail to discover the hand of God in
all these movements, they are not the movements of men.
They look to me like the crowning acts of that Divine
benevolence which has been performing such a series of
wonders for the salvation of Hawaii. Sir George Simpson
has been of invaluable benefit to us. No zeal, or diligence,
or disinterestedness could have excelled that which he
has manifested for the last six weeks. He has secured
my gratitude and my affection and is worthy of the everlasting gratitude of Hawaii.
From letter by W. P. Alexander, Honolulu, January
19, 1843:
When visiting at Waialua I was much interested in
the school and plantation of Mr. Locke. The order and
system with which everything is managed remind one of
a neat New England farm. The boys surpass all Hawaiians I have seen in order and industry. Every one
knows his place and works as though his task was a
pleasure. I also met them several times in the school
room and was pleased to find they had made so much
progress in their studies. I think the boys are receiving
that moral, intellectual, and physical culture adapted to
fit them for eminent usefulness in the nation.
From letter by J. W. Smith, Koloa, April 6, 1843:
You have doubtless heard through Mr. Chamberlain
of our safe arrival at Honolulu on the 22d of September,
one hundred and forty-two days after leaving Boston.
On the 4th of November I came to this place accompanied with Mrs. Smith, the brethren having appointed
me to this station at their last General Meeting. We




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1842-1847     211
took possession of the house formerly occupied by Dr.
Lafon and felt truly thankful that we had not, as many
of our brethren have had, the care and perplexity of
building a house to live in before we could be comfortable.
Indeed, when we look upon the period which has elapsed
since we left our native land, we feel that the Lord hath
been with us and that mercy and goodness have followed
us continually. Since I arrived at this place I have been
employed in administering to the sick and in studying
the Hawaiian language and, recently, I have spent a
part of my time in visiting the native schools. My first
impression in relation to matters and things at the islands
were very pleasant. Honolulu presents an appearance of
civilization much beyond my expectations. The brethren
of the mission live in circumstances of comparative comfort, though most of them look rather pale and feeble,
many of the ladies of the mission are invalids. The
results of missionary labor are most conspicuous on the
Sabbath. I think no Christian could enter the great
church at Honolulu on the Sabbath and see so large a
congregation, once heathen, now devoutly worshipping the
Lord of Hosts, and not be deeply affected at the sight.
From letter by E. Bond, Kohala, March 16, 1843:
We have been trying to labor as God has given us
strength and He in many ways has blessed us with good
health and spirits from the first. Since the first commencement of my labors here I have made it a point to
visit every part of the field at least four times a year,
in each tour meeting with the church members and all
others disposed to attend the meetings in their respective
neighborhoods held in the school houses, thirty-three in
number. Seven or eight days is the amount of time necessary to accomplish a complete tour of the field; and
I need hardly say, after all you have heard of the travelling in these islands, that the labor of performing these
tours is exceedingly fatiguing to the flesh, and hardly
less so to the spirit, in consequence of the great amount




212       THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
and variety of instruction to be given to the thousands
the missionary meets in his progress. I ought to have
spoken of the monthly contributions of this church to
benevolent objects. The amount for the past mission
year has been about $230. My own school for teachers,
commenced in November, 1841, has continued through
the year, on Wednesday and Saturday of each week, with
some considerable benefit, I trust, to the cause of education among us. A boarding school for boys was commenced in September last. Its object is twofold: first,
to prepare boys for the school at Hilo and, second, to
prepare some teachers for our own immediate wants. This
school is held five days per week, two sessions per day,
except Wednesday. I have admitted fourteen of the best
boys, the most promising I could find in the field, all of
whom remain continually under my immediate care and
inspection. During the past year at least twenty-three
substantial stone school houses have either been completed, or are now in progress of erection, instead of the
ordinary grass houses, so soon destroyed by the children.
Our situation is still very pleasant to us. We have no
spot on the wide earth for which we would willingly exchange it, unless called to do so by the providence of
God.
From  letter by J. D. Paris, Kau, April 28, 1843:
On one of my last tours an old man, whose name is Lazarus, who looks as if he could not walk a mile, followed me
through the whole length of Kau, travelling not less than
one hundred and twenty miles. I endeavored to persuade
him to return home after he had gone a short distance,
but he replied with great earnestness that the "lamp of
life was almost out, his eyes were almost blind, his ears
almost deaf, and his feet would not carry him much
longer to the house of God, and he wished to hear the
blessed Gospel as often as he could before he died."




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1842-1847           213
From letter written in behalf of the Mission by A.
Thurston, T. Coan, and D. Dole, Honolulu, May 30,
1843.
Mr. Clark, on account of enfeebled health, has requested
that his connection with the Seminary might cease and
he has accordingly been located at Wailuku, as pastor
of the church formerly under the care of Mr. Armstrong.
To fill the vacancy made by his removal, Mr. Alexander
has been located at Lahainaluna. Mr. Dibble, on account
of ill health, is compelled to reside one mile distant from
the Seminary. He cannot be expected to do as much
for the institution in the time to come as he has done.
The school at Punahou, for the children of missionaries,
went into operation July 11, 1842. About thirty children
have attended the school and of these sixteen have been
boarders. Temperance. This good cause has been gaining ground among the people during the past year. Most
of those who have united with our temperance societies
stand firm to their pledge, and a healthful public sentiment has been strengthened on this subject. The king still
remains true and firm to his principles of total abstinence
and he has recently emptied into the sea about one hundred and twenty gallons of ardent spirits, which had lain
untouched in his store house from the time he first signed
the total abstinence pledge.
From  letter by Levi Chamberlain, Honolulu, February 21, 1843:
It has, for about a week, been a season of excitement
to the inhabitants of Honolulu, both natives and foreigners. The Carrysfort, an English ship-of-war, commanded
by Lord George Paulet, arrived on the tenth instant, was
immediately visited by Mr. Alexander Simpson, a person
left in charge of the affairs of the British Consulate
by Mr. Charlton, who had departed secretly for England,
and whom the government, from his known hostility,




214


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


had refused to acknowledge as acting consul. Mr. Simpson had certain complaints to make to the commander,
one of which was that the Sandwich Islands Government
had refused him an acknowledgment, and another, that
property belonging to Mr. Charlton, the Consul, now
absent, had been laid under attachment for debt by a
decision of Court, in opposition to the protest of Mrs.
Charlton, his wife, who was on the premises. The King,
who was at Maui, was sent for and, almost immediately
on his arrival at Honolulu, was summoned to a private
interview with his Lordship, to appear without his interpreter (Dr. Judd). This the king declined to grant,
but assured His Lordship that he would wait upon him
at an early period attended by his interpreter. The reply
to this communication was attended with demands, the
non-compliance with which was threatened with special
hostilities and an attack upon the place from the guns
of the ship in less than twenty-four hours. If an affirmative answer were not given by four o'clock of the next
day the firing would commence. This communication
was sent to the government on the evening of the seventeenth. Early in the morning of the next day an English
Brig was towed out of the harbor and anchored in the
roads and the English families in the place instructed
to take refuge on board of her while, at the same time,
the Frigate was moored with her broadside placed toward
the fort and everything put in readiness for an attack
in case the demands were not complied with. Not a
doubt was entertained of the resolute purpose of the
English Commander to put the threat into execution,
backed up as he was by the exasperated Simpson. Much
alarm was experienced by the residents and some removed
their money and valuable papers to a place of safety and
began packing up their effects. Captain Long of the
United States Sloop of War, Boston, recently arrived in
port, offered his ship as an asylum to all Americans who
might wish to avail themselves of his protection, and all
the commanders of the American whaling ships in port




Pauiahi Hall. The Academy~ of Punahou College




A JI,., ,,,,I I.  t A 1,




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1842-1847      215
were requested to have their boats in waiting at twelve
o'clock. This was the attitude of things abroad while
the chiefs were engaged in council within and devising
what reply they should make. Their indignation was
sufficiently raised to have resisted, but their fears led
them to compliance. And they penned an answer of submission, at the same time introducing a protest against
the demands to which they had yielded only because the
nation's weakness precluded resistance and referred the
whole case to the clemency of the Court of Great Britain.
The concession seemed to be satisfactory. Monday, two
o'clock, salutes were exchanged and the excitement from
fears of violence and bloodshed subsided, though great
indignation was felt on the part of many Americans.
There is much reason to fear the difficulties are not ended,
though the apprehension of immediate hostilities is removed.
March 7. Important events have transpired since the
date occurred which stands at the head of this letter of
the nature of which the printed official acts, which I
enclose, will sufficiently inform you. Had I time I would
gladly go into detail of the transactions which led to the
results that are now witnessed. The British flag is hoisted
in all the islands and the affairs of the government, in
everything which relates to foreigners, are transacted by
a Board entitled the British Commissioners for the Government of the Sandwich Islands. Of this Commission
Dr. Judd is a member as deputy for the king. What
induced the king, you may ask, to cede his kingdom
while negotiations were pending at the Court of Great
Britain.  Having duly commissioned Ambassadors and
sent them to England with powers to adjust all difficulties
and make treaties, why did not the king stand his ground
and hold out until the result of those negotiations were
known? This he gladly would have done, but having
yielded to the first demands, because it would have been
presumptuous to resist, notwithstanding it was done under
protest, other demands, more arbitrary and unjust, were




216


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


preferred, damages to a very large amount (eighty thousand dollars), which the government had no ability to
meet, were brought against them and no alternative
seemed left but to make a provisional cession of the
islands or to fight. For the latter they had neither the
disposition nor the ability and, as the most peaceful
measure, they cast themselves upon the magnanimity and
clemency of the British Government.
From   letter written from  the Sandwich Islands,
August, 1843:
The day on which the Sandwich Islands Government
was restored and the national flag again raised will be
long remembered in these islands. Admiral Thomas,
Commander-in-Chief of H. B. M.'s naval forces in the
Pacific Ocean, determined that the event should be attended with special ceremony.    Some four hundred
marines with their officers from the three English ships
of war in port, viz.: Dublin, Carrysfort, and Hazard,
were marched out and drawn up in line upon the plain,
having several brass pieces in their train, a great concourse of people both native and foreigners assembled
and took positions on the sides of a large parallelogram,
which had been staked off, a tent for the king and his
attendants having been erected on one side, and on the
opposite side another for foreign ladies and persons of
distinction.  Near the king's tent a staff bearing the
Sandwich Islands flag furled, was set up, by the side of
which the King and Admiral Thomas, in full uniform,
attended by appropriate officers, took their stand. At a
signal the standard was unfurled and simultaneously
with it the field pieces opened the salute, which was followed by the display of other banners and the hoisting
of the national flag at the two fortresses and a discharge
of a national salute from all the ships of war in port and
from the batteries. Various evolutions were performed
by the marines and all due honor conferred upon His




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1842-1847      217
Majesty and the flag of his nation. Commodore Kearney
and officers from the United States Ship Constellation
honored the circle with their presence and seemed highly
to participate in the joy of the occasion.' The American
residents and most of the foreign ladies testified by their
presence and signals of congratulation that they felt a
high degree of interest in the events of the day.
On the return of the king to his residence he was met
by the officers of a band of soldiers who had been enlisted
into the service of the British Commission and had sworn
allegiance to another sovereign. They advanced into his
presence and supplicated pardon by kissing the hand of
the king and declaring their wish to return to their
allegiance. The king very graciously granted their request, signed a writing for their pardon, together with
those that had composed their band and dismissed them
to return to their duties. At one o'clock the king and
chiefs repaired to the stone meeting house to offer public
thanks for the singular interposition of Providence in
favor of the nation. The king made an earnest address
stating that, according to the hope expressed by him when
he ceded the islands, "the life of the land" had been
restored to him,2 that now they, the people of his islands,
should look to him and his rule over them should be
exercised according to the constitution and laws. This
address was followed by the interpretation of Admiral
Thoras' Declaration, after which John Ii delivered an
animated address suited to the joyful occasion. He referred to the gloom which had shrouded the nation and
the despondency which had brooded over many minds,
that these were now dispelled, that joyful hope had sprung
up making every thing around look bright and smiling.
1 Commodore Rearney was Commandei of the American Squadron on the Pacific at this time.
2 The Hawaiian of this expression of the king was " Ua mau ka
ea o ka aina i ka pono ' —' The life of the land is perpetuated in
righteousness, " and this was the national motto while the kingdom
continued.




218


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


He referred to the auspicious event of the restoration as
of the Lord who had been mindful of the nation in its
low state and as demanding from all, grateful thanks and
praise. He spoke as though the sentiments and feelings
of the Psalmist was in his heart when he penned the
Twelfth Psalm. "When the Lord turned again the captivity of Zion we were like them that dream," etc. Every
arrangement on the part of Admiral Thomas was made
with reference to conferring upon the king the honor
which was due to him as a sovereign and to wipe away,
as it seemed to us, as far as he might be able the reproach
which his flag had suffered by the proceeding of Lord
Paulet. He was invited to dine on board the Admiral's
ship in company with Commodore Kearney of the Constellation. The ships were fully decorated with national
ensigns and signals and as the king passed the men-ofwar in the harbor he was honored with a national salute
from each, and with another from the Dublin, as he entered on board. The conduct of the king on the occasion
was very creditable to him and on all occasions his behavior has been dignified and becoming. We are happy
to learn that he has maintained his pledge of total abstinence and in giving and receiving entertainments has not,
so far as we know, in the least respect violated it.
September or October, 1843. The following letter
from Mr. Armstrong must have been about this date:
The restoration has given an impulse to everything
and inspired the friends of the nation with new courage.
The reign of Lord George Paulet was short and full.of
evil, and blessed be God that it has been brought to a
speedy end. The king continued to adhere to his teetotal
principles and the other chiefs without exception, I believe, follow his example. The common people generally
have enlisted under the same banner, so that among
natives we have quietness and order throughout the land.




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1842-1847      219
From letter by Lowell Smith, Honolulu, November
25, 1843:
The thirty-first of July is a day long to be remembered
with joy by the king, chiefs, people, and friends of this
nation. The public manner in which Admiral Thomas
rebuked Captain Lord George Paulet on this occasion is
worthy of note. He was the first one called upon to
salute the king on its restoration and he fired no less than
three national salutes that very day, and the Admiral
kept him saluting and paying obeisance to the king for
two or three weeks, whenever His Majesty had occasion
to pass through the harbor to and from ships of war.
Sometimes instead of firing twenty-one guns he would
man his yards and order his band of music to play "God
Save the King."
From   letter by A. Bishop, Ewa, September 15,
1843:
Since the restoration of the islands to their rightful
sovereign, things have again reverted to their former
regularity and the excesses consequent upon the prostration of law have been restrained. A few months since
we feared the worst for the interests of this little kingdom, everything appeared to be getting worse and retrograding. The laws regulating morals were prostrate and
righteousness was trodden down in the streets by multitudes. But God only intended to chastise us and not to
cast us off. The same power that deprived the kingdom
of its independence has also freely restored it and on a
more friendly footing with foreign powers than before.
My labors on the revision and carrying through the
press a new edition of the Scriptures, are just completed.
Most of my time, not devoted to preaching and pastoral
cares, has been spent upon this work. It is possible that
these labors have now come to a final close, but I have
not been weary of the work. On the contrary, it has
been to me inexpressibly delightful.




220


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


From letter by C. Forbes, September 18, 1843:
Everything hangs on the missionary. If he flag, all
flag, he must sustain his Sabbath Schools and, in effect,
the day schools, too. He must provide and train his own
singing and lead mostly in all devotional exercises. He
must teach and lead his deacons, he must keep alive the
spirit of benevolence, nay, create it. He must look after
those who halt and are ready to fall. Our labors are
necessarily incessant.
From letter by E. W. Clark, Wailuku, November 1,
1843:
Providence so ordered events that Mr. Alexander felt
it necessary to seek a drier climate on account of Mrs.
Alexander's health. He came to Lahainaluna and spent
a few weeks and consented, after a little time, to become
permanently connected with the Seminary. This opened
the way for me to leave the institution, which I had
been very reluctant to do while it was in so feeble a
state, and in June I removed with my family to Wailuku.
Bartimeus, whose former name was Puaaiki, has often
been mentioned in the journals of the mission. He was
among its earliest and richest fruits.  He was a poor
blind man, when the light of the Gospel first beamed upon
his darkened mind, though he afterwards partially recovered his sight.  By much perseverance he learned
to read, but owing to the great dimness of his sight this
acquisition was of little use to him. It was almost entirely
through the sense of hearing that he treasured up in
memory nearly the whole of the word of God. He seemed
to have a remarkable gift of memory, as in some measure
a substitute for the sense of seeing. Although more than
thirty years old before he knew that such a book as the
Bible existed, he was, before he died, more familiar with
its contents and had more Scripture treasured up in his
memory than any other person I ever knew. He commenced storing his memory with the word of God long




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1842-1847      221
before the Bible, as a whole, was translated into his
native tongue. A text from which he ever heard a missionary preach seldom escaped him. We could repeat it
many years after with the chapter and verse and oftentimes a large part of the discourse. After portions of
Scripture began to be published in his own language, he
would get his wife and others to read to him. In this
way he secured the precious treasure as fast as it was
published in a language which he understood. And so
accurate was his memory that he would sometimes quote,
in his address to the people, from different editions of
the New Testament as changes were made in the translation from time to time. He would first tell how the
passage stood in the old, then in the new edition, so that
those who had the different editions might recognize the
passage.
I was never before so deeply impressed with the extent
and accuracy of his knowledge of the Scriptures as I was
a few months ago while attending a protracted meeting
in this place. Bartimeus was called on, with only a few
hours' notice, to preach at an evening meeting. His
mind was strangely excited in view of the impenitent and
the overwhelming destruction of the wicked. He selected
for his text a passage in Jeremiah iv:13. "Behold he
shall come up as clouds, and his chariots shall be as a
whirlwind." In hearing this discourse I was forcibly
struck with the remark of the Apostle, "Knowing the
terror of the Lord, we persuade men." The final overthrow and destruction of the wicked was the subject of
discourse. He exhibited the terror of the Lord with great
energy and pathos, interspersing his remarks with a great
number of quotations from the Scriptures, always naming
the chapter and verse. He referred to a large number
of passages in which the same image-the image of a
whirlwind is introduced as an object of terror. We were
all surprised to find that this terrible image is so often
used in the Bible; and how this poor blind man, on the
spur of the moment, never having used a Concordance or




222


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


a reference Bible in his life, could refer to so many
pertinent passages, was quite a mystery to us. His discourse was original and deeply impressive. He secured
the individual attention of the audience for forty or fifty
minutes, although owing to his extreme modesty he occupied the floor of the house instead of the pulpit. "You
have heard," he says, "of the cars propelled by steam in
America, with what speed they go, and how they overwhelm all before them, thus will the wicked be overwhelmed by the chariots of Jehovah."
This is only one specimen of his address. They always
exhibit feeling and often a high degree of eloquence. His
text on this occasion was entirely his own. He never
had known it used as a text by a missionary. A remarkable memory was not the only thing for which
Bartimeus was distinguished. What was more than all,
his heart was ardently devoted to the cause of the
Saviour. He seemed to carry about with him wherever he
went the same warm heart and devout spirit. Although
greatly respected and much noticed both by missionaries
and his own countrymen, he always had a low opinion
of himself. He was far from trusting to his own
works, although remarkably consistent in his deportment
and active in his Master's service. When near his last
end I asked him how he felt in view of death. He replied
with much feeling, "I fear I am not prepared, my sins
are very great." I referred him to Jesus the Friend of
sinners. He replied, yes, there was his only hope. He
soon became insensible and after a few hours ceased to
breathe. "Blessed are the dead who die in the Lord."
From   letter by R. Armstrong, Honolulu, October,
1843:
I wish to say something about our dear departed
brother and fellow laborer, Bartimeus. A mighty man in
Israel has fallen, one whose praise is in all our churches,
one who has long borne with us the burden and heat of
the day, standing in the thickest of the battle wielding




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1842-1847            223
the sword of the Spirit with a dexterity, intrepidity and
success unsurpassed by any of his countrymen. In a
knowledge of the Scriptures, in his own tongue, Bartimeus
though blind and unable to read had no equal on the
islands and for skill in dividing the word of truth so as
to give each a portion and leave none to escape, he was
unsurpassed. He was my helper in the Gospel for five
years and I had an opportunity to know him well. IHis
efforts in public speaking were not all equally good, but
at times I have heard him when it seemed to me that
nothing short of the direct influence of the Spirit of
God on his mind, could enable him to speak the word
with such distinctness and power. I have no doubt but
that he was the instrument for hundreds of conversions,
besides doing a great deal for the advancement of the
church in holiness. His piety was simply childlike and
ardent. The secret of his power as a public speaker lay
in the strength and ardor of his pious feeling, but he
was endowed by his Maker with a memory of the first
order and a clear discriminating judgment.   He was
peculiarly eloquent when he spoke on the great theme of
redemption by Jesus Christ. How often has my heart
melted while hearing him speak of a Saviour's dying
love, and I have often thought while hearing him of the
Saviour's promise: "Ie that believeth in me, out of his
belly shall flow rivers of living water." But the dear
man is no more with us, God has taken him and our
hearts are afflicted, not for his sake, but for our own
and for Zion's sake. I know of no man on earth whom
I loved more than this same little dwarfish, blind, Christian, Sandwich Islander, God grant that his mantle may
fall on hundreds of his brethren who are yet here in the
church militant.
From   letter by William  H. Rice, Hana, Maui,
Decenmber 12, 1843:
It is now little more than two and a half years since
we first landed at these islands, and two and a fourth




9224      THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
since we came to this station with the Rev. Mr. Conde
and family. The first year that we were on the ground,
of course, was mostly spent in acquiring the language.
I, however, commenced immediately on our arrival at this
station to take charge of a Sabbath School of native
children, and a Bible Class of adults, in preparation for
which exercises I spent some time each day during the
week. After being about four months at Hana I commenced a school for the benefit of the native school
teachers connected with Hana station, between fifty and
sixty in number. This school with a few modifications
and interruptions has been in successful operation ever
since.
From letter by E. Bond, Kohala, April 8, 1844:
Our meeting house; our people can get timber, prepare
the ground, and thatch the building, but money they
cannot get in any possible way I have been able to devise.
After waiting, therefore, already until the cause of Christ
has suffered much for lack of a house, I proposed recently to make an effort myself and raise the funds with
which to pay some carpenter for framing the house. It will
take about six hundred dollars to pay some foreigner for
this job and we are now endeavoring to find some suitable man to whom we can commit the work. Meanwhile,
with God's blessing, I hope to raise the needed funds.
Perhaps I ought to say a word in relation to the little
Boarding School for Boys under my immediate care. It
has now been in operation nearly two years and forms a
very agreeable and hopeful portion of my labors for the
people, though not without its proportion of anxieties and
care. The number of pupils is still limited to fourteen
for lack of time to care for more. To these I devote all
the time I am able, and hire a graduate of the Mission
Seminary to do all that I am not able to accomplish.
He remains in school all the time during school hours.




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1842-1847 225
From letter by Titus Coan, Hilo, May 3, 1844:
General peace and prosperity have attended this church
during the year. No special defection has occurred among
this flock and the march of truth and of righteousness
has been onward. The Holy Spirit has descended on
many parts of this extended field.  Saints have been
quickened to watch, and pray, and work, and not a few
sinners have, as we trust, been turned to the Lord. Temptations have assailed this flock, trials have beset us,
dangers like dark clouds have thickened and thundered,
but Jehovah still reigns, and the upper surface of these
clouds is gilded with everlasting sunshine. Through the
grace of God I have been able to accomplish eight tours
in the last ten months, viz.: four through Puna, and
four through the distant parts of Hilo.  These tours
usually occupy from eight to twenty days each. They
are always arduous and in Hilo they are often perilous
from the raging rivers which have swept many a traveller
into the shoreless ocean of eternity. Some of my recent
efforts in crossing streams have been attended with fearful peril and I have often thought it probable that mine
will be a watery grave. It is but a few days since a
strong and robust foreigner was swept down by one of
these rivers and would have been carried suddenly out
of time, but for some powerful and expert natives who
saved him just as he was about to be precipitated down
a fearful precipice. Two or three natives have been not
long since drowned in attempting to cross these streams,
and others have effected hairbreadth escapes.  A little
grassy hillock on the bank of one of these streams marks
the lonely dust of a foreigner who was carried down a
cataract of one hundred feet in an attempt to cross the
river. Nearly thirty of these streams are to be passed
and repassed in making the tour of Hilo. I have now
under my care about thirty organized congregations of
from fifty to one hundred souls, each assembling in
their respective places of worship with which they are




226


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


provided, from Sabbath to Sabbath, throughout the entire
length and breadth of my field of labor. The Female
Boarding School under the care of Mrs. Coan has been
greatly blessed during the past year. Perhaps it has
never enjoyed a year of greater vigor and prosperity than
the one just closed.   Health  and cheerfulness have
bloomed on every cheek and joy beats in every heart.
Not a look of sadness has been seen or a word of discontent uttered. On account of the great numbers who
have plead for admittance into the school, Mrs. Coan
has been induced to exceed her fixed complement by six,
so that her number has been twenty-six instead of twenty
the past year.
From Mission Report by S. Dibble, Honolulu, June
15, 1844:
The providence of God, which has been very remarkable in the whole history of this nation has been no less
so the past year than at any former period.  God has
done great things for us. If it had not been the Lord
who was on our side, then the enemy had swallowed
us up quick. The restoration of the islands to their
rightful ruler, the recognition of his sovereignty and independence by some of the great powers of the earth,
a mutual pledge from those powers not to do anything to
impair his sovereignty, the vigor and justice now manifest
in the execution of the laws of the land and the consequent peace and order that prevail, together with the
increase of wealth, progress in civilization and disposition
to good works, constitute a tide of prosperity almost unexampled, especially if viewed in contrast with the depressed and subjugated condition of the government
when we last met, and the confusion, perplexities, discouragements, and rampant evils which then prevailed.
Surely we have occasion for the warmest emotions of
praise and thanksgiving.




................. ~ — s:~ —^ -—:- — 1- ~ 1~ 11 ---~L ---_..._ _








JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1842-1847          227
From letter by Daniel Dole, Punahou, July 1, 1844:
When I wrote in October last to inform you of the
departure of Brother Locke I little thought that my
next communication would notify you of the death of
my dear wife, but so it is. She went to her rest on the
twenty-seventh of April, leaving an infant four days old.
The following letter from Mr. Emerson, Lahainaluna, announces the death of Mr. Dibble:
January 22, 1846. I write this evening mainly to communicate to you the mournful intelligence that Brother
Dibble is no longer with us. Last evening he took tea with
his family and in the evening sat up some time and enjoyed
several hymns that his wife sung to him. At about eleven
our families began to gather around him, he gave us all
his hand with much calmness, but could not speak so as
to be understood, except a very few words in which he
signified his cheerfulness to depart and be with Christ.
He gradually sank away till at three o'clock this morning he died perfectly easy. So gradual was the decline
that we did not know the minute when he ceased to
breathe. The chamber of death did not appear gloomy
to us, it seemed more like the gate of heaven.
From Mr. Bond, July 7, 1847:
The meeting house at the station has been improved
and is a source of great comfort to us all, as well as a
great blessing to the cause of the Redeemer in this district. It is a frame building, eighty feet by forty feet,
with a veranda on all sides. The sides are thatched or
rather wattled with the ki leaves and the roof thatched
with cane leaves. It has twelve large windows and is
entered by four doors, two on each side, is well floored
with boards and filled with about one hundred and thirty
settees manufactured by those who occupy them. From
the time we were able to occupy it our congregation




228


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


steadily increased until they filled the house regularly.
Our usual Sabbath congregations at present are measured
by the capacity of the building. The seats will accommodate nine hundred individuals and the three aisles five
hundred more at least, sitting closely as Hawaiians are
accustomed to do. My own select school of boys has
been sustained as usual. During the period since I wrote
I have entered nine at Hilo and received ten of the most
promising pupils of the public schools. Twenty boys
have been connected with the school in the time referred
to. Six years ago the twenty-sixth of June we landed at
this station. I look with astonishment and gratitude to
God upon the improved external appearance of our people
and the increase of their means of personal comfort. In
our congregation then, a shirt or a pair of pants were
extremely rare articles of dress; as for vests and jackets
or coats, hats, shoes, etc., they were not seen, with an
individual exception.  Kapa4 was almost the only article
of dress worn and in multitudes of cases there was but
an apology for even a covering of Kapa. Now a Kapa is
rarely seen in our meeting house. Even in our Sabbath
School there is not perhaps a single child without one or
more cloth garments.
4 Kapa is the Hawaiian word for clothing and is also the word
to designate the Hawaiian paper-like tissue manufactured by the
Hawaiians from the bark of the shrubs called wauki and mamaki,
plants resembling the mulberry, whose bark after soaking was
pounded out into sheets resembling paper, but stronger and tougher
than most paper and very pliable. The manufacture of this paper
was woman's work, for which they had hard wood pestles with
hard wood boards upon which the bark was spread. The resounding of the beating of kapa or tapa of the women beside the valley
brook is among childhood 's memories. A sound no longer heard in
all Hawaii as the commerce in cotton, linen, and woolen fabrics has
ended forever the manufacture of kapa. Kapa was used for sheets,
and the simple clothing that the people wore,




XX
JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1847-1848
ROM letter by Mr. Armstrong, October 10,
1847:
The king has family worship regularly when
the Scriptures are read in course, accompanied with
singing and prayer. Our devoted and excellent Brother
John Ii usually officiates at this exercise. Probably no
other person in the nation exerts a more general, steady,
and happy influence on the cause of religion than he.
Being among the first converts and having had the best
opportunities for acquiring general intelligence and a
knowledge of the world the country affords, and having
stood firm by the truth through all the changes and trials
the nation has passed through, he is regarded as a tried
man whose principles cannot be shaken. His wife Sarah,
too, is not far behind him in Christian consistency and
worth. Their hands and hearts are in every good work.
The church members have another important matter on
hand and that is to purchase a town.clock for the tower
of our large church, which will be of immense advantage
to the place. It was proposed to the king and chiefs to
finish.out the steeple, or tower, which will cost $2300,
provided the common people of the congregation would
purchase a town clock, this was agreed to and the work
is soon to be commenced. You will be pained to hear that
our dear Brother Richards lies at the point of death,
having had a stroke of apoplexy.
From letter by E. W. Clark, Wailuku, October 20,
1847:
I have thought much, for one or two years past, on the
manner in which the missionary work, or rather the work
229




230


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


of the Board, is to be brought to a close at the Islands.
Some of your last letters have reference mainly to this
subject. I fully agree with you that the great work,
which the churches of America have yet to do for the
Sandwich Islands, must probably be done in the next ten
years. But in what way is the work of the American
churches to be brought to a close at the Islands? The
way which would be most agreeable to the feeling of
missionaries and their patrons and which would redound
most to the triumph of the Gospel, would be to bring
forward native pastors, teachers, etc., and withdraw and
leave the work wholly in their hands. This, I understand
to be the point to which you would urge us. And permit
me to say that I fully concur with you as you will see
from former letters, that we should aim to bring forward
native pastors and helpers and devolve responsibility upon
them as fast and as far as it can be done with prosperity
and safety to the cause. I see no better way than to
place missionaries here on the same ground as Home
Missionaries at the West. Let the Board assist feeble
churches so far only as they need assistance, expecting
bye and bye that they will be able to get along without
help. Missionaries, in this case, must be left as free to
look out for their own support as missionaries who go
to the West. I am aware there would be dangers and
temptations connected with this course but Home Missionaries and other Ministers are exposed to similar
dangers. As human nature is the same in missionaries
as in other men it would manifestly be economy to throw
each one in a measure upon his own resources.
November 15, 1847. As the thatched roof of our
meeting house has become leaky the people have decided
to replace it by a shingle roof. This will cost from
$1000 to $2000. The contributions for the past year have
been devoted mainly to this object. About six hundred
dollars in cash have been paid in and considerably more
subscribed. A native preacher is sustained, as last year,
at Honuaula by contributions from    the church.  In




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1847-1848      231
August we received a visit from Rev. Mr. Geddie on his
way from Nova Scotia to the New Caledonia Islands. He
gave our people some account of the origin of his mission, the state of the people in New Caledonia, etc., and
they contributed twenty dollars to aid in planting the
Gospel in that group of islands. They seem to appreciate the good they have derived from the Gospel and
are anxious to impart it to other dark islands in the
Pacific. They would have willingly given much more
if they had not been burdened with the work of repairing
their own house of worship.
From   letter by W. P. Alexander, Lahainaluna,
October 27, 1847:
In looking at the state of things here, I do not see
any prospect that the time is near when the Hawaiian
churches can be left to themselves. Still, however, I do
believe that God has a people here and that in our time
he will raise up from among them pastors to feed them.
How soon he will do this I cannot tell. He will probably
first try our faith and patience and teach us more fully
how entirely we depend on His grace.
November 19, 1847. On the fourth instant a council
of ministers met at my house, consisting of Rev. Messrs.
Clark, Baldwin, Hunt, Andrews, and myself and after
a rigid examination of S. Kauwealoha one of our later
pupils, licensed him to preach the Gospel of Christ. I
do hope he will make one of the pastors of the Hawaiian
churches raised up from their own bosom. If we had
fifty such, then the prosperity of the nation would
brighten; hut, alas! like all other truly precious things,
they are scarce.
From letter by E. Bailey, Wailuku, November 18,
1847:
Of six girls from the Wailuku Female Seminary added
to the church, one soon married a graduate of Lahainaluna




9239


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


and lived happily with him till her death about a year
ago. Another continued to adorn her profession in school
till last June when she was married to a graduate from
Lahainaluna of great promise, a theological student belonging to Waialua, Oahu, where they now reside. Of
her I cannot speak too highly. She was a great comfort
to us while she remained in school. Her meekness, soberness, and docility, joined with industry and neatness,
endeared her to our hearts and few of the young couples
who have left us have given so much promise as she and
her husband, not for any strong talents they possess, but
for their uniform sobriety and consistent conduct. Her
name is Naomi and her husband Kekela.1
From letter by Levi Chamberlain, Honolulu, December 16, 1847:
The death of Mr. Richards, besides creating a vacancy
in the government, has deprived the nation of a tried
friend and benefactor. He has always been on the most
friendly terms with the Mission and has, from the period
of his separation from the Board, continued to seek its
peace and prosperity and labored collaterally to promote
the cause of the Redeemer. The Government has made
a suitable provision for Mrs. Richards by an annuity of
eight hundred dollars during her lifetime and four hundred after her decease to her daughters in the islands,
as long as they may need it. I have seen the copy of
a letter, addressed by R. C. Wyllie, Esq., Minister of
Foreign Relations, to Mr. Hill, under the impression of
his being Corresponding Secretary of the Board in which
he refers to the vacancy in the Hawaiian Government
occasioned by the death of Mr. Richards and intimates
that, in his opinion, the Mission should allow Mr. Armstrong to withdraw from the direction of the American
1 Both James Kekela and Samuel Kauwealoha with their wivex
were for over fifty years missionaries of the Hawaiian Board to
the Marquesas Islands, living into the first decade of the twentieth
century.




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1847-1848 233
Board and engage in the duties of Minister of Public
Instruction. He gives various reasons why Mr. Armstrong should not decline the office and why his brethren
of the Mission and their patrons and directors at home
should approve of his acceptance of it. The officer holding this appointment is, by statute, one of the five high
Ministers of State and a member of the Privy Council.
The proper discharge of the duties of this functionary
requires that he should be a magistrate of high official
authority and have power under the king to make regulations and carry into effect all laws and orders relating
to the subject of education. That it is an important station, involving great responsibility and requiring peculiar
talent, wisdom, and skill, knowledge of Hawaiian customs
and experience of the native character, in order to
properly discharge the duties of it will be readily admitted. It is true, as intimated by Mr. Wyllie, that no
one of our number possesses more ample qualifications
for the work than Mr. Armstrong, and no member of
the Mission would be likely to serve the interests of education better. There are some reasons for Mr. Armstrong's acceptance, to which I have not referred, namely:
the strong wish of the king and chiefs, their distrust of
native ability, and the feeling expressed that the Mission
has originated the want of such a department, and no
one but a missionary is fully qualified to discharge the
duties of it. The king said to Mr. Armstrong, this is
your work, meaning it is missionary work. There is no
doubt but that Mr. Wyllie and some others of the cabinet,
besides the king and chiefs, are very desirous that Mr.
Armstrong should join the government.      He speaks
fluently the native language, is ready at translating, has
the confidence of the chiefs and the Mission, and is rather
popular with a class of foreigners. It is not unlikely
they may wish a balance in the Council, though this is
a thing not at all referred to, and he is told that he may
be relieved from Cabinet duties as a general thing, that
is, attending the sessions of the Privy Council.




234


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


May, 1848.   About this date Mr. Armstrong writes
in regard to a renewed call to the office of Minister of
Public Instruction:
The subject has been under consideration for more
than six months. We have all had time for mature deliberation upon it and, probably, each one has come to
some conclusion in regard to it. As regards myself, if
left to choose my own way in the matter, I have come
to the conclusion to accept the office. On the conviction
that, by accepting this appointment, I may do more for
the temporal and eternal good of the inhabitants of these
islands than by rejecting it. The good may not be so
immediate, nor so apparent, but, if I reason correctly,
more extensive and enduring. So far as the Protestant
schools are concerned there will be no obstacle in the
way of exerting all the Christian influence the Minister
of Instruction can bring to bear upon them. He may
preach every day, he may scatter books and tracts, he
may labor to raise up evangelical Christian teachers to
the full extent of his ability. He may, and should labor
to, make every school a school of Christ, and, like the
Puritans, to educate the children for both worlds. In
these circumstances the system of common schools is an
engine of immense good if rightly managed.
Reply of Mission to letter of Mr. Armstrong, May
5, 1848:
We are willing to leave Mr. Armstrong to act upon
his own responsibility and according to his own convictions of duty, having the fullest confidence in the integrity
of his motives and in his ability and disposition to render
efficient aid to our work in the new post which he is
called to occupy. We believe that his engaging in this
new service will help forward the completion of the missionary work at these islands. We can only add that it
is our earnest prayer that the blessing of God may be




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1847-1848      235
with him in his new labors and render him a blessing
to the Hawaiian people. However we may regret that
any of our number should become so closely connected
with the affairs of state we have great reason to praise
the Author of all good for disposing this government to
commit the control of education to one so well qualified
and disposed to carry forward the work, which the Board
and this Mission has commenced.
From Report of Rev. R. Armstrong, of the Kawaiahao Church, to the Mission in session in Honolulu,
May, 18J8:
Our people suffered greatly, and many died, during the
distressing epidemic of measles which prevailed in April
and May of last year. Brother Rice has had charge of
the meeting in Manoa Valley and I hope he will present
an account of his labors there to the Mission. A substantial stone meeting house has been erected there under
the direction of Brother Rice, intended also as a school
house, and an adobe building for the same purpose at
Waikiki. These have cost a great deal of labor and care,
but we feel amply repaid for it all in seeing the work
of the Lord prospering so greatly in both of these districts. While erecting the houses we feared they would
prove too large, but during the present year they have
been filled with attentive worshippers on Sabbath afternoons and, frequently, during the week. A stone meeting
house is now in progress at Wailupe, on the coast, east
of Diamond Head. That section of the parish is under
the care of a pious native.
From   Report of Kaluuaha Station, 1848, by Mr.
Hitchcock:
On Thursday of every week Mrs. Hitchcock has what
is called a "Mother's Meeting."  This is a society em



236


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


bracing not only mothers but all others who wish to join
and consent to the terms of admission. These are cleanliness of person, industry, faithful discharge of domestic
duties, neatness in the house, and good moral character.
Mrs. Hitchcock has also a meeting for the women on
Friday to which all come who please and it is usually
well attended. Our women are, as a usual thing, before
the men in every good word and work and show more
decided attachment to the Saviour. And what of selfdenial and faithfulness the other sex possess as Christians
is in no small degree owing to the good influence of their
wives. In conclusion I must say there has evidently been
an upward movement among our people the two years
past.
From Report of the Station at Kohala, Hawaii, by
Rev. E. Bond, for 184 8:
Since October all departments of enterprise throughout
the district have been utterly prostrate. Our state has
been that of being and suffering rather than that of
doing. Like a noble ship with all her canvas spread to
the prosperous gales of heaven, suddenly thrown on her
beam ends and left an unmanageable wreck, so it was
with this district and our labors upon the introduction
of measles in October. All Kohala was a hospital and
every inhabitant was a patient therein. The discharge
of such offices as were indispensably necessary to sustain
life were not, as is usual in seasons of sickness thrown
upon the well, for none such were to be found, but upon
those who were so highly favored as to have sufficient
strength spared to drag themselves through such services
for a brief season until others in turn could relieve them.
In houses where all were exhausted and helpless extreme
suffering and death were the necessary consequences. But
it is unnecessary that I detail the history of the period
embraced between October and the close of the year. It
is but too well known to you all, written as it has been




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1847-1848      237
by the hands of the destroyer in characters too vivid and
mournful to be soon effaced or forgotten by any one of
us. I only add that to the visiting and caring for the
sick, all the time at my command was devoted, until the
entrance of the disease into our family forbade my leaving
them, to administer to the necessities of others.
In the time above specified death has made extensive
ravages in this church. One hundred and thirty have
died during the year, chiefly within two or three months.
Some of these, beyond a doubt, are now in Heaven. They
were the bright and shining lights of our church and
district, adorning the Gospel of God their Saviour by
well ordered lives and a godly conversation. We feel their
departure to be our loss, yet we cannot regret the event
which has brought to them eternal gain. Of the existence of my own little school this is the seventh year.
It was continued as usual until the measles broke out,
and since that time has been suspended, though several
attempts were made to recommence studies in vain. New
cases of the measles repeatedly broke upon us and caused
a suspension of the school. The number of pupils connected with the school during the year has been twentyseven. Nine of these entered the High School in Hilo
in September last, three were dismissed on account of
sickness and five from general lack of promise.
Some progress has been made during the year towards
a final judgment of the land claims held by the people
of our district. The evidence thereon was taken in September last. At the special request of the Land Commissioner I consented to aid in that service with the hope
that the speedy settlement of these claims would operate
favorably upon the industrial interests of the people. It
would certainly free them from the power of the (Konohiki's) Sub-Landlords who are little better to Hawaiians
than the taskmasters of the Israelites were to them
during the sojourn in Egypt. The possession of a fee
simple title would likewise secure the natives from much
of the injustice now practiced by the tax-gatherers.




938


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


From letter by Titus Coan, Hilo, April 17, 1848:
By the earnest request of several Ship Masters we have
been encouraged to attempt the fitting up of a small
chapel for seamen at Hilo. Four hundred dollars have
already been contributed for this object, mostly by our
friends from the ocean. Of this, ninety-four dollars by
Captain Du Pont with the officers and crews of the United
States Ship Cyane.
From Report of the Station at Wailuku, by B. W.
Clarkc, May, 1846, to May, 1848:
An interesting temperance celebration was held in July
last. Between five hundred and six hundred children
pledged themselves to total abstinence from all that intoxicates. Property, industry, and civilization are increasing. About fifteen ox carts are owned by natives
in my field, with two or three yoke of cattle to each.
Respectable clothing is becoming universal.  Improvement in houses is small except in a few cases. There
is more improvement in furniture, cooking utensils, etc.
Many of the people own cattle and horses. But the people
are still, as a general thing, indolent and improvident.
The stimulus of a fee simple title to land and other encouragements are greatly needed to arouse them to continued industry. We have in our field a few active
carpenters and one or two blacksmiths and shoemakers,
who apply themselves with commendable diligence to their
occupations. The number of deaths in the church the
last year exceeds the number of infants born. This is
a pretty sure indication that the people are diminishing.
This fact seems to be indicated also by the diminution
in the number of marriages from year to year. The state
of schools is much the same as in former years. The
teachers, however, are now regularly paid and there is a
small fund on hand which the school superintendent is
employing in building and repairing school houses.




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1847-1848           239
Some attempt has been made to introduce manual labor,
but it is attended with difficulties.
From Report of the Station n n Waialua, by J. S.
Emerson, May 11, 1848, upon his return from Lahainaluna:
The Sabbath soon arrived and I preached in the morning to about three hundred people, a congregation, as
Brother Wilcox informed me, about twice as large as
usual.  The afternoon congregation was one hundred
seventy-five. Many times, after this, we heard this remark: "God has heard our prayer and restored to us our
pastor." This feeling we have since been fully satisfied
was not without sincerity. There was, in many hearts,
a deep feeling of attachment to those who had been with
them from the beginning.
From a General Mission letter, Honolulu, June ~,
1848:
Our children have been blessed, especially the children
of the school (Punahou School), as you will learn from
the Report of that institution.  Numbers have become
hopefully pious. They have had daily opportunities to
receive instruction during the General Meeting, and on
the twenty-eighth, fourteen were received to the Mission
church. On the twenty-ninth Mr. Johnson was ordained
by the Clerical Association, having been previously examined and approved by that body. The services were
held in the first church, and were all in the native language. At the close of the ordination the Rev. Mr. Pogue
and Miss Maria Whitney were united in marriage. This
service was performed in English by the Rev. Wm. P.
Alexander, and a prayer in English closed the interesting
services of the occasion. On the twenty-sixth the missionaries and their children visited the palace by previous
invitation and were received with great cordiality by their




?40


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


Majesties, the King and Queen. The visit was of an
interesting character and may not be without benefit.
His Majesty expressed himself gratified with the visit of
the missionaries, especially with the numbers and sprightliness of the children, and expressed his most cordial wishes
for our future prosperity.
From  letter by D. T. Conde, Hana, Maui, July,
1848:
The establishment of a Missionary Station in the district of Hana, on East Maui, was assigned to us at the
General Meeting of May, 1837. On the eighth of January
following, we landed on the ground, took up our abode
in a thatched house and the next day (Sabbath) I preached
my first sermon in Hawaiian to a numerous and apparently
interested assembly. We have now, therefore, occupied
our present post some ten years or more. During this
time we have had no less than four different families,
one after another, for associates, besides living alone at
various times from a month to two years. The superintendence of the work and the workmen on our meeting
house, which has been in building for several years past,
has pressed with unusual weight on my shoulders.
Without enumerating the various kinds of business of
this nature which have received attention I would say
there is nothing comprised within a circle of the mechanical arts that I have not been obliged to do with my own
hands. Our church and people have during the two past
years contributed about one hundred and ten dollars in
cash and about fifteen dollars in native produce, besides
performing considerable manual labor for benevolent purposes. Our meeting house was nearly enclosed when we
left home to attend the Annual Mission Meeting. There
is on hand lumber of various kinds sufficient perhaps to
complete the house. Materials for plastering the walls
and ceilings are for the most part wanting. We have
already expended nine hundred and eighty-two dollars




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1847-1848      241
on the house and for the material on hand, including
our bell and bell house, while the receipts from the people,
and various friends in the island amount to eight hundred and seventy-eight dollars and eighty-nine cents, from
which it is seen that a debt of one hundred and four
dollars and ten cents has already been incurred.
The schools in my field are sixteen in number. The
children and youths connected with these schools respectively range from twenty to one hundred and fifteen,
total six hundred and fifty. About all these schools have
been in constant operation with the exception of the ordinary vacations. In some of the schools the children
are taught but half of the day, the other part being devoted to manual labor in which the teacher unites with
the scholars. The avails of their labor are equally divided
among themselves. The arrangement is doubtless praiseworthy as it tends to promote habits of industry as well as
intelligence. The schools have been statedly examined
and a grand celebration for the purpose of awakening
an interest in behalf of education has been held in two
different places at which all the children and youths of
the various schools subscribed to the temperance pledge,
discarding the use of everything that intoxicate, including
tobacco. By the minutes of our last General Meeting
you will learn that I am to be removed to Wailuku to
succeed Mr. Clark who takes Mr. Armstrong's place in
the first church in Honolulu. By this arrangement Mr.
Whittlesey is left in the sole charge of this extensive field.
I know the church and people for whose spiritual welfare
we have wept, prayed, and labored these ten years and
more, love us and greatly desire us to continue among
them, but Providence makes it our duty to leave them
for another portion of God's vineyard. And it is our
earnest prayer that the Lord will go with us and impart
unto us strength and vigor both in the inner and outer
man that we may be able to accomplish great good and
commend ourselves to the consciences and lasting esteem
of all the people.




242


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


From letter by Levi Chamberlain, Honolulu, November 6, 1848:
I would mention that the measles and whooping cough
are prevalent at this time in the families of the missionaries, and also very extensively among the natives. About
a week ago, the king having directed that the houses in
the settlement of Honolulu should be visited in order that
the extent of the sickness might be ascertained, the agents
employed called at a house which was found closed. On
forcing an entrance, the sight met them of four persons
lying dead. As they lived near the sea it is supposed that
they had imprudently bathed in the most dangerous state
of the measles and thus lost their lives. One of our missionaries was sent for to visit a sick man. His friend
had bathed him profusely in cold water after eruption
had taken place; the effect of this cold bath was death
in about an hour. Some have bathed with impunity and
the caution not to do it is often unheeded to the fatal
injury of the patient.
From letter by E. W. Clark, Honolulu, to the Board
in Boston, October 20, 18J48:
Your general letter by the Ship Tsar has been received. We are pursuing, I think, substantially the course
you recommend by gradually committing responsibilities
to native helpers. None of us here on the ground imagine
that the time is near when the whole work can be committed to native hands. Shall missionaries, therefore, be
sustained here for generations to come by the American
churches, or shall they gradually obtain their support at
the islands and, in this way, the churches at home be
relieved of the burden? The last course is the one which
I have no doubt will be eventually adopted. Whether the
time will ever come when the work can be safely relinquished is more than I can say. It may, in time, be
relinquished in some of the less important places to




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1847-1848 243
native hands. But that a foreign ministry, or a ministry
of foreign extraction will continue to exist at the islands
I have no more doubt than I have that religion will continue to exist. Mr. Hunt has just sailed for California.
His family are here.    He commenced preaching to
foreigners in Honolulu, but the gold fever, as it is here
called, is taking off his congregation to California and
he concluded to follow them. He expects to establish
himself at San Francisco and if he receives encouragement he will send for his family. He preached faithful
sermons and it is to be hoped he will do good there.3
From   letter by Titus Coan, Hilo, November 15,
1848:
My last to you was written at Kau, September first.
On our return from that little excursion we found our
people waiting to receive us with warm greetings. We
also found the state of religion very interesting, having
suffered no decline during our absence. About this time
the measles broke out among the natives, supposed to have
been brought here by the United States Ship Independence,
and spread through all the islands. The sweep of this
epidemic is universal, prostrating all without discrimination. The distress throughout my field has been great.
Hundreds, yes thousands, were prostrated at the same
time and there were not enough in health to take proper
care of the sick. In visiting from house to house we
would find from two to twelve sick together in the same
habitation and often not one who was able to minister
to the wants of another. Many, yes, many of our dear
people have shone brightly in the furnace which has tried
them. Said a dying native to me: "I am willing to leave
this world when God calls. I prefer to depart and be
with Jesus. I have tried this world and it is vanity, all
vanity, this is not life, it is death, yonder is life, in
8 The church there founded by Rev. T. D. Hunt is now known as
The First Congregational Church of San Francisco.




S44


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


heaven. My heart is there, my friends are there, my
home is there, my God is there. I feel no more ties
binding me to earth." This was a vigorous man of twentyfive.
Many of our people give with great cheerfulness and
some of them certainly give liberally when we take into
account their temporal affairs. Very few of the contributors are worth one hundred dollars, and many of
them are as destitute as the "Poor Widow" of "Two
Mites," and yet their contribution might well put many
wealthy Christians to the blush.
From  letter by E. W. Clark, Honolulu, December
15, 184is:
Since I last wrote you the people around us have been
prostrated by two serious epidemics, the measles and
whooping cough. These diseases and other complaints
connected with them have carried off many of the people.
The sickness is now abating on this island. About one
thousand deaths are reported on this island in the month
of November. Probably the deaths on the other islands
have not been so many in proportion to the population.
But I should not be surprised if one-tenth of the population is removed by these diseases. The death of no one
has been so trying to me as the death of Kaili, whom
I have before mentioned as a native preacher at Honolulu.
He was one of my earliest pupils at Lahainaluna and
afterwards my fellow helper at Wailuku and Honolulu.
He was uncommonly mild and even in his disposition.
His knowledge, especially of the Bible, was very respectable
and he was apt and fluent in exhibiting truth to others.
He was one of the first and most promising of our
licensed preachers. He died on the seventeenth of November with unwavering confidence in the Saviour. Today I
have been called to bury one of the five children whom
he left behind.




XXT


JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1848-1850
HE       following, taken from    Dr. Rufus Anderj        son's History of the Sandwich Islands Mission,
pages 241-242, gives us the proposition made
by the American Board to the Mission July 19, 1848,
an acquaintance with which is required to render intelligible the action of the Mission as recorded on subsequent pages.
"What the Prudential Committee had to do, was to
devise a method for retaining those families in the field
without incurring expenses that could not be borne, and
at the same time in view of the vast success of the mission,
prepare the way for its early      close.  The healthful
oceanic climate of the Sandwich Islands, along with the
Christianized state of the people, and the progress of
civilization, suggested a solution of the novel problem,
which I will now briefly state:
"1. No objection was made to the brethren becoming Hawaiian
citizens, should any of them choose to do so; taking, at the same
time, a qualified release from their connection with the Board.
2. Brethren, with the approval of the mission, might purchase
from the Board the houses in which they lived, with all their appurtenances, and be subject to no other restrictions in the investment of their private property than popular sentiment imposes on
pastors at home.
3. Brethren, after declaring their intention to remain on the
Islands in the continued prosecution of Christian labors and taking
a release from their connection with the Board, might receive their
proportional part of property held by the Board at their respective
stations.
245




246        THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
4. When it had been satisfactorily shown that brethren, thus released, could not obtain a full and proper support from their
churches, from their glebe lands, from the avails of private property
and other sources, the Prudential Committee would make grants,
for a time, to aid in their support, after the manner of the Home
Missionary Society.
5. The government of the Islands also engaged on these conditions to confirm to the brethren, individually, the possession of
the lands thus made over to them.
"This was, no doubt, a somewhat venturesome step on
the part of the Prudential Committee, involving the risk
of not a few evils, but it was the only apparent method
of escape from greater evils. It appeared from letters
not received until after these propositions were actually
on their way to the Islands, that the mission had become
in some measure prepared for such an arrangement, by
considering the very facts that had operated so forcibly
on the minds of the Prudential Committee. The letter
of the Committee was dated July 19, 1848. The mission
assembled in the following April and assented substantially to the proposal."
From   letter by E. W. Clark to Rev. R. Anderson,
Honolulu, January 6, 1849:
Your letter of July nineteenth has just come to hand.
It is indeed, as you intimate, the most important letter
you have ever written to the Mission. How the proposals
will be received by the Mission, as a body, I do not know.
You will perceive by the minutes of our last General
Meeting that our minds have been coming to the same
results to which yours have come. Our good Brother
Chamberlain, from his peculiar situation in the mission
and his remarkably cautious disposition, may fear disaster to the cause. I have not talked with him since your
letter was received. He is just now very low. We should
not be surprised if he should drop away at any time. But
he is like a shock of corn fully ripe. Some may object
from an unwillingness to throw themselves so much upon




JOURNALS AND         LETTERS, 1848-1850        247
the people, others from a strong wish to have their children settle in the land of their fathers. But all have felt
that we were approaching a crisis in the mission and will
be willing, I think, to look at the subject calmly and
prayerfully. The subject has pressed with great weight
upon my mind for two or three years past and my mind,
as you are aware, has come to the same conclusion to
which you have come. With the kind co-operation which
you so freely offer, I think measures may be devised for
keeping a large portion of our children at the islands.
It will require no small faith in parents, but if the success
of the missionary cause depends upon our taking this
course we can cast ourselves upon the Lord believing that
he will open the way before us.
May 5, 1849. A great advance has been made and I
feel greatly encouraged. The views of all the brethren
of the Mission have been freely expressed but with kind
feelings. All agree that the way you propose to finish
up the work of the American Churches here, is the only
way in which it can be done. But many think that the
time has not yet come to make any important change in
our policy.
May 10, 1849. The following are some of the reasons
urged for accepting the proposals in the resolutions of
the Committee in Boston:
1. It would lead families to take root at the Islands and thus
tend to prevent the return of one family after another to the
United States for the education of their children and support in
old age. All, I believe, admitted that it would be likely to
diminish the number of returns to The States,
2. For Missionaries to retain their connection in full with the
Board and employ their property on missionary ground for private
gain with a view to benefit their rising families, would be liable
to bring reproach upon the Board and the cause of missions;
whereas, reproach from this source would not adhere to the Board,
if missionaries withdraw with the view of settling their families
at the Islands. Each one would be thrown upon his own responsibility, and the Board would not be involved in case any one should
pursue a disreputable course.




248


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


3. Much more will be obtained from the people for the support
of the Gospel if we can throw ourselves upon them as their pastors
to be sustained by them. The people at Wailuku were desirous I
should do this some years ago and they renewed the request last
year when they found I was about to be removed to Honolulu. All
admit that more would be obtained in this way for the support of
the Gospel.
4. The fact that the native inhabitants are diminishing, and a
new race coming in, affords additional reason for placing ourselves
upon the basis of Home Missionaries.
5. This is the way in which the work of the Board must ultimately be finished up at the Islands.
6. By adopting the proposals of the Board we shall be likely to
render more efficient aid to the government in building up an independent Christian nation at the Islands.
All these points, I believe, were admitted, but many
objections were raised, such as the risk incurred in relinquishing our lien (to use a law term) on the Board for
our families, the undesirableness of being dependent upon
the people for support in whole, or in part, the poverty
of the people, the danger of departing from missionary
devotedness, the danger of reproach to the cause of missions, the inequality resulting from accepting the proposals, some houses are worth very much more than
others, some stations have more herds and lands than
others who have been long on the ground and have large
families.  Some (our secular agents for example), with
common prosperity, would be likely to acquire a handsome property, while others might be brought into
straitened circumstances. It will require no little faith
in us to let go our hold on the Board but no great advance can be made in the missionary work without faith.
August 6, 1849. You will not be surprised to hear that
our dear Brother Chamberlain rests from his labors. He
bade adieu to his weeping friends Sabbath before last,
July 29, and joined the church triumphant. His end
was peace. More than twenty-one years of intimate fellowship with our dear brother has only increased my




'JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1848-1850          249
admiration of his character and of his Christian virtues.
Such men are few and far between.
About two hundred now stand propounded for admission to this Kawaiahao Church. This, with the admission
by letter since the General Meeting, will increase our
church members to more than eighteen hundred, a great
church for one pastor to watch over. I suggested in my
last that it would probably be expedient to divide this
church before very long. More labor is needed here as
Honolulu is increasing in population, while other parts
of the islands are diminishing. We are now under the
necessity of having two communions, admitting part of
the church in the forenoon and a part in the afternoon.
Even our great house will not accommodate all at one
time.
August 28, 1849. The documents sent herewith will
inform you of a new French outrage just perpetrated
upon this weak and unoffending nation. We are, at the
present moment, at the mercy of French soldiery. What
will be on the morrow we know not. If we look to the
past history of French violence and bloodshed, we have
not much to hope for. But our trust is in an unseen
hand. That Providence which has so long watched over
his cause in these islands will not now forsake us. The
French Roman Catholics as Foreign Missionaries, owing
no allegiance to this government demand, in this manifesto, the sole control of government school funds. It
has been the aim of the government to place the Catholic
and Protestant schools on the same basis. Catholics are
allowed to nominate teachers and a committee for their
schools but all the government schools are under the
general supervision of a superintendent of schools, who
pays all teachers, and is responsible to the Minister of
Public Instruction. The government has been greatly
annoyed by the Catholics adopting and carrying forward
a school system. Nothing will satisfy them short of committing the schools for Catholic children, and the government fund for their support, entirely into their hands.




250


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


They can then employ them in their own way and for
their own purposes. They are allowed now to control the
religious instruction of Catholic schools without interference from any one. The other main point in these
demands relates to ardent spirits. The government has
been desirous of prohibiting entirely the introduction and
sale of ardent spirits, but to this the foreign powers
acknowledging the independence of the Islands are unwilling to assent. The most favorable treaty this government could obtain on the subject with France and
England was, that spirituous liquors shall be liable to such
reasonable duty as the Hawaiian Government may think
fit to lay upon them, provided always that the amount
of duty shall not be so high as absolutely to prohibit the
importation of said articles. The government, on the
strength of this treaty, has exacted a high duty on spirits,
but we have lamentable proof in Honolulu, that the duty
is not so high as to exclude the nuisance. And it is rare
that any spirits are introduced without paying duty. But
in direct violation of this treaty the French now come
and dictate the amount of this duty which was to be left
to the discretion of the Hawaiian Government. You will
see from the above that the great sin of this nation is,
that she has not given sufficient encouragement to Popery
and Brandy and for this she must be visited with the
vengeance of the great French Republic. Saturday, the
twenty-fifth instant, was the day on which we were to feel
this vengeance. Two vessels were at hand, a frigate
and a steamer. In the morning, orders were given by this
government to the people of Honolulu to remain quiet
in their houses and make no resistance, which order was
strictly obeyed.  The streets were almost entirely deserted. In the afternoon the Admiral with a company
of Marines, came ashore and took possession of the Fort,
the Government offices, Custom House, King's yacht, and
other vessels sailing under the Hawaiian flag. No disturbance or confusion occurred. The following day we
enjoyed a quiet Sabbath; I preached to a full house, the




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1848-1850      951
king and most of the chiefs being present, from the text:
"My kingdom is not of this world."
September 3. The French have withdrawn their forces
after destroying and carrying off probably thirty thousand
or forty thousand dollars worth of government property,
besides private property to some amount. The vessels have
all been returned except the King's yacht, which cost
the government nine thousand dollars.
From letter'by S. N. Castle, Honolulu, January 6,
1849:
We have just commenced a new edition of the New
Testament and we shall need a grant of say one thousand
dollars, probably more, from the Bible Society.
Extract from Report of the Mission, April 27, 1849:
A communication having been received from the Rev.
William P. Alexander, Rev. C. B. Andrews, and S. N.
Castle as a Committee of the American Mission on these
Islands, proposing to transfer the entire property of the
Seminary at Lahainaluna, Island of Maui, to the government of the Hawaiian Islands to be its property forever,
on certain specified conditions. Therefore it is resolved
by the Mission that the above proposals be accepted subject to the ratification of the Legislature, provided, that
in case of the non-fulfillment on the part of the government of the conditions specified in the letter of the abovenamed gentlemen, it shall be optional with this government to allow the Institution with all additions and improvements which may have been made upon the premises,
and all rights and privileges connected therewith to revert to the associate Minister to be held in behalf of the
A. B. C. F. M. or to pay the sum of Fifteen Thousand
($15,000) Dollars, provided also, that in case this government shall find it expedient to divert this establishment
to other purposes than to those of education, it shall be
at liberty to do so, on condition that it sustain an In,




252


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


stitution of like character and on similar principles in
some other place on the Islands, or pay the sum of Fifteen Thousand ($15,000) Dollars to said Mission in behalf of the Mission Board in Boston.1
From   Report of The Royal School, by Mr. Amos
Cooke, April, 1849:
For some two or three General Meetings past we have
seriously considered the subject of asking a release from
our present position. But as Providence has not appeared
to favor such a project, by opening the way and providing
some one to take our place, we have held on year after
year lest in seeking for a release we might, like Jonah,
be running away from the Lord. Of late, things have
changed and it appears to us that a door is opened for
us to leave the School at no distant period and without
detriment to the remaining scholars. There is now a
school in the village which our pupils can attend with a
reasonable prospect that the change will not prove prejudicial to them and which may obviate the necessity of
our continuing much longer attached to this institution.
Front letter by Titus Coan, Hilo, August 4, 1849:
Joshua was once a member of the church at Puna.
Some fourteen years ago he removed to Hilo where he
remained until his death, which took place in April last.
With no extraordinary native power of mind he became
one of the most active and efficient helpers, merely through
the power of his piety, or, in Scripture language, through
the power of the Holy Ghost resting upon him. He was
already an old man but his strength and his youth were
renewed like the eagles. He became my almost constant
companion in travels, patiently toiling by my side over
1 After due legal process this amount ($15,000) was paid by the
Territorial Government of Hawaii to the American Board in or
about 1910, and the money distributed to the several Girls' Boarding Schools conducted under the auspices of the Hawaiian Board,




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1848-1850 253
thie rough lava fields of Puna and through the rivers and
ravines of Hilo. I never tired in travelling with him and
his conversations and prayers never wearied. When my
spirits were sad, my resort, next to the throne of grace,
was the heart of good old Joshua. He was truly spiritual
and there was an emotion about him which readily attracted spiritual minds. The wicked venerated and feared
him. The saints loved him. As age and infirmity crept
over him he began to feel it more and more difficult to
go with me on tours. Several times when invited to do
so he has excused himself saying: "I am too old and too
feeble. My heart goes with you, but this old body can't
drag over the hills and rivers any more. It is done."
Then, after a little reflection, all his old recollections
would revive and his desire to go again would become so
strong that he would say: "Well, I will try it once more.
Perhaps He will give me strength to go through, if not
let him leave me by the way. All will be well." Such
scenes were repeated several times before he finally yielded
to the increasing infirmities of age. At length the strong
man bowed beneath the pressure of years and his active
labors were confined to the circle immediately around the
station. Upon our return from the General Meeting it
was announced that the Master had come and called for
Joshua. My soul followed him in his celestial chariot
and involuntarily exclaimed: "My father! My father!"
From letter by W. P. Alexander, Honolulu, November 17, 1849:
The government is laboring to dissolve the old feudal
system and to give the people allodial titles to their lands;
for this purpose it will be necessary that the lands be
surveyed. I have thought that the work of surveying
might afford the very exercise I needed and thus allow
me to recruit my health in performing a valuable work
for the nation and, meanwhile, support my family without
any expense to the Board. All the brethren whom I have




254


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


been able to consult, advise me to adopt this course so
soon as the Seminary at Lahainaluna can spare me.
From  letter by $. N. Castle, Honolulu, November
13, 1849:
By the ship Montreal which sails soon, Mrs. Richards
and two daughters, Mr. Paris and his little daughters,
Mr. C. B. Andrews, Mr. Clark's oldest son and daughter,
Mr. Hitchcock's oldest son, Mr. Alexander's oldest son,
and Mrs. Chamberlain's two oldest daughters take passage.
From letter by R. Armstrong, Honolulu, November
30, 1849:
We are glad to welcome back to their native land the
sons and daughters of the first missionaries. A few
evenings ago I had great pleasure in introducing Samuel
Ruggles to the king and chiefs. It was truly gratifying
to see with what warmth they received him and inquired
for his parents. He is now teaching the Charity School,
mostly made up of half caste children, with a salary of
$800 a year. This is a very important institution and
must be sustained. Asa Thurston, Jr., I trust will find
some good situation and remain on the islands.
From Report of Kohala Station, by Rev. E. Bond,
1849:
That the Christianization of the Hawaiians has outstripped their civilization is a matter of common report
and, strangely enough, missionaries have been held accountable for this supposed anomalous and false state of
things, and stigmatized by some as narrow and bigoted in
their views and teachings because, forsooth, it exists. But
it may safely be assumed as an incontrovertible fact that




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1848-1850 255
this result of missionary labor which is here witnessed instead of being faulty and unnatural is the only order in
which Providence ever develops a sound and healthful
civilization. The Bible comes first with it authoritative
and solemn claims upon each individual man. And it is
one of the most blessed characteristics of this Holy Book
that its chief behests, weighty though they are as eternity,
and involving interests vast as infinity, can yet be comprehended by the mind and obeyed by the heart of a
savage, albeit he might be months or years even mastering
the first idea of civilized life. The simplest teachings
of the Gospel once believingly received they become the
corner stones of civilization upon which may be builded
a superstructure symmetrical and enduring. Connected
with our history for 1849 is an event which brought sadness to all our hearts. On the morning of the twentyfirst of December the Sanctuary of God, which we had
occupied but four short years, was swept from us by a
violent gale from the southwest. The stroke fell with a
desolating power upon our hearts. We were totally unprepared for the afflicting dispensation. He who has
brought us through this sixth trouble will not fail, if we
are His, to bring us out of the seventh. The future must
reveal what the present cannot tell us of His purposes.
Just one week after the fall of our house we met and
cleared away the floor, the broken timbers, and rubbish.
Then we sat down and on the spot where we had been
expecting, the next Sabbath but one, to unite in commemorating afresh the love of our crucified Saviour we
prayed, and wept, remembering Zion-Zion desolate and
afflicted. There likewise, we consulted together and resolved, in God's name, to commence the preparation of
materials for a new house without delay.
1851. My own little school has been continued through
the year. At the station a thatched house of worship,
about sixty feet in length, has been erected to answer our
necessities until better accommodations can be prepared.




256


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


From letter by D. Baldwin, Tahain, January 28,
1850:
Our congregation is not greatly diminished notwithstanding the many deaths and there appears to be a liberal
spirit in contributing for the support of the pastor, for
completing their house of worship, and other objects. Fifteen of our church members have gone, the last year, to
California to dig gold. Most of them have given a share of
what they obtained to the Lord. One Hebera Upai who
found he had cleared four hundred dollars gave fifty
dollars to the American Board, which I reported to our
Secular Agent, to constitute me a life member of the
Board. Not one who went to California is known to have
dishonored his profession there. It was a kind of first
experiment of our church members in a foreign land
and we were not a little gratified at numerous testimonies
that they had stood aloof from gambling, drinking, Sabbath breaking, and other evil practices that would meet
them in every part of California. Our schools are flourishing. We have lately held an examination of them and,
connected with it, a Juvenile Temperance celebration and
feast at which seven hundred children, mostly of Lahaina,
were present.
Honolulu November 20 1850. We are about sending to
the United States our two oldest children. The vessel
is now at anchor here and is bound to New Bedford
direct.
From letter by A. S. Cooke, Honolulu, February 22,
1850:
Notwithstanding all discouragements the school for the
young chiefs has proved a great blessing to the nation.
The whole school has probably cost the nation but a trifle
more than any one of the scholars would have done, had
they been at large, and it will, we hope, ultimately work
the salvation of a few. Miss Bernice Pauahi during the
ten years she has been with us has cost us less anxiety




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1848-1850     257
than almost any other scholar has done in a week. She
would not engage herself to either one of the princes before they left for Europe. She is now engaged to the
most respectable young man in Honolulu, C. R. Bishop,
Esq., "Collector General of Customs."
From letter by R. Armstrong, Honolulu, April 18,
1850:
At times I feel as though I must break away from so
much that is disgusting and vile. But when I look at the
nation, especially the young, the sixteen thousand children
in the schools, my heart grows warm and I feel likedholding on. My report for the Legislature, now in session, is
ready and I hope to send it to you in a few days. Our
educational interests are advancing, the demand for English education increases among the natives, there are over
three hundred children now on the islands studying the
English language. A year ago there was not half this
number.
June 30, 1850:
I am obliged to write you in haste on account of the
smallpox that rages fearfully here among the natives and
demands our whole time and attention. I am in it all the
day long and such spectacles of suffering I never expected
to see on earth as I now behold every hour of the day.
From letter by E. Bond, Kohala, October 3, 1850:
The letters addressed to the Prudential Committee by
Rev. Messrs. Paris and C. B. Andrews I found in duplicate at our Depository in Honolulu. The proposition or
suggestion made by them of a Mission to the Caroline and
Kingsmill Group, now called the Gilbert Islands, struck
me as excellent, and we as a church in Kohala would
pledge ourselves to supply our proportion of the funds
needed for the enterprise and bless God that so worthy
an enterprise was opened for us at our very door, as it were.




258         THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
An application was recently made me to take an office
under the government with a salary of $3000, but neither
duty nor inclination led me in that direction, though the
situation would have suited my natural tastes precisely.2
2Mr. S. N. Castle's letters of 1849 and 1850-not given hereshow most clearly the difficulties brought to the Mission families by
the great rise in the price of food and provisions in general, consequent upon the discovery of gold in California in 1849, and the
demand in California for provisions before the agriculture of California had fairly begun. They also show Mr. Castle's great sympathy with the Mission as the Secular Agent of the American
Board.-Editor.




CHAPTER XXII


JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1851-1853
F  ROM letter by R. Armstrong, Honolulu, FebruF  y    ary 18, 1851:
Mr. Luther Severance, United States Commissioner, is here and we like him much. He is a plain,
clear-headed republican. Mr. Allen, your Consul, is also
a first-rate man. In fact they are both well adapted to the
posts they occupy. Mr. Severance is just the man for the
times here, cool, able, and decided. His feelings, too, are
deeply enlisted in our cause. I do not know that he and
I differ at all in our views of existing political events, and
he is doing all he can to arouse Hon. Daniel Webster.
From   a general letter of the Mission, Honolulu,
June 3, 1851:
After a separation of two years we are, in the good
Providence of God, again assembled in General Meeting.
Shortly after our last General Meeting, in 1849, the French
Consul, M. Dillon, aided by the fearful parade of arms
and soldiery from the Pursevant, attempted to frighten
this feeble nation into an admission of intoxicating drinks
to an unlimited extent and almost duty free, but we rejoiced and gave thanks to God that there was moral courage enough in this kingdom to say no and abide the consequences. During the past winter the same attempt has
been renewed by the French Commissioner, M. Perrin, but
in a far more courteous manner. This government has
been greatly vexed and perplexed by these frequent and
protracted obstacles, thrown in the way of all attention to
259




60


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


internal improvements. Schools, roads, and prisons have
been almost entirely neglected by government officers, while
each have been engaged in vindicating the government
from any infraction of treaties. The King and his Privy
Council have at length agreed to refer the question to the
decision of the Legislature, which is now in session,
whether the duty on spirituous liquors shall or shall not
be reduced. The decision of this question we think we
can anticipate with a good degree of moral certainty. The
Representatives of the people of Kamehameha III are
too well instructed by their constituents to think for a moment of facilitating the admission of this fiery demon
among them, whatever might be their own private preference in the matter. We are of the opinion that now is
our golden opportunity for acting directly upon the foreign
community of the islands and if we shall neglect to improve it we shall lose much of the vantage ground on
which we stand. We, therefore, reluctantly and with some
misgivings decided to open our school at Punahou for
pupils from other than the mission families, so far as the
circumstance of the case will allow. A Committee of our
Mission recommended that during the year 1852, Providence permitting, an expedition be fitted out for the purpose of exploring the groups of Micronesia and, if practicable, of establishing a Mission on one of the Caroline
Islands as a central position from which the Gospel may
be sent to the other Islands of that and other groups.
This Committee also recommended that an Auxiliary
Missionary Society be formed at the Sandwich Islands to
co-operate with the A. B. C. F. M. in the support of the
Gospel in the Hawaiian and other Islands of the Pacific,
and that contributions be solicited for the objects of the
Society.
From letter by E. W, Clark, Honolulu, August 16,
1851:
Yesterday a deeply interesting discussion took place
before our Hawaiian Agricultural Society. This Society




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1851-18535      6i
embraces nearly all Agriculturists and Merchants and
many of the Mechanics in the Islands. There has been
a disposition on the part of some to connect distilleries
with the sugar making business in order to convert the
skimmings, refuse sugar, etc., into an article of commerce
as is done in the West Indies. At the present time
planters are embarrassed by a depreciation in the price
of sugar and molasses. On this ground a resolution was
brought forward recommending to the government to
allow spirits to be made by the planters under certain
restrictions. It came up yesterday for discussion and occupied nearly the whole day. The discussion was conducted with much courtesy and calmness on both sides
before a full and interested house. The friends of temperance, as you may well suppose, rallied their strength.
On this side of the question the American Commissioner,
Hon. L. Severance, and Chief Justice Lee, not to name
others, rendered essential service. The subject assured a
thoroughgoing temperance discussion and the temperance
side came off quite triumphant.   The final decision
showed only three or four votes in favor of the resolution
and, to the honor of the planters, nearly all were on the
temperance side of the question. I need not say that the
friends of temperance feel greatly cheered by this result.
An important advance has been made.
From  letter by E. W. Clark, Honolulu, September
12, 1851:
Mr. T. E. Taylor is quite popular here and is a good,
faithful preacher. I suggested to him, when he was making up his mind to come from the coast and supply Mr.
Damon's place during his absence, that Providehce might
open the way for his remaining here as pastor for the
foreign population after Brother Damon came back. We
all love Mr. Damon and hope to see him back and engaged
in his useful labors for seamen.




262


TIE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


From   letter by R. Armstrong, Honolulu, to Dr.
Anderson, January 30, 1852:
A child ldoe not more naturally look to his parents,
than the natives to their missionary for direction and assistance in obtaining their rights to their lands, fishing
privileges, freedom from oppression, etc. Without such
aid many of them would never obtain their rights. I
think, too, some attention to these secular matters, after
the example of Neff and Oberlin, has a good effect upon
the health and spirits of the missionary and, if he is prudent, it increases his influence among his people. I love
to preach and, when the Master calls, I shall joyfully step
back to the pulpit and there stand while He shall honor
me with a place in His earthly vineyard.
February 25. You will be gratified to learn that we
have now a fair prospect of securing the services of Rev.
T. E. Taylor as preacher for the English speaking residents. He has been preaching in the Seamen's Chapel for
a year past with much acceptance to a large proportion of
our residents while Mr. Damon was absent in the States.
June 8.   The new Constitution for the nation was
adopted yesterday by both houses of the Legislature. It
will be a great improvement, I think, on the old. The
clause excluding clergymen from participation in politics
was stricken out after a discussion of about four days. In
this discussion I took a prominent part for I considered
such a clause wrong in principle, calculated to gratify the
opposers of missionaries and of all religions, and to be a
stigma on ministers of the Gospel. The discussion developed more native eloquence than I ever before witnessed
on the islands. I wish you could have heard Hon. John Ii.
His bursts of Christian feeling moved every heart and
some of his strokes would have done honor to Patrick
Henry. He is one of God's noblemen, meek and gentle as
a lamb, but where he sees the religion of Christ assailed
he is a lion. I do believe he would be a martyr, if called
to it.




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1851-1853      263
From letter by Titus Coan, Hilo, January 30, 1852:
Our contributions are al ys taken up on the Sabbath,
previous to the first Monday of each month. It is a most
exhilarating and delightful picture to see the contributions of the little children as they come in single file to
the altar and deposit their gifts. No class gives with
such apparent cheerfulness.  Their footsteps are light,
their spirits buoyant, and their faces radiant with joy.
March 3. So soon as the second eruption on Mauna
Loa broke out I determined D. V. to visit it. Accordingly,
arrangements having been made and Dr. Wetmore having
consented to go with me, we set out at five P. M. on the
twenty-third of February and went up to a little village
five miles distant and in the outskirts of the great forest
which separates Hilo from the mountains. This we did
in order to take an early start on the next morning. At
half past three P. M. February twenty-seventh we reached
the awful crater and stood above in the light of its fires.
It was a moment of unutterable interest. I seemed to be
standing in the presence and before the burning throne of
the Eternal God and while every other sound was hushed
He, above, spoke. I was ten thousand feet above the sea
in a vast solitude untrodden by the foot of man or beast
and amidst silence unbroken by the voice of any created
being. Here I stood, almost blinded with the insufferable
brightness, almost deafened with the clamor and roar of
this fearful trumpet, and almost terrified with the awful
and terrible scene. The heat was so intense that the crater
could not be approached within forty or fifty yards from
the windward side and probably not within two miles
from the leeward side. The eruption, as before stated,
commenced on the very summit of the mountain Mauna
Loa, but the lateral pressure of the emboweled fusion became so great as to force itself through a depression in the
side of the mountain all the way from the summit to the
plain where it burst forth with terrible force. Night




264


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


coming on we now retired about a mile from the crater,
but where we had the most perfect command of the whole
scene, and here we took our station for the night, not
indeed to sleep for this was impossible, but to listen to the
awful roar and to watch the wonderful motions of this
great furnace of Jehovah. During the night the scene
surpassed all powers of description. Vast columns of this
matter, fused to white heat, were being continuously shot
up in the form of billows, pyramids, cones, towers, turrets,
spires, etc., while the descending showers of fusion poured
in constant cataract of fire upon the rim of the crater and
over the surrounding area, each falling shower containing
matter enough to sink the proudest ship should it fall
upon her deck. A large fissure opened through the lower
side of the rim of the crater through which the molten
lava flowed constantly, pouring and flowing down the
mountain in a deep, broad channel, at the rate, probably,
of sixteen miles an hour. This fiery stream we could trace
all the way from its source down the mountain for a distance of twenty or thirty miles until it was hidden from
the eye by its own windings in the woods toward iilo.
At daybreak, on the twenty-eighth, we retraced our steps
down the mountain, rejoined the two men we had left
behind and, by a forced march, reached the confines of
the forest at four P. M. It was Saturday and we here
determined to rest on the Sabbath "according to the commandment," there being an abundance of wood and water
in this place. On reaching home we found that the lava
had not approached the shore, but was still spreading
itself in the interior regions.
March 6. The crater is still in violent action. No decrease. The fire has not yet reached the shore. Perhaps
the Lord will hold it back. Out atmosphere is full of
smoke and ashes, and charred leaves from the forest are
falling thick around us. The light is seen one hundred
and twenty miles out at sea.




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1851-1853      265
From letter by E. Bond, Kohala, April 2, 1852:
Mr. Armstrong finding difficulty in the management of
the school funds requested me to act as treasurer of the
fund for the common schools of Kohala as the only ground
of hope for our schools. Should I have refused? The
well-being of our schools was regarded as a vital point
in our work and, besides, it was perfectly clear that Mr.
Armstrong's services as Minister of Public Instruction,
however energetically directed, could not be rendered effective without our hearty co-operation.  From  1848 I
have acted therefore as treasurer of this fund at no small
sacrifice of time ard strength and feeling. I have husbanded with all care the funds received so that the teachers
should not lack their pay and the schools no more be
weighted down with debts. The taxes were chiefly paid
in goods of all descriptions, until the last year, all of
which had to be stored and cared for continually.
From general letter of Mission to Rev. R. Anderson, D.D., Honolulu, June 1, 1852:
Would that you could look in upon our assembly and
mingle in our deliberations. The first glance of your eye
upon us would show you that we are not the youth and
striplings whom you sent out to preach the Gospel to the
heathen. You would see a company on whom time has
been doing its corroding work for ten, fifteen, twenty, and
more than thirty years. Many a cheek is becoming furrowed. Some heads are gray, and spectacles are multiplying on our faces. You would see our assembly intermingled with our beloved offspring, who are already double
the number of their parents. Some of our daughters
overtop the height of their mothers and sons there are,
obedient too, who no longer look up to their fathers.
Time is indeed making war on the persons of your missionaries and bringing forward another generation to
occupy their place upon earth. The Royal School, formerly
taught for the children of chiefs only, has lately assumed




266


ITHE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


a new form. A new and elegant building has been erected
for it in a pleasant location in the rear of Honolulu at an
expense of eight thousand dollars and a new and well
qualified teacher has been procured for it from the United
States. Assistant teachers are also employed. The feature
which now gives this school great interest to this place and
this nation is, that it is now open to the children of all
foreign residents. Its pupils number about sixty. During
our present session we have attended an examination of
this school and could not but notice, with pride and
pleasure, how large and valuable a portion of its pupils
were from families which once belonged to this mission,
but who went out from us to government offices and to
other employments.
In 1840, under the instruction of Mr. Richards, the
chiefs adopted a brief constitution for the nation and, in
the two or three following years, a new code of laws took
the place of the first, descending to more particulars and
dispensing justice more widely. Until that time every
one in authority throughout the islands had made laws
according to his own caprice or instructions from superiors. But now, for the first time, it was proclaimed that
nothing would henceforward be called law that had not
been printed with the king's signature. This was as great
a step as any nation could well take at once. It broke up
the foundation of the universal tyranny and deception
which reigned everywhere and rested as an incubus on the
people. It was a first step towards establishing some rights
of the people who henceforth had their tongues loosed in
every quarter to plead their own cause against arbitrary
power. There is one other sign of progress in the nation
more important than all which have been mentioned. We
refer to the work of the Commission appointed by the
government to settle land titles. They have already investigated the claims of nearly all the people of the islands.
The titles they give are not to be disturbed or questioned
by any of the authorities of the islands, nor can they be
revoked even by the highest courts of the country. Too




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1851-1853 267
much praise cannot be bestowed on the high chiefs of
this nation for according to the people the rights enjoyed
under the most liberal governments. The children of missionaries and ex-missionaries have formed themselves into
a society for mutual improvement and for benevolent
purposes, one object of which will be to support Dr.
Luther Halsey Gulick, one of their own number, as their
missionary to Micronesia and we have no doubt they will
be able to do it, if they possess the self-denying spirit of
the Gospel.
From letter by Rev. E. W. Clark, Honolulu, June
8, 1852:
The mission to Micronesia has called our thoughts away
from ourselves and afforded an object of deep and stirring
interest. We have mingled our prayers and tears together
in social worship and around the table of our Lord. The
call to go up with these new brethren to their untried field
of labor, after having borne the burden and heat of the
day in these islands, has come home to some of us. I
little thought that the task would fall to me so far worn
out in the service as I am to accompany these young missionaries to Micronesia, but I did not feel at liberty to refuse if, in the opinion of the brethren, no better arrangements could be made. Few persons suffer so much at sea
as I do, but I shall go forward, I trust, with cheerfulness,
trusting in an everlasting arm.  I have offered to relinquish
the pastorship of the church and attend to other labors
demanded at this post, or to take the oversight of part of
the church, which now consists of more than two thousand
members constantly increasing from other churches, besides
the addition on profession. To give you some idea of the
work to be done here, Brother Coan has just given me the
names of one hundred and seventy-seven of his church
members, reported to be in Honolulu, whom he wished me
to look up and report to him. Church members from
other churches, besides Hilo, are flocking to Honolulu.




268


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


Some of them remain only for a season, others permanently.
June 10, 1852. I now write you for the first time as
Secretary of the Hawaiian Missionary Society and herewith send you the first report of our Society. We hope
to have materials for a longer report another year. I
cannot but regard the formation of the Society last year
as exceedingly opportune. It is destined, I trust, to take
an important part in carrying forward the missionary
work in this part of the world.
June 15. This First Church in Honolulu, besides supporting their own pastor, building their own meeting
house, etc., has raised within a few months nearly a
thousand dollars for foreign missions.'
July 12, 1852. There was a full and attentive audience
at the church last evening. A good impression I think
was made. He hope to get off tomorrow, in the schooner
Caroline for Micronesia. You will hear from me again
when I return, if the Lord will.
From letter by E. W. Clark, Honolulu, January 20,
1853:
Letters left here December fourth giving you a full account of the missionary expedition to Micronesia. I trust
those letters will soon be in Boston. I can only say here
that the objects of the voyage were successfully accomplished.
From   letter by Titus Coan, Hilo, April 30, 1853:
In all parts of Hilo and Puna the people are rebuilding
and improving their houses of worship, the old temporary
grass buildings giving place to framed and stone houses.
Of these seven have been completed during the past year
and as many more are commenced and in various stages
i By the words, "Foreign Missions," Mr. Clark means the missions of the Hawaiian Churches to Micronesia and The Marquesas
Islands.




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1851-1853           269
of progress. Besides these quite a number of smaller
houses have been built by the people for their little social
meetings for prayer, conference, etc. Reckoning all the
cash, materials, and labor devoted to meeting houses during the past year it will be a moderate computation to put
the sum at three thousand dollars, more than one thousand
of which have been paid in cash. All this has been spontaneous on the part of the people.
From letter by W. P. Alexander, ZLhainaluna, April
16, 1853:
God has raised up some young men well adapted to the
work of the ministry. In the class about to graduate in
the Seminary are four, viz.: Nahinu, Kuaea, Kaukau, and
Josepa, who, I think, are decided Christians, good scholars
for Hawaiians, well furnished with Bible knowledge, as
well instructed in theology as any of our Hawaiian Ministers, and ardently desirous of engaging in the good work
of carrying the Gospel to the darkened pagans. We need
these young men in our Hawaiian field, but I think they
will do more to build up Christ's Kingdom here by carrying the Gospel to Fatuhiwa than by remaining among us.
NATIVE PREACHERS
From a general letter of the Mission, Honolulu, June,
1853:
There are three ordained native preachers of the Gospel
connected with this Mission, viz.: Rev. J. Kekela, at
Kahuku; Rev. S. Kauwealoha, at Kaanapali; and Rev.
David Malo, at Keokea, on East Maui. These brethren
have thus far given good satisfaction to the churches and
congregations over whom they have been placed and the
blessing of God has attended their labors. Four promising young men have recently graduated at Lahainaluna,




270


THEE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


who are looking forward to the Gospel Ministry and, if
the way shall be opened for them, they purpose to go on
foreign missions. We have many valuable native helpers
in our churches, who are a great assistance in conducting
district meetings and who are ready for every good word
and work. Since the return of Messrs. Clark and Kekela
from Micronesia, the latter has visited and preached to all
the churches on Oahu, Maui, Molokai, and Hawaii, and has
informed them of the moral desolations which he saw in
those Islands and their perishing need of the bread of life.
A MACEDONIAN IN THE MIDST OF Us
Some time in the month of March a Marquesian Chief,
by the name of Matunui, and a son-in-law of his, a native
of Maui, by the name of Pau, arrived at Lahaina on board
the whaleship Tamerlane. The object of said Chief, and
his son-in law, in visiting these islands at this time is to
get some missionaries to go and live with him and his
people on the Island of Fatuhiwa, of the Marquesas Islands, and teach them the word of God. Two of our native
ministers, and four of the recent graduates of Lahainaluna, together with several school teachers and deacons in
our churches, are among the candidates who have volunteered to go on this mission. Rev. B. W. Parker, one of
the company who went to the Marquesas in 1833, but
was unable to remain there has been appointed to accompany them to Fatuhiwa.
The Prudential Committee will be happy to learn that
the second foreign church in Honolulu is in a flourishing
state. They have recently given the Rev. T. E. Taylor a
call to be their pastor with a salary of $2000. His installation took place Sabbath evening, June 5th, at which
time several of the missionary brethren took part in the
consecrating services. Many of the children and youths
in the Hawaiian Mission Children's Society are connected with this church and congregation.




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1851-1853 271
From  letter by E. W. Clark, Honolulu, June 14,
1853:
You will rejoice that our people are again taking hold
of the missionary work with a truly missionary spirit. Instructions in the Hawaiian language were given last Sabbath in the stone church in presence of a crowded audience
to two ordained native missionaries, Kekela and Kauwealoha, and to two teachers who are to sail in a day or
two, with their wives, for Fatuhiwa, one of the Marquesas
Islands. A crowded meeting was also attended on Sabbath
evening in the Seamen's Chapel in relation to their embarkation. Matunui, a chief of Fatuhiwa, was present and
expressed his thanks to the audience for furnishing him
with the teachers for which he came. Your heart would
have been full to overflowing if you could have been
present at these two meetings, especially if you could have
understood the addresses of the native brethren about to
leave us. I could not but exclaim, what has God wrought
at the Sandwich Islands! The congregation under my
charge, after having contributed nearly six thousand dollars last year to different objects, has responded to this new
call and I have received, in a few days, between four and
five hundred dollars for this new object. The foreign
community is also taking hold of the work.
June 21, 1853. The company of missionaries for Fatuhiwa, Marquesas Islands, embarked on the sixteenth.
The occasion was one of scarcely less interest than the
embarkation last year for Micronesia. Prayer was offered
on deck by Brother Thurston in native and by Brother
Taylor in English. The vessel was larger and the accommodations more comfortable than in the Caroline last
year. All seemed in good spirits. Rev. James Kekela,
my companion to Micronesia last year and for several
years a pupil under my instructions at Lahainaluna, is one
of the company. I regard him as a very dear Christian
brother. In no Hawaiian should I have greater confidence
for such a work; and his wife, for many years a pupil in




272


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


the Female Seminary at Wailuku, is one of our very best
native women. They are of kindred spirits and have
proved themselves worthy of our confidence. They leave
behind a very promising little daughter, about two years
old, in charge of Miss Ogden. This was a very serious
trial to them, but they thought it for the good of the child
to leave her. They leave, also, a church and people who
clung to them to the last. Few missionaries make more
serious sacrifice than Kekela and Naomi have done. Rev.
Samuel Kauwealoha, another of the company, is our next
best native preacher. They were fellow students at Lahainaluna and warm   friends.  Isaiah Kaiwi and Lot
Kuaihelani go out with them as school teachers. Brother
Parker (Rev. B. W. Parker) goes with them to return in
the vessel. He has once been at the Marquesas and has
some knowledge of the language, which is quite similar to
the Hawaiian. Mr. Bicknell, a pious mechanic and a member of Rev. Mr. Taylor's church, goes out with the company and will remain if circumstance favor it. He is not
under the direction of our Society. The vessel was chartered to do our business for two thousand dollars. The
outfit of the missionaries, etc., will cost about one thousand
dollars more. These expenses will all be borne by our
Hawaiian Missionary Society.2
June 28, 1853. I send you the first Annual Report
of the Mission Children's Society. It presents our children, you will see, in a hopeful aspect. We can almost
say, "It is enough, now lettest thou thy servants depart
in peace." You will not blame us for desiring our children
to be well educated. Without it they cannot perform the
work which Providence seems to be laying upon them.
I will send you the second Annual Report of our Missionary Society of the Hawaiian Churches as soon as
printed.
P. S. You will desire to be kept informed about the


2 This was four years before the first Morning Star was built
and sent out to the Pacific under the Rev. Hiram Bingham.




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1851-1853 273
smallpox. The yellow flag is flying all about us, but we
remain safe as yet. Our hearts are caused to bleed for
the poor people suffering about us. Vigorous measures
are being taken to arrest the progress of the disease. The
people are very generally being vaccinated. We have
heard of only a few cases on any of the other Islands, but
they can hardly expect to escape. They will, however,
become more generally protected by vaccination. The
disease was quite fatal when it first commenced. It is
becoming less so. It is not certainly known how it
reached the Islands, but in some way from California.
We have been apprehensive, for several years, that it would
reach the Islands in consequence of our proximity to
California.
November 5, 1853. You will be glad to hear of Mr.
Parker's safe return from  the Marquesas Islands.  He
arrived on the twenty-first, after an absence of four and
a half months. He will report particulars to you. They
found things as favorable, on the whole, as they expected.




CHAPTER XXIII


JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1853-1859
TF    ROM    letter by E. Bond, Kohala, October 27,
1853:
At the first meeting with my people which I
attended, after my return from the Mission Meeting, I
noticed very unusual indications which I supposed accidental. These indications were a greater earnestness in
prayer and a quiet seriousness of deportment in all adults
and youths, and attention fixed and all-absorbing to the
word spoken. At the next station, instead of being obliged
to wait the gathering of the people, I found them gathered
and wrestling in prayer. To my unfeigned surprise I
heard, at the door, fervent petitions for the Spirit of God
to go with the pastor in his tour and also considerable
portions of the sermon delivered on the previous Sabbath
incorporated into the prayer. I must leave older brethren
to speak of former times and for those who may have
statistics to produce and I will confine myself to my own
observations regarding licentiousness during the thirteen
past years in this single district. To my mina nothing
is more evident in the past history of the people than a
gradual improvement in this department of morals.
January 13, 1854. Mr. Severance, our late Commissioner, has sailed for the United States around the Cape.
We regretted to have him leave.
From letter by J. S. Emerson, Wialua, January 2,
1854:
Mr. and Mrs. Rice feel it their duty to leave Punahou
for another post of labor. Brother Rice has been the
274




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1853-1859 275
mainspring in erecting three stone meeting houses in
Brother Clark's field, all of which are covered with
shingle roofs and are among the best houses in the islands.
These things would never have been done except by a man
of tact like Brother Rice. He is a good preacher of the
Gospel and is well received in all of our pulpits.
From letter by Titus Coan, Hilo, January 17, 1854:
Probably you have ere this heard of the burning of the
Hilo Boys' Boarding School buildings. This, we suppose,
was the act of an incendiary, but no trace has yet been
found of the wretch who did it. We feel a strong desire
to rebuild and to raise a brighter Phoenix from the ashes.
For this purpose the native church of Hilo has given two
hundred dollars and the foreigners three hundred dollars.
From  letter by R. Armstrong, Honolulu, June 3,
1854:
Poor dear Brother Taylor, a good man honored of
God, and greatly beloved by his people here, has consumption, has taken a dismission from his church and gone to
Tahiti to try the effect of a voyage. What a mysterious
Providence! Everything connected with the church and
society looked bright and flourishing. Suddenly a cloud
has come over it.
From letter by E. W. Clark, Honolulu, May 3, 1854.
This letter mentions the first contribution ever made for
missionary work in Japan.
At a meeting of the Directors of the Hawaiian Home
Missionary Society, held last evening, the following resolution was adopted:
"Resolved, In view of a benevolent person in Honolulu
having given the sum of one hundred dollars to the Home
Missionary Society for sending a missionary to Japan,
we now devote the sum of one thousand dollars to this
object to be held at the disposal of the A. B. C. F. M.,




276


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


and the secretary is hereby directed to communicate this
Resolution to the Society in Boston."
Our Treasurer will credit to the Board the above sum
to be disposed of at the discretion of the Prudential Committee for the object specified. The Society has been led
to this step by the arrival here of the United States
Sloop of War Saratoga, from Japan, with the intelligence
that Commodore Perry has concluded a Treaty of Amity
and Friendship with that country, thus affording the hope
that the way is preparing for the spread of the Gospel in
Japan. 
From  a General Mission letter, Honolulu, June 7,
1854:
The Mission, at its meeting on the twenty-second
ultimo, voted to dissolve the former compact which provided for the Annual Meeting, consisting entirely of the
missionaries of the American Board, which met annually
and was known as the General Meeting, and to unite with
the pastors and representatives of the churches under the
banner of the Hawaiian Evangelical Association. A committee was, therefore, appointed to revise the Constitution and the following, after discussion and amendment,
was adopted, viz.:
"This body shall be called the Hawaiian Evangelical
Association, and shall consist of those who have subscribed
to the original article of compact, and of others who hereafter shall subscribe to this Constitution, after having
become elected members by a vote of not less than twothirds of the members resident at the Hawaiian Islands."
David Malo, whose name has long been familiar to you
as a most intelligent co-worker with us, departed this life
in October, 1853, having labored acceptably thirteen
months in the ministry. We mourn his loss, and his field
At this time The American Board had not commenced their
missionary work in Japan, so this money was devoted to the erection of the stone church edifice in Yokohama.




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1853-1859      277
is without a pastor. The churches left vacant by Rev.
Samuel Kauwealoha and Rev. James Kekela, who went
to Fatuhiwa, were each supplied by young licentiates
from Lahainaluna Seminary, who have acquitted themselves well. On the twelfth of April one of them, Mr.
A. Kaukau, was ordained and installed pastor of the
church at Kaanapali.
From letter by Titus Coan, Hilo, September 20,
1854:
My visit to Kohala was very refreshing. Brother and
Sister Bond have toiled patiently and nobly there. Isolated as they are from enlightened society, they have made
themselves contented and happy, and instead of indulging
in a restless and complaining spirit or in roaming after
change and excitement, they have addressed themselves
to the work of the Lord with that zeal and fidelity which
conquers obstacles and secures results. For five years that
people have been toiling on their new meeting house, the
walls are up, the roof is on, and the tower is erected.
The windows, doors, floor, ceiling, pulpit, plastering,
painting, etc., remain to be finished. You will rejoice to
hear that this government gives four thousand dollars to
replace Brother Lyman's School House in Hilo, which was
burned last year. If your Board gives one thousand dollars
the prospects of the school will be auspicious.
From letter by R. Armstrong, Honolulu, September,
1854:
I wrote to you August twenty-first that the Trustees of
Oahu College had given a call to E. G. Beckwith, late
Principal of the Royal School, to become president of that
Institution and that he had the subject under consideration. I have now to state that Mr. Beckwith has accepted
the invitation and has already moved into the Institution.
He will commence his labors next week.
December, 1854. Our late King Kamehameha III was




278


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


greatly and justly beloved by his people and they, as is
natural, deeply mourn his departure. He was good to his
people and to foreigners, especially to missionaries, who
ever enjoyed his confidence and favor and received many
benefits from him. When he came to the throne his
people were mere serfs, without property and without
political rights, without education or civilization. He has
left them a nation of freeholders, nearly all possessing
more or less property and living under the protection of
a liberal constitution and laws they themselves have sanctioned by their representatives. In fact, from an absolute
despotism aggravated by all the evils of a barbarous state,
Kamehameha III saw his people raised to a state of intelligence, order, freedom and Christian civilization perhaps
never before witnessed in the same number of years among
any people. Possessed of a clear and vigorous mind
and a kind heart, he was quick to discern and ever ready
to acquiesce in measures for the good of his people and
of foreigners in his dominion, of whom he never seemed
to be at all jealous.
From  letter by E. W. Clark, Honolulu, March S0,
1855:
I have received a letter from Mr. McNeill, one of the
Secretaries of the American Bible Society, granting our
request in regard to the printing and editing of the New
Testament in parallel columns of English and Hawaiian,
proposing to prepare stereotype plates of the work, that
copies may be printed off as needed instead of printing an
edition of ten thousand at one time. This is a good suggestion, but it will make it still more important that the
Hawaiian part be made as correct as possible.
June 20. Mr. George E. Beckwith, brother of the
President, has been invited by the Trustees to become a
teacher in Oahu College. He, as well as his brother, has
acquired great reputation here as a teacher, especially
as a teacher of the languages.




n"I(c  ) amp lo 11'e Wapoi am~S spappe ml"t~ awab~ stims00la-ImN QRJ




I I, i
1    401%    *   




JOURNALS AND        LETTERS, 1853-1859      279
June 22. You will perhaps hear of Dr. Pierson's embarkation for Micronesia and Mr. Shipman's decision to
remain at these islands before this reaches you.
My mind has long been made up that we should not
attempt a mission on the islands of Micronesia without
a missionary vessel adapted to the purpose. If we put
missionaries on any of those low islands, provision must
be made for visiting them once or twice a year without
fail. I should think it unwise to send even native missionaries there without such a provision. With such an
arrangement I see not why missionaries may not reside
on some of those islands with comparative comfort. It
will be, however, a matter of experiment. They will be
lonely and will need a large share of natural buoyancy of
spirits. But if they can be often visited and furnished
with regular supplies and an opportunity of visiting other
islands, should they desire it, life can be made quite tolerable, especially if their work should prosper. In view
of this subject the following resolution was passed at a
late meeting of the Directors of our Society:
"Resolved, That we regard it essential to the further
extension of missionary operations in the North Pacific
that a Missionary Vessel be procured for this work. We,
therefore, cordially approve the request, which has been
forwarded to the A. B. C. F. M., for such a vessel, by the
Hawaiian Evangelical Association, and recommend that
the vessel be owned by the American Board and under the
direction of the Home Missionary Society of the Hawaiian
Islands?'
At a late missionary meeting in my congregation the
subject of a vessel was taken up and about one thousand
dollars pledged for the object. Most of it will be paid
if a vessel should be forthcoming. Will not the children
of America, as well as of England, take hold of this subject?  If a vessel is sent we shall want some more men
for Micronesia.
October 1. You will probably hear before this reaches
you of the death of our Brother Hitchcock. His stay with




280


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


us was short after his return from  the United States.
He died much lamented by his former people.
From   letter by R. Armstrong, Honolulu, January
2, 1856:
During the year 1855, just closed, I visited all the
islands and every missionary station in the course of my
official duty, and had good opportunities for seeing how
the brethren conducted the affairs of their respective stations and the success that has crowned their labors. I
found them all at their posts, hard at work watching
for souls and promoting the welfare of the people in various ways. As a class they are very laborious and selfdenying, and the advancement of their people in knowledge, industry, civilization, and religion, is the best
evidence of their success. I have lived for weeks and
weeks among the natives, lodging with them in their huts,
partaking of their homely fare, and sleeping on their
mats, and the more I see of them the more I bless God
for what he has done for them. I do not believe there
is a community on earth, of the same number, more
entirely pervaded by the blessed Gospel. In the remotest
corner of the land I find a Bible and a hymn book in
every house, if there is nothing else. I visited nearly
every school in the land during the year and feel encouraged on the whole with the progress of education.
It was never more encouraging than now. We have nineteen English schools for native children, exclusively, in
successful operation.
From letter by Titus Coan, Hilo, February 1, 1856:
A volcanic eruption was first noticed at Hilo on the
evening of the eleventh of August, 1855, and from that
day to the present the discharge has been ceaseless and
mighty. For nearly half a year this awful engine of the
Lord has been pumping out the molten lava and still the
supply seems as inexhaustible as ever.




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1853-1859 281
From letted by Rev. L. Smith, on his return from
a visit "o the missionaries in the Marquesas Islands,
May, 1856:
I found the missionaries all well and exceedingly glad
to see me. Let me say at the outset that I have been
exceedingly gratified with what I saw on my visit. The
native missionaries appeared admirably well in all their
relations. They have lived and labored together harmoniously, consequently the Lord has blessed them and is
still blessing them in their self-denying labors. I assisted
in organizing them into a church and in receiving Aberahama Natua, their first convert. He appears well. On
my return I touched first at Hilo. Brother Coan sent
out a crier and announced a special meeting to hear the
Nu Hou (news) from Fatuhiwa, to meet at three o'clock
P. M. And, to my surprise, that large building was well
filled. Several foreigners came in to hear. They all responded, "good news and glad tidings."
From letter by D. Baldwin, September 29, 1856:
One of the most efficient helpers we have had in the
church at Lahaina was a cripple by the name of Kahilupeau. He had no use of his right leg and but a partial
use of his left. But, with one shoe on his left foot and
the. other on his right hand, which he used as a foot,
he might always be seen at the hour of worship on the
Sabbath, or on a week day, making his way for half a
mile through the dusty street, to the house of God. He
was greatly attached to the services of the sanctuary and
profited as much as any one by what he heard. He was
modest and very reserved, but might well be called an
enlightened Christian. Having learned to braid palm
leaf hats, such as are much used by sailors on board the
whaling fleet, he kept the market supplied with them
during the shipping seasons, and as his religion had




282       THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
made him intelligent and enterprising, he traded also in
other articles and was often better supplied with means
than many others. He was a pattern of industry, a
straightforward and consistent Christian. We love to
remember his instructive example, but his work is done,
his day of toil is over. He is no longer called to drag
about a disabled body through the dust under a burning
sun. He has gone to his rest, which will be all the more
welcome and glorious for the humble and painful condition which he occupied on earth.
From letter by E. W. Clark, Honolulu, February 7,
1857:
Our brethren will hail with joy the arrival of the Morning Star and will enter heartily into the plan of extending
their operations to other islands. Mr. Alexander has been
installed as pastor at Wailuku. We are glad to have him
back in the missionary work. Mr. Beckwith, I find, has
made his arrangements, with the approval of the Trustees,
to visit the States. You will be happy to become acquainted with him. He has lately been ordained, and we
regard him as a good preacher as well as a good president.
You will find him warmly enlisted in behalf of the College, and will be happy to afford him every aid in your
power in accomplishing the object of his agency. He
regards the college as intimately connected with the missionary operations in this part of the world, and will be
able to present the subject in a way to interest all missionary people in its behalf. They want more help as well
as more money.
April 1. We shall begin to look for the Morning Star
soon. There has been considerable waking up in my
church and congregation since my return from my visit
to the States. We had a crowded house yesterday at our
quarterly communion. There is also quite a reviving in
the foreign congregations here.




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1853-1859 283
From letter by D. Baldwin, Bristol, Wisconsin,
March 23, 1857:
What is Mr. Armstrong's position?,He has been removed from the Privy Council by a change in his office,
through the persuasion of enemies who would make the
young king believe that his government would be more
popular with the Gospel a little farther off. Mr. Armstrong is now president of the Board of Education and
has to superintend all the interests of the schools in the
islands, all supported by the government. He must attend
to the sources of school revenue, to the supply of teachers,
new laws needed, etc. Besides all this he is always at
liberty to preach on the Sabbath and does half the preaching at the large stone church, whose services could not be
sustained without his aid.
From letter by R. Armstrong, Honolulu, April 3,
1857:
The Morning Star is daily expected. The interest felt
in her by our children of all classes and colors is wonderful. In my Sabbath School of native children about
three hundred shares have been taken.
From letter by E. Bond, Kohala, May 4, 1857:
I had spent the day, April twenty-third, in my berth
on a schooner with a bursting headache, induced by the
fierce heat. It was just about four P. M. when our captain, who is a missionary's son, a brother of Dr. Gulick
of Micronesia, called me to look with him at a brig very
gradually nearing us, which he expected was the long
looked for missionary ship, the Morning Star. Feeling
too unwell to leave the berth, I inquired her appearance
and, receiving his reply, there could be no doubt. "It
is she!" I instantly exclaimed, "there is nothing like that
in these waters!" My berth lost its attraction and I
found myself instantly on deck. One look told me all.




284


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


The thing of life and beauty, adorned with nearly her
full complement of snow-white sails and sitting so daintily
upon the water, could be no other. "Beautiful," we exclaimed. "Nani," said our ninety native passengers,
"nani loa," —"very beautiful!" and so she was.  With
unmingled admiration we scanned her elegant proportions,
her neatly turned stem, her graceful prow, her modest but
significant figurehead, her perfect lines, her tall and beautiful tapering masts, and were filled with delight, when
suddenly, as she approached, a magnificent flag was
thrown to the gentle breeze, which appeared to come along
with her, and from her main topmast head these magic
words, "Morning Star," were unfolded to our excited
gaze! Assurance was made doubly sure and we poured
from ninety throats three as hearty cheers of welcome as
were ever uttered! Captain Moore was soon alongside
in his boat, and as he stepped upon our deck it was my
privilege to extend to him the first missionary welcome
to Hawaii. At his invitation Captain Gulick and I accompanied him on board the Morning Star, and on her
quarterdeck we found and greeted with a no less cordial
welcome to Hawaii, and to a missionary life in the Pacific,
our Brother Bingham and his smiling wife. We were
gratified with a cursory view of the vessel and then, by
Captain Moore's kindness, restored to the deck of our
own little schooner. The latter was then rounded to and,
with great Aloha, we gave our new friends three parting
cheers, which they, with less volume of lungs, immediately returned, and so we parted, they for Honolulu and
we for our homes on Hawaii greatly delighted with the
unexpected interview.
From   letter by E. W. Clark, Honolulu, May 5,
1857:
You will be glad to hear of the safe arrival of the
Morning Star. On the evening of April twenty-third we
first descried her flag as she rounded the headland of




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1853-1859 285
Diamond Point. The next morning the steamer took her
in tow and she was soon alongside of the wharf. She
had hardly reached the wharf before she was thronged
with people eager to examine the mocku missionary (missionary ship). "He moku maikai" (a fine vessel), was
the universal exclamation. All were delighted with the
vessel. Several thousand shares had been taken by the
children here and in other parts of the islands. Preparations had been made, even before my return to the islands,
to present the vessel with a flag on her arrival. This
was a movement of some of the good ladies of Honolulu.
This ceremony came off on Wednesday last. The children
of the Sabbath Schools with the native and foreign shareholders in the vessel, assembled at their respective
churches, and marched two and two to the wharf. The
number assembled, children and adults, could not be less
than three or four thousand; a novel spectacle for Honolulu. Chiefs and people, rich and poor were there. The
vessel remained in port just one week. We made all
dispatch to get her off to the Marquesas, as we wish to
have her on her way to Micronesia as soon as possible.
Rev. A. Kaukau and wife were ready to embark as a
reinforcement to the Marquesas Mission. The ceremonies
connected with his embarkation were attended by a full
house in the stone church April twenty-nine. Mr. Emerson goes in the vessel as a delegate from our Society to
the Marquesas Mission. A high chief by the name of
Namakeha has received, also, an appointment as delegate
from our Society to the same Mission. 2 Mr. Bingham
will remain here and visit his native land until the return
of the Morning Star.   He is most cordially welcomed
by the old friends of his honored father.
June 18, 1857. The unexampled progress of the missionary work at the Sandwich Islands is a fact now well
2 Mr. Ala Thurston, son of the Pioneer Missionary of Kailua,
Hawaii, went as first mate of the Morning Star on this her first
trip to the Marquesas Islands.




286


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


known and generally admitted. But the work is not completed. The Hawaiian people have not arrived at full
manhood. They are yet in their teens. They are just
beginning to make provision for their own wants. And
shall they be left to struggle on to maturity without the
fostering care of the hand which has so long sustained
them? If so, like the child abandoned just as the pitfalls of vice and temptation begin to gather round him,
they will stumble and fall and their last state willl be
worse than the first. No, they must not be abandoned
until they arrive at mature years. The American churches
must still lend a fostering hand. Foreign pastors must
still be maintained at all the important posts. This cannot be done without foreign help. The native churches
will aid in supporting their pastors, but they are poor
and have their own houses of worship to build and keep
in repair and many other calls upon their charity. They
can aid only in part in supporting their foreign pastors.
We have spoken above only in relation to these islands.
A wide field is opening in Micronesia. There are now
in that field five American missionaries and their wives
and seven Hawaiian missionary helpers, male and female.
One more American missionary and his companion and
from four to eight couples from these islands are about
to embark for that field. These must all be supplied with
houses, food and clothing, and the various means for
carrying on their work. This will require, for 1858, from
seven thousand to ten thousand dollars, besides the expenses of the Morning Star. The printing press is beginning to be a desideratum in that field and the brethren
are calling for this important auxiliary in their work.
This will require men and money. They are reducing the
language to writing and hope ere long to give the people
books in their own tongue. The brethren in that field
are calling, also, for more missionaries. They are anxious
to break forth on the right hand and the left, to the
numerous islands studding that ocean, filled with immortal beings bound to the judgment, but now in the




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1853-1859      287
lowest depths of heathenism. To meet these calls a much
larger appropriation of funds will be needed for that
mission. In the absence of estimates from the brethren
of the field we cannot go into particulars. The above
is a brief statement of facts in relation to the wants of
this field and of Micronesia for 1858. If our resources
are cut off, even in part, the work must retrogade, important advantages gained will be lost and islands, now
waiting for the law of the Lord, must still wait until
other generations go down to death.
In behalf of the Directors of the Hawaiian Missionary
Society.
E. W. CLARK, Committee.
From   letter by E. W. Clark, Honolulu, July 20,
1857:
My son-in-law, 0. H. Gulick, has consented to go as
second mate on the Morning Star to Micronesia. I sE-ppose you would have no objection to the vessel being commanded and manned by missionary children, if they are
well qualified for the work and disposed to engage in it.
Rev. P. J. Gulick goes as a delegate from our Society.
We send, also, a native printer and three or four other
native helpers with their wives.
From letter of Titus Coan, July, 1857:
The Morning Star arrived at Hilo upon her return from
her first trip to the Marquesas, July seventh, anchoring
in Hilo Bay at noon. The children ran and shouted and
others "caught the flying joy." The joyful event was
celebrated by a grand meeting in the church, the foreigners of Hilo joining with the natives in the celebration. Mr. J. S. Emerson, the delegate, brought a cheering report of the beginning of the missionary work by
the Hawaiian missionaries in the Marquesas Islands.
In my last letter I mentioned the illness of Chief Justice Lee and his baptism. On the morning of the twenty



288


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


seventh of May he departed in peace. Dear, precious
man! One must have known him to appreciate his worth.
Mr. and Mrs. Bingham have spent a month in our family
at Hilo and we have become greatly attached to them.
They seem to have the true missionary spirit. He travelled with me on a tour through Puna, and addressed the
native congregations with great acceptance.
From letter by Titus Coan, Hilo, March 5, 1858:
I have lately returned from a sixteen days tour in
Puna. The people everywhere came out in masses and
the season was most interesting. The local branches of
the church were peaceful and active, and there was hardly
a case of discipline to be attended to in the whole district.
Several were received to the church on profession and
some fallen members, who had long remained in a hardened state, were restored.  The contributions in cash
amounted to four hundred dollars. This was noble for
a poor scattered people without a harbor, a vessel, a
market, a store, or a white resident, living upon rocks and
earning their pennies by the sweat of the whole body.
This people have also made nearly a hundred miles of
the best road on the island. We are building a new church
edifice in Hilo. The building is up and being enclosed.
The contractors are competent and faithful and the house,
when completed, will be a substantial, a convenient, and
a beautiful one. We have raised more than seven thousand dollars in cash and we are devoting our energies
to obtain five thousand more. The native women are determined to raise five hundred dollars for a bell, and we
think they will do it. We have many whole-souled
Hawaiian ladies here. No special disease has visited our
people and yet two hundred and twenty-seven members
of this church have gone the way of all the earth. This
list is greatly swelled by the sudden and mysterious disappearance of the packet Victoria, bound from Honolulu
to Hilo. That mournful event coffined fifty-eight mem



JOURNALS AND        LETTERS, 1853-1859      289
bers of the Hilo church, besides many children and others
not belonging to our communion. Though the disaster
occurred in March, 1857, yet the hope lingered long that
that ill-fated vessel would again appear. We, therefore,
delayed our report of members lost in her until the painful reality was forced upon us. While the sinking of that
vessel remained uncertain hope and fear held alternate
sway in the hearts of our people. A dubious waiting
and great anxiety prevailed in the minds of hundreds.
Time rolled heavily on bringing no relief. No voice from
the deep, no floating spar, no plank, cask, bucket, or chest,
no women to tell the tale of that mysterious exit. At
length deferred hope died in our hearts and the requiem
commenced among the surviving friends of the lost. The
solemn death dirge rolled over all our field, for there was
hardly a hamlet in all Hilo and Puna which had not
furnished its victim to this human hecatomb.
Four large sugar plantations are in progress in the district of Hilo.  The call for many laborers has greatly
increased the population of the district. Besides sugar,
of which Hilo will probably soon furnish annually from
five hundred to one thousand tons, our district ships
coastwise considerable quantities of onions, lumber, hides,
goatskins, calves, hogs, etc. Pulu, or fern down, is also
an important and staple article of export.  This soft,
yellow, silken down, gathered from the exhaustless fern
fields of Hilo and Puna, is much used in California for
upholstery as a substitute for feathers, wool and hair.
More than two hundred thousand pounds of this article
has been shipped from Hilo during the past year. Men,
women, and children engage in collecting it, and many
of our usual villages are deserted for months at a time
while the people are collecting pulu in the jungle. You
are aware that my parish stretches more than one hundred
miles along the eastern and southeastern shores of Hawaii.
To the south my flock is scattered over eighty miles of
lava fields sprinkled here and there with soil and verdure,
but without a single stream of running water. For thirty




290


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


miles to the northward from Hilo a most enchanting
landscape meets the eye. Valleys, hills, and plains are
clothed in living green, the whole broken by numerous
ravines and chiming with the voice of many waters. Over
all this field I have passed three times during the year,
making six long tours in all. My last tour in Puna is
memorable from the fact that for the first time I was
able to ride on horseback the whole distance of one hundred and thirty miles, a good road having been just completed over a wide lava field of fifteen miles and up a
precipice of two thousand feet and an angle of some
thirty degrees. The contrast between the present and
the former comfort and safety of travelling in Puna and
Hilo is great and encouraging.
In a recent tour through the more remote villages of
Hilo, over seven hundred dollars were contributed, and
all this with a zeal and cheerfulness which I have never
seen equaled in any other people. In one small congregation, at an outstation, two hundred and sixty-six dollars were thrown joyfully into the Lord's treasury in one
day.  Surely we are encouraged by this fruit of the
Gospel. A convention of females met at Hilo on the
twenty-first of February to contribute money for a bell for
our new church building. A large company assembled
on the occasion, the meeting was opened with prayer and
brief remarks, when the contributions were brought forward. The dollars rattled like hail until we numbered
eight hundred and fifty-two. We had fixed on five hundred dollars as the sum to be raised for a bell and all
were surprised at the amount paid in.
From general letter of the Mission, Honolulu, June
4, 1858:
Three of our beloved sisters have been called away by
death.
Mrs. Elizabeth Rogers, widow of Edmund H. Rogers,
died August 2, 1857. She had been an invalid for many




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1853-1859      291
years and unable, perhaps most of the time, to extend
her labors beyond the demands of her own family. The
whole tenor of her life gave abundant evidence that her
name was written in the Lamb's book of life.
Mrs. Mary R. Clark, wife of Rev. E. W. Clark, died
August 8, 1857. She was a devoted and faithful wife
and mother, and her death was an irreparable loss to the
bereaved family. None could doubt her love to the people
of these Islands, nor her devotion to the missionary work.
She loved to meet with the women and children of Hawaii,
and point them to the Saviour, while strength and voice
remained to her.
Mrs. Pitman, who came to these Islands as the wife of
Rev. Mr. Kinney, died on the sixth of March, 1858. Being
left a widow with two small children, she was placed at
Punahou, three years since, in charge of the Primary
Department of the Institution, and was highly valued as
a teacher. A year and a half later she was married to
Mr. Pitman, a merchant of Hilo. For her to die was
gain; but it left a blank which no stranger could fill.
From   letter by E. W. Clark, Honolulu, June 1,
1858:
Ten years ago our large stone church was without a
steeple or tower clock. It is now furnished with both.
It had then but few permanent seats. It is now well
seated. Our large stone church grounds were then in a
wretched condition. They are now enclosed with a substantial wall of stone and mortar and leveled off and
planted with trees. We had then at our outposts, seven
in number, only thatched houses of worship, without floors
or seats. These outstations are now all furnished with
good frame or stone houses, with shingle roofs, and five
of these houses are furnished with floors, seats, and pulpits, and four of them with small church bells. All this
by their own money. When we consider that similar if
not equal progress has been made in other parts of the
islands we have reason to thank God and take courage.




292


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


This advance in externals indicates that the Gospel has
taken strong hold of the people.
From letter by D. Baldwin, Lahaina, July 2, 1858:
We reached Lahaina, on return from a visit to the
States, January thirteenth of this year. The people of
Lahaina were delighted to see us back and manifested
their joy for several weeks by bringing every day not only
presents of food, but also little presents of money, and
by relating to us all that had happened to them during
our absence. On the twentieth of February a terrible
whirlwind from the sea passed through Lahaina. Our
church stood exactly in its track. It took the whole of
the steeeple and half of the roof at the opposite end of
the church, and made of them one common pile of ruin
on the east side of the building, scattering shingles and
fragments of the boards all the way for a mile. This unexpected event threw sadness over our whole congregation, for they had just finished rebuilding the church at
an expense of seven or eight thousand dollars, besides
all the labor of the people for about eight years. The
toil and expense seemed laid out in vain. It seemed as
if the Lord frowned on His own cause. But this sadness
was but momentary when I saw that the spirit of our
good people rose equal to the occasion. They resolved
to raise, as quick as the Lord would enable them to do
it, three thousand dollars, which would rebuild the edifice. But though our house of worship is in ruins, the
Lord's cause is not in ruins. We found that our praying
people had not ceased to pray and we found evident tokens
of the presence of God's Spirit among them. It would
seem that at the same time that the great work began
which is spreading over the country and to other lands,
God began to pour out His spirit on this village in drops
of mercy only at first.
The first evidence we saw of it was in a young man of
thirty or more, named Obed Kuakini, the only son of
our governor. He had spent his youth in dissipation,




JOURNALS AND LETTERS, 1853-1859 293
was in all kinds of iniquity for nearly all the time we
were absent and, taken altogether, seemed as hopeless a
case as could be found in the place. But in December,
1857, he was awakened and converted and abandoned all
his evil habits. From being one of the most deceptive,
he began at once to deal only in truth, and he seemed
to have no faculty at concealing his own sins or those
of his associates. He went to all the meetings in the
village, confessing more transgressions than any one had
suspected of him, warning the old and the young, but,
especially, his associates in sin. To me he appeared like
an old experienced Christian. God was rapidly preparing him for a higher sphere. On the twentieth of March,
just two and a half months from his conversion, he died
suddenly, supposed to be from apoplexy. He is gone,
but those short months of his faithfulness have left a
deep impression on our village and especially on those
deep in sin. There were some other cases of evident
conversion and, I think, the feeling in the church and
among the impenitent has gone on increasing to the
present time. There is something wonderful in the way
God is moving among us. We have seen nothing like it
in this part of the world. The greatest transgressors are
the ones who seem most affected and are the first to come
and declare their purpose of serving God. Two weeks
ago I spent the Sabbath at Oluwalu, a village seven miles
south of here. The awakening there seemed even more
universal than in Lahaina. I gave opportunity for any
to speak who wished the prayers of the church. Old and
young were rising on all sides, the most hardened sinners
were the foremost to speak. They gave us, unvarnished,
the black history of their lives. In Lahaina nearly all
our oldest and most hardened backsliders from the church
have come of their own accord into our meetings and as
soon as any liberty is given they are on their feet, talking out what they have labored all their lives to conceal,
asking the prayers of Christians, and they sometimes
break out and pray for themselves. It is just the same




294


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


with the greatest sinners out of the church, they seem
to be pressing for the Kingdom of Heaven, and our
prayer is that they may not stop short of it.
Last evening, from four to seven, I was in as large a
prayer meeting as I ever attended in Lahaina. I called
on the women who wished to be prayed for to let it be
known. Eight or ten spoke, some of them notoriously
abandoned in time past, but the press of men, especially
youths, who wished to make known their feelings was
so great that they took the work out of the women's
hands. I could not check them, for they were our most
flagrant sinners. We stayed till dark, but not one-tenth
could speak who wished. I cannot follow this history
any further for want of time. I will only say, that such
a state of things is so new among us that we cannot
calculate results only as time develops them. How far
there may be like tokens of God's presence in other parts
of the islands, we have not had time to hear. We hope
God is now on His way to show the riches of His grace in
all nations. May Christians in America not cease to pray
for the Islands of the Pacific at this time.
From letter by W. P. Alexander Wailuku, October
25, 1858:
A few weeks ago I accompanied our young Brother
A. 0. Forbes to Molokai to introduce him to the people
of his charge. They received him with a good deal of
enthusiasm. He has already a pretty good command of
the Hawaiian tongue. He made an address of ten minutes on the Sabbath to the great congregation that was
perfectly intelligible, and the low enthusiastic murmur
of gratulation that rolled over the assembly was very interesting.
All hearts throughout the Islands throbbed with one
great emotion at the news of the Atlantic Telegraph.
Even the natives join in the enthusiasm when they hear
that the wild lightning of the skies has been caught and
turned and pressed into the service of men as a swift




JOURNALS AND       LETTERS, 1853-1859     295
bearer of dispatches.  This event was celebrated by a
magnificent comet that has been blazing in our western
horizon after sunset during the past month, moving from
north to south.
From letter by Titus Coan, Hilo, May 16, 1859:
The new church edifice at Hilo is completed. The cost
of the house and appurtenances has been nearly thirteen
thousand dollars in cash, besides a great amount of gratuitous labor on the part of the natives in collecting
stones, lime, fuel, and other materials, in carrying lumber, in digging, leveling, grading, etc., and in assisting
the workmen in a great variety of ways. Of the value
of this labor it would be impossible tp make an estimate.
Several ship masters and their ladies have also assisted
in contributing to a special fund for the pulpit. Among
our distinguished patrons we received a donation from the
King and the Queen and their suite on their last visit
to Hilo. Many of the natives have done nobly in this
work. Some have given three hundred dollars, some two
hundred, and others one hundred dollars, fifty dollars,
thirty dollars, twenty dollars, etc., besides special offerings
at festivals and at dedication. Not a few have exhibited
a most praiseworthy liberality in the enterprise.
From  letter by S. C. Damon, Honolulu, July 30,
1859:
I have taken my pen to express a thought about the
Morning Star, in the affair of salvage. It has been so
ordered that she has rendered important service to commerce in the affair of the whaleship Twilight, wrecked
on the Marquesas. Three of our principal merchants
have awarded the Morning Star thirty per cent. Some
think this not enough. Such I believe is Captain Hathaway's opinion, who commanded the Twilight. If the
Board should frankly say to the owners and insurers of
the Twilight: "We leave the matter of salvage entirely
to your generosity," it is my impression that the Board




296


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


would eventually get more than thirty per cent. To take
money for doing an act of humanity has the appearance of
selfishness. It has proved a most noble deed on the part
of Brother Bicknell, Captain Brown, and the Morning
Star. It is my candid impression that if it had not been
for Brother Bicknell all the crew would have been robbed,
if not murdered and eaten. So thinks Captain Hathaway
and the officers. Brother Bicknell has acquired an almost
fabulous influence among the wild and savage cannibals
of Marquesas. He is one of the most humble and modest
men I ever knew.
From letter by W. P. Alexander, Boston, Massachusetts, August 15, 1859:
The ordaining of native pastors has not been a failure.
Far otherwise, I consider it the clearest proof of our suecess as a Mission. No part of our field has exhibited
more substantial prosperity than was exhibited in Keokea
during the period that David Malo lived to be their pastor,
or Kaanapali while Kauwealoha and his successor Kaukau
were successive pastors there; both of whom are now noble
and worthy missionaries in the Marquesas Islands. There,
too, is Kekela, a burning and shining light, taken from
the, church at Kahuku, on the Island of Oahu, over which
he had been ordained pastor. I might also mention
Mahoe, taken from the church of Ewa, of which Brother
Bishop was pastor, to aid H. Bingham in the Kingsmill
Group, now called the Gilbert Islands. There are others
holding up the light in the foreign field whom I might
mention. And is not the fact that they have been found
worthy to go forth as messengers of the churches to the
heathen proof that we have not failed in our efforts to raise
up a native ministry?




PART III


RESULTS
CHAPTER XXIV1
RETROSPECT
ORTY years had passed since the first company
of missionaries landed (from     the brig Thaddeus) on the heathen, though hospitable shores
of the Sandwich Islands. What had been done? We
quote from an address delivered in 1857 by Hiram
Bingham II, then passing through Honolulu for the
first time since childhood, being on his way to establish
another mission in Micronesia. He said:
It is scarce two generations since the first European
vessel dropped its anchor among the snow-white corals
of the Hawaiian Islands. These fair gardens of the
Pacific were then inhabited by thousands of degraded
barbarians, who were subjected to the most revolting
cruelties. Their government, if such it might be called,
was the most oppressive tyranny; their religion, worse
than none at all; their language unwritten. Although
while the missionaries were on their voyage thither, a
few islanders, including the king, had given up their idols,
1 We are greatly indebted to Mr. and Mrs. Robert Andrews of
Honolulu, for their valuable assistance in the composition of this
portion of the book.
f97




298


8 THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


discarded their tabus, priests and public sacrifices, thousands still clung to their gods. The horrors of civil war
then laid waste these Islands. Passion, intemperance,
infanticide, crime of every form knew no bounds. To
such a people did the brig Thaddeus first bring the offer
of Christian civilization. The method of its introduction
marks the first period in their progress. Their language
was speedily reduced to writing, their prejudices were
sagaciously and successfully removed, and schools established. The printing press scattered its healing leaves
into every village, by every stream and through every
valley. Their progress soon advanced another step. Not
only individual plebeians, but proud and cruel chiefs
yielded to the power of the Gospel, encouraged their
people to substitute for their heathen temples the churches
of the living God, and for their Christian rites and amusements the arts of civilized life. The masses listened; and
so imperative were their demands for Christian teachers
that the benevolence of the American people, prompt and
commendable as it was, for years was unable to furnish
the needed supply. Their third period presents itself in
their speedy growth in civilization. Rapidly did they
adopt civilized institutions-the Christian marriage, the
observance of the Sabbath, the establishment of written
law based on inspired legislation.  Scarce fifteen years
had passed after the introduction of Christianity, ere
thousands of pagans were converted, and tens of thousands more had received the advantages of a common
school education. Thus were the people prepared for the
fourth great step in their progress: for appreciating,
adopting, enjoying and perpetuating a government, the
form and desirableness of which are equaled only by those
of England and America.
A  year later, in view  of this great advancement,
General S. C. Armstrong said:
The most interesting feature of the times is, perhaps,
the wonderfull spread of truth. Around us we have wit



RETROSPECT


299


nessed its signal triumphs, and beyond us the lowest of
our race are welcoming the glad tidings which it brings.
This progress is principally influenced by two agencies,
commercial intercourse, and the missionary cause. The
spirit of enterprise and the spirit of philanthropy.
In 1857, Prof. W. D. Alexander, in an article on
"Science and Missions," remarks:
Christianity civilizes in the broadest sense. Commerce,
industry, science and literature all accompany her majestic march to universal dominion. Thus, while it denies
the sufficiency of commerce alone to transform the savage,
it encourages a legitimate commerce and even courts its
alliance as one of its most important instrumentalities.
Chief Justice A. F. Judd in the year 1860 made
this undisputed statement:
The Hawaiians are generally considered a Christianized people. They furnish to the world the most complete
illustration of successful missionary enterprise. We have
among us many living witnesses of the manner in which
the dark, iron age of paganism was succeeded by the
bright golden age, when the glorious beams of the gospel
burst upon them, revealing to them the darkness and depravity which forty years of commerce had failed to
dispel.
Rev. A. O. Forbes, three years later, said:
Were it not for the light of the blessed Bible shining
upon these shores, merchants, mechanics, planters, farmers, tradesmen, lawyers, physicians, judges, artizans and
citizens of foreign lands would not this evening be scattered throughout these islands in the peaceful pursuit
of their various avocations. It is the wondrous influences
accompanying the story of the cross which has here dispelled the darkness of heathenism and transformed a
pagan nation into a Christian community. The Lord
of the vineyard planted a goodly vine in these isles of the
sea.




CHAPTER XXV


LATER HISTORY
T      HE "Pilgrims of Hawaii" were moved by one
propelling, all-absorbing purpose, the conversion of the heathen, and to this they steadfastly
adhered. This object, in 1860, had to a degree been
attained. This nation, as a nation, had been measurably Christianized, and had its place side by side
with other countries as a civilized land.
The American Board felt that they could no longer
send out new missionaries, but how to bring the mission to a close was a serious problem. It was a unique
problem in the history of missions, and to help wind
up the work of the A. B. C. F. M., their secretary,
Dr. Rufus Anderson, was sent to the "Sandwich Islands," arriving at Honolulu February 22, 1863. He
assisted the Hawaiian Evangelical Association in adjusting the many delicate relations between foreign and
native pastors, and in dividing up congregations in
such a way as to gradually throw responsibility upon
native churches and make the people efficient in self
government.
This change gave the native pastors authority and
responsibility without the experience and strength of
character that comes from generations of civilization.
So long as they had the old gray-headed Fatherstheir beloved teachers-to lean upon, they did faithful
o00




LATER HISTORY


301


and efficient work. But one by one these Fathers
finished their pilgrimage and went to their reward,
leaving these untried Christian leaders to face such a
multiplicity of trials as only those strong in the faith,
and leaning on the Everlasting Arm, could endure. It
is our privilege to follow them down the years.
After four or five years of experience in the working
of the new system a member of the Association wrote:
"Our attention was drawn mainly to the fifty or sixty
Hawaiian members, ministers and delegates of the
churches, who constitute the bulk of the Assembly.
They are an earnest and wide-awake body of men.... The Hawaiian ministers are constant and intelligent readers of the weekly and monthly papers published in their language. They are leaders in every
educational movement and have been the main agents
in the establishment of perhaps twenty independent
schools in various parishes. They are the conservative
element-the guides of the people."
A year later, one of the older missionaries who had
been rather skeptical concerning the success of the
native ministry, wrote: "Our meetings of the Association have been full and earnest. For the first time
we elected a Hawaiian moderator. We wish to induct
our native pastors into all the duties to which they
may be hereafter called."
In 1867, Rev. Franklin Rising, an Episcopalian
clergyman and a member of the American Church Missionary Society, who spent some months on the Islands
for the benefit of his health, reported: "I visited nearly
every mission station on the whole group, with the
religious, educational and social institutions.  The




302


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


deeper I pushed my investigations the stronger became
my conviction that what had been on the part of American Christians necessarily an experiment work in missions had, under God, proved an eminent success."
"Every sun setting gave me fresh cause to bless the
Lord for that infinite love which enables us to bring
our fellow men such rich blessings as your missionaries
have bestowed upon the Hawaiian race." "To me it
seems marvellous that in so comparatively few years,
the social, political, and religious life of the nation
should have undergone so radical and blessed a change
as it has."
The Jubilee, held in June of 1870, was a grand celebration of the Fiftieth Anniversary of the arrival of
the mission. Dr. N. G. Clark, foreign secretary of
the A. B. C. F. IM., was here to honor the occasion.
The King proclaimed June 15th a holiday and was
present in person with his cabinet.
Exercises began on Sabbath morning, June 12, when
the congregations of the two native churches united in
the great stone church at Kawaiahao, where Rev. Mr.
Kuaea preached a fine jubilee sermon, an hour in
length, from the text: "A jubilee shall the fiftieth year
be to you." Every seat was filled and the aisles
crowded, 2500 being seated. A voluntary was played
on the great organ by Mrs. Gov. Dominis, afterward
"Queen Liliuokalani," and a short prayer offered by
Rev. B. W. Parker, father of H. H. Parker, who has
been pastor for fifty-three years in that same church.
In the evening Rev. Dr. Damon preached in the Fort
Street Church from the same text to an English-speaking audience.




LATER HISTORY


I803


On Monday and Tuesday evenings Fort Street
Church was filled to hear the reminiscences of Mother
Thurston and Mother Whitney, the surviving members
of the first company, and Rev. A. Bishop of the second
company. Mother Thurston stood on the pulpit steps
and made a powerful address. She was, doubtless, the
first woman who ever addressed a mixed audience in
Hawaii.
Wednesday, June 15, was the Jubilee. A procession
of native soldiers, two companies of infantry and one
of artillery, honored the day.  The Legislature adjourned and the members in carriages joined the older
missionaries in the procession. The younger ministers,
native preachers and delegates, the faculty of Oahu
College, the Alumi of Lahainaluna Seminary and the
Mission Children's Society, with 800 or more children
from the Sunday Schools, formed in procession and all
marched to Kawaiahao Church. The decorations were
beautiful. The inscription in evergreen, "1820-Jubilee1870," was in front of the gallery, and beneath, the
nation's motto: "Ua man ka ea o ka aina i ka pono."
(The life of the land is established in righteousness.)
King Kamehameha V entered with Queen Dowager
Emma, his cabinet, and diplomatic representatives of
foreign nations, and was received by all the people
standing, who sang "God Save the King."  They were
then seated on the right, while on the left sat the missionaries, and a great mass of 3000 or more natives
filled the church. Prayer was offered by Rev. Lowell
Smith. Addresses were delivered in English by Dr.
N. G. Clark, of the A. B. C. F. M., Hon. C. C. Harris,
and Hon. H. A. Pierce, and in native by Rev. A.




304


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


Bishop, eldest living missionary, by D. Kalakaua
(afterward king), by Hon. Aholo of the Legislature,
and by Rev. Kauwealoha, for seventeen years a missionary at the Marquesas Islands. "My country, 'tis of
thee," was sung in Hawaiian, and a Jubilee hymn,
composed for the occasion, by Father Lyons.
Dr. N. G. Clark of the American Board, then on a
visit to Hawaii, said:
What may be the future of this nation we presume
not to foretell. He who reads the signs of the times need
be at no loss in judging of its import. For us, the past
at least is secure. The story of the gospel on these Islands
has gone forth to all lands and stirred the hearts and
quickened the hopes of the Christian world.
Such was the tenor of all the addresses, and such
was the condition of the church and of the country in
1870.
Kamaehameha III, called "Kamehameha the Good,"
died December 15, 1854. He had always had in his
cabinet men of ability and integrity, and his memory
will ever be cherished with love and gratitude for the
liberal constitution he gave his people, and for the right
to hold property in fee simple. He was true to his
country and to his people, and by them was greatly
beloved.
On Dec. 15, 1854, at the age of twenty years, Alexander Liholiho, as Kamehameha IV, became king. He
was a brilliant young man of pleasing address, and
when two years later he married the accomplished
Emma Rooke, he had the homage of all the people.
During his reign the Queens Hospital was founded.
This last was, perhaps, King Kamehameha's greatest




NOW
Ca




I
11,




LATER HISTORY


305


achievement-the blessing he left to his people. So
greatly was Queen Emma interested in this project
that she herself solicited subscriptions for it. A branch
of the Church of England was established in Honolulu
in 1862, and the Iolani College for boys and St. Andrews Priory for girls were commenced. The king
himself made an excellent translation of the English
Book of Common Prayer. Kamehameha IV died Nov.
30, 1863, and his brother Lot became king as Kamehameha V.
Kamehameha V reigned nine years. He was a man
of strong will and practical shrewdness. He placed in
his cabinet able men who were in sympathy with his
views.
Prince William C. Lunalilo was almost unanimously
elected on January 8, 1873, as
King Lunalilo. During his reign bitter feeling was
created by the enforcement of the law for the segregation of lepers. There was disaffection, also, among
the household troops, which resulted in mutiny. The
king was taken ill in August and spent some months
at Kailua, Hawaii, but finding no relief he returned,
and died in Honolulu on Feb. 3, 1874, after a short
reign of one year and twenty-five days. He left his
estate to found the Lunalilo Home for aged Hawaiians,
a gift that will create about his memory a halo of love
and gratitude as long as there are homeless Hawaiians
in this their native land. As Lunalilo had failed to
nominate a successor there was great excitement over
the election of a new ruler.
David Kalakaut being elected over his rival, Dowager Queen Emma, a riot occurred, to quell which the




306


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


Government was obliged to apply to the marines on
board the war ships of the United States and Great
Britain. Kalakaua was proclaimed king on Feb. 13,
1874.
The Reciprocity Treaty, in 1876, was perhaps the
greatest event of his reign, for following it came a
series of remarkable developments and improvements
in the land. It presented such inducements to sugar
culture that vast tracts of land were bought or leased
for cane production, and wonderful exploits in engineering were accomplished. Mountains were tunnelled
and rivers of water were carried across seemingly impossible gulches and made to flow uphill on their way
to make the waste lands yield their quota of sweets
to enrich the people. More laborers were needed, and
within a few years 10,000 Portuguese had arrived from
the Azores and Madeira Islands, Chinese were imported
by hundreds until 1886, and Japanese came by
thousands. There were Scandinavians also, and about
2000 men, women and children from the South Seas.
Liquor licenses were granted by the Legislature in
1885 for all principal places on the Islands, and in
1887 opium licenses were granted. Adventurers from
the Coast arrived, who ingratiated themselves is favor
with the King, for personal advantage, stirred up race
hatred, and encouraged extravagant expenditures of
public money.
The country, under the sway of these unscrupulous
favorites, seemed fast going to ruin when, in 1887, a
change was made in the constitution limiting the power
of the king and giving more power to the Legislature
and to the people. In Alexander's "History of the




LATER HISTORY


307


Later Years of the Monarchy," we read: "During the
next three years, in spite of the bitter hostility and intrigues of the King, the continual agitation by demagogues and repeated conspiracies, the country prospered under the most efficient administration that it
had ever known.
In 1889 King Kalakaua's health began to decline,
and in 1890 he visited California, but failing to receive the desired benefit, he passed away on Jan. 20,
1891, in the city of San Francisco.
On Jan. 29, 1891, Queen Liliuokalani ascended the
throne. Her short reign of two years was a stormy one.
The Legislature of 1892 passed the dreaded lottery bill
and a bill to license the sale of opium. Other objectionable bills were barely defeated, and on Jan. 14,
1893, an attempt was made to abrogate the constitution
of 1887 and to establish an Absolute Monarchy. This
move was declared revolutionary, and on Jan. 17, 1893,
A Provisional Government was established, with S.
B. Dole as its president. The first act of the Government was to repeal the lottery bill, and the latest
opium bill. A special committee was appointed who
sailed on Jan. 19, to negotiate terms of annexation with
the United States. The commissioners were well received in Washington, but in the rush of the closing
session, action was deferred, and the new Cleveland
Administration failed to ratify the treaty.
A constitution was then drawn up for a Republican
form of government-a constitution that has been
favorably spoken of by many writers-and on July 4,
1894, S. B. Dole became President of The Republic of
Hawaii.




308      TTHE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
In Nov., 1894, an uprising was planned; arms and
ammunition, bought in San Francisco, were landed on
the island ready for a midnight attack upon the Government buildings, the telephone and electric lighting
plants, and the homes of the chief men of the Republic.
But an efficient police reported the gathering, the Citizens Guard and the militia were called out, and the
rebels were scattered, but not without a little bloodshed.
Some of the conspirators were imprisoned and some
were banished, but in time all were pardoned and
became friends of the Republic.




XXVI


ANNEXATION
O     N Sept. 8, 1897, a special session of the Senate
of Hawaii was called to ratify the Treaty
of Annexation, which was carried unanimously on Sept. 9. This was brought before the
United States Senate and House of Representatives
the following June, signed in July by President
McKinley, and, on Aug. 12, 1898, President Dole
formally ceded the jurisdiction and property of the
Hawaiian government to the United States of America
and the Islands became the Territory of Hawaii. It
was an occasion of great solemnity, opened with
prayer. There was made formal presentation of the
Islands by President Dole, followed by acceptance by
United States Minister Sewell.  The guns on the
grounds and on the naval ships in port belched forth
the farewell salute to the Hawaiian flag, the band
played "Hawaii Ponoi," and, in the midst of profound
silence, the flag was slowly lowered from the central
mast of the Executive Building, while tears of sorrow
rolled down the faces of "kamaainas," or old residents,
to whom the flag had meant so much. Then, as the
clock struck twelve, amid the strains of the "Star
Spangled Banner" and the firing of the national salute,
the American flag was flung out to the trade-wind over
S09




310


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


the Executive Building. It was truly an impressive
scene.
The Spanish War and the occupation of the Philippines in 1898 brought troops of soldiers to Honolulu,
where they were given rest and cheer by the way, all
vieing to do honor to the "boys in blue." The Red
Cross Society was established in Honolulu at that time.
Great hopes were entertained for better things
within the Territory, but the Legislature granted more
licenses for the sale of wine, and wine clubs were
formed which added to the long list of crime, disease
and death. The minds of the people had been so
poisoned that their best friends were not trusted.
Meanwhile the brave old Hawaiian pastors were left
to battle almost alone. Rev. O. P. Emerson, in 1895,
said that the Hawaiian character had been tried overmuch.
At the time of the launching of the church in charge
of native pastors, there were:
American   Hawaiian
Year       Churches   Pastors    Pastors    Members
1863         25         16          4         19,725
1868         50         12         35         17,377
1888         57          1         32          5,235
1895         56          1         35          4,784
Thus there was in thirty years a falling off in membership of nearly 300%. Part was due to decrease in
population, but Mr. Emerson gives other reasons, also.
The Hawaiians were not strong enough to keep up,
alone, the high standard to which they had attained. As
one by one their old missionaries departed their restraining power was lost to the people. The Christian chiefs




4 EON




r




ANNEXATION


311


and men of authority had passed with their influence for
good, while the representatives of good government had
been replaced by others, and political methods were
corrupt.
The Hawaiian pastors were poorly supported. Their
salaries were not paid promptly and they were obliged
to engage in other work to provide for their families.
Of course, some fell away, but on the whole they were
worthy, faithful men, true to the cause of righteousness. Surely honor and praise is due them as strong,
noble men who stand firm at such a time as this.
In 1898 Mr. F. W. Damon said: "The old missionaries were not reinforced, and on the shoulders of a
native ministry was laid a burden too heavy to bear.
There should be a foreign missionary on every island."
This was accomplished in 1912.
W. B. Oleson, with his natural optimism and prophetic vision, said in 1889: "Protestantism made triumphs in Hawaii that thrill the world, and it is not
going to flicker out like an exhausted candle. We must
hold for Christ what has been won. It is a great
inheritance of responsibility."
Thus ended the 19th century which had brought to
Hawaii the Pilgrims with their life-giving message of
civilization and religious liberty.
Mauna Loa celebrated July 4, 1899, by an eruption
of lava from the slopes. In the latter part of the year,
Honolulu was saddened by a visitation of Bubonic
Plague with its attendant establishment of martial law
and house to house visitation; and with this evil came
the great fire which practically wiped out the whole of
the congested district of Chinatown.




XXVII


RELIGIOUS WORK
ELIGIOUS work in Hawaii for forty years,
from 1820 to 1860, was under the care of the
Pilgrim fathers and mothers. It was left by
them to the Hawaiian Evangelical Association and to
the Theological Schools which they founded and, also,
to their children.
The Hawaiian Mission Children's Society supported
one of their number, Dr. Luther Halsey Gulick, and
his wife in Micronesia, and several Hawaiian Missionaries in Micronesia and the Marquesas Islands, and
also educated their children in our Hawaiian schools.
In all more than $17,000 were spent on missions to
other island groups during the first fifty years, and the
help given to Kawaiahao and other home schools was
more than $50,000.
The "Cousins" not only gave money and cheer to
foreign missions, they also gave themselves. Hiram
Bingham, D.D., and his noble wife, devoted their lives
to the Gilbert Island mission from 1851 to 1865; and,
when health was impaired, they spent the rest of their
lives in translating the New Testament, finished in
1873, the Old Testament, finished in 1890, and in making a dictionary. The first missionary, L. H. Gulick,
when after nine years failing health drove him from the
tropics, spent seven years in Honolulu as Secretary of
312




RELIGIOUS WORK3


313


the Hawaiian Board, while his wife gathered the
nucleus of Kawaiahao Seminary.    Afterward their
greater work was done in Spain, Japan and China.
Other foreign missionaries among the Cousins were:
Rev. John T. Gulick in China and Japan, Rev. O. H.
Gulick, with his wife, Mrs. Ann E. Clark Gulick and
sister, Miss Julia A. Gulick, in Japan, Rev. Theo.
Gulick among the Jews, Rev. W. H. Gulick and Rev.
Thomas L. Gulick in Spain. Misses Cyrene and Mary
Van Duzee were for thirty and more years in Persia
as Missionaries, and Mrs. Fanny Andrews Shepard
and Mrs. Florence Andrews Niell went to Turkey.
Besides these, seven or more Cousins preached the
gospel on the mainland, and at least five, Revs. S. E.
Bishop, A. O. Forbes, H. H. Parker, J. P. Green,
and 0. P. Emerson followed in their fathers' footsteps
here on Hawaii, as gospel ministers. Who can estimate the religious influence of Frank W. Damon and
wife, whose lives were devoted to Chinese mission work
in these Islands, or that of General S. C. Armstrong,
who served in the Civil War, with other Cousins, and
then founded the Hampton School for Negroes and
Indians, which nurtured such men as Booker T.
Washington. Not only has the pulpit of Kawaiahao
church been filled for fifty years by the son of a missionary, but a well-equipped Sunday School, quite up
to date, is conducted by missionary descendants. The
other large native church and Sunday School, named
Kaumakapili, has been helped financially and by personal presence and assistance by the daughter of the
first pastor, Rev. Lowell Smith, and by her husband.
The Kohala church, also, and others, could not have




314       THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
continued their good work but for the children of the
missionaries. They have done and continue to do much
good work through the Fort Street Church-now the
Central Union-and through the Woman's Board of
Missions of the Pacific. Scores of Cousins became
teachers in mission schools and in Sunday Schools, and
there were many whose varied talents helped them to
do their religious work by proxy, and supply men and
means for advancing the work of the Fathers while
they in politics or business have been promoters of
peace, good order, good will and good government.
THE HAWAIIAN EVANGELICAL ASSOCIATION
The Hawaiian Board of the Evangelical Association
was formed on June 23, 1863, and through the Board
the work of the Association is done, one paid Secretary
spending his whole time in the service of the Board
and having oversight of all the churches.
The Secretaries have been:
Rev. L. H. Gulick, from 1863 to 1870.
Rev. J. F. Pogue, from 1870 to 1877.
Rev. H. Bingham, from 1877 to 1880.
Rev. A. O. Forbes, from 1880 to 1889.
Rev. O. P. Emerson, from 1889 to 1904.
Rev. D. Scudder, from 1904 to 1907.
Rev. W. B. Oleson, from 1908 to 1915.
Rev. H. P. Judd, from 1910 to 
There have been but five Presidents and three Treasurers.
For twenty years the work of the Board was done
among the Hawaiian people, and the records of the




RELIGIOUS WORK                815
Association Meetings are kept in the Hawaiian language.
During the latter part of this time there was a great
decrease in the population.  There was great unrest
also. Hawaiians were selling their homes, deserting
the churches and crowding into the towns to make room
for sugar, and Asiatics were filling their places. As
Providence opened the way the Hawaiian Board began
to reach out to other nationalities.
The first evangelistic work among the Chinese was
in 1868, when through the great interest Dr. S. C.
Damon felt for them, a Sunday School was started in the
Fort Street Church. In 1878 Rev. Dr. Hyde, in connection with Dr. S. C. Damon, organized a Chinese
church. The Chinese, with the help of foreign friends,
raised money and put up a church building themselves
in 1880. Four years later Mr. F. W. Damon returned
from China with his bride, formerly Miss Mary Hopper, born of missionary parents in China, and they two,
with wonderful zeal and good judgment carried on the
Chinese work in Honolulu.
A large immigration of Japanese arrived in 1886
with their Consul-General. Dr. Hyde established for
them a regular preaching service in Queen Emma Hall,
speaking through an interpreter. In 1887 Mr. Miyama,
fiom the Methodist church of San Francisco, came to
Honolulu and services were conducted in the Japanese
language. In 1888 the first Japanese church was organized in the Fort Street Church, and Mrs. C. M.
Hyde tells us that "at the time of the baptism of the
first converts it was a striking spectacle that was presented with Consul Ando at one end of the kneeling




316


THIE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


penitents and his yard man at the other, some thirty or
forty bearing testimony."
In 1894 Rev. and Mrs. O. H. Gulick were transferred from mission work in Japan to Hawaii, and took
charge of the Japanese work under the Hawaiian Board.
During the next few years ten preachers and evangelists
were procured from Japan at a cost of $4,080, the
Lyceum on Nuuanu Street was purchased, night schools
were held for instruction in English, and day schools
for Japanese lessons.
A Portuguese Protestant Sunday School was begun
by the Woman's Board of Missions of the Central Union
Church in 1887, and in 1892 a church was organized
with Rev. A. V. Soares as pastor. In 1893 a kindergarten and schools were organized, and later a beautiful
little church was built on Miller Street. Churches have
since been established at Hilo, Hawaii, and at Paia,
Maui.
The present publicationr of the Hawaiian Board are
"The Friend," which was founded in 1843 as a temperance paper by Rev. S. C. Damon, and has reflected
the religious life of Hawaii for over seventy years; the
"Ka Hoaloha," a religious paper printed in Hawaiian,
containing the International Sunday School Lessons,
with a recently added English department, and having
a circulation of 1400; the "Eekahunaao," a paper
for Hawaiian ministers and Christian workers; and
"The Tomo" a Japanese evangelistic paper; also "The
Yan Bo," a Chinese paper, and "The Ang Abyan," a
Tagalog Filipino paper.
With the one exception of Kekahunaao, the titles of
these six papers mean, the friend.




XXVIII


EDUCATION
THE TRAINING OF HAWAIIAN YOUTHS FOR THE
MINISTRY
T  HE earlier Hawaiian Ministers were prepared
for their work in the Lahainaluna Seminary,
and, also, by the personal teaching of individual
missionaries.
In 1863 Rev. W. P. Alexander entered, in Wailuku,
Maui, upon the instruction of some of the graduates of
Lahainaluna Seminary with the view of their preparation for the gospel ministry. This most valuable training school fitted several of the leading men in the pastorate for the work that they have accomplished. Later
Rev. D. D. Baldwin carried on the same line of instruction of a few promising young men in Honolulu.
In 1877 Rev. Dr. C. M. Hyde established a school for
the education of Hawaiian youths for the Gospel Ministry, and carried it on ably and successfully for twentytwo years. Death brought his labors to a close in 1899,
at which time it was said that four-fifths of the pulpits
of the native Hawaiian people were filled by those whom
he had trained. Rev. John Leadingham, who had been
for a few years associated with Dr. Hyde, carried on
the school till 1905. Upon the departure of Mr. Lead317




818


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


ingham in 1905 there was an interval without any
special training of ministers for the Hawaiian people,
but for the past three years there has been established
a permanent training school for ministers under the
leadership of Rev. Messrs. Erdman and Frank Scudder.
The instruction imparted by Messrs. Alexander, Baldwin and Hyde was entirely in the Hawaiian language,
while the later instruction, since the time of Dr. Hyde
to the present, has been in English.
As a result of these schools there are today forty-five
native Hawaiian ministers, and these all are united in
the one Hawaiian Evangelical Association of Congregational churches.
At the present time the younger members of the
Hawaiian churches are beginning to demand ministers
who shall be able to conduct their services in the English language.
SCHOOLS AND SEMINARIES
Maunaolu (The Beautiful Mountain) School was
opened on East Maui as a family boarding school for
girls in 1861, by Rev. and Mrs. C. B. Andrews.
In 1864 it passed into the hands of Rev. and Mrs. J.
Porter Green, Miss Mary Green and Miss Mary Parker.
But in 1869 the building was destroyed by fire and the
school disbanded.
In 1871 the school was reopened and Miss Helen E.
Carpenter was for twenty years its faithful, devoted
Principal.
In 1898 a fire again destroyed the Mlaunaolu building.




EDUCATION


319


Through the generosity of Mlr. H. P. Baldwin a more
modern building was erected at Sunny Side Paia, into
which the school moved in October, 1900, with a full
corps of teachers and modern appliances. They have
a beautiful home life, and continue to send out wellequipped graduates.
The Kawaiahao Seminary for girls was opened in
1864 by Mrs. L. H. Gulick in the old printing house,
which stood where the Mission Memorial Building now
stands. It began with eight pupils, but the numbers
increased until in 1867 it blossomed out into Kawaiahao
Seminary with Miss Lydia Bingham as Principal. In
1877 the school came under the care of the Hawaiian
Board. At first Hawaiians and Micronesians were received, but year by year Chinese, Japanese, Koreans,
Germans, and Portuguese were welcomed, all blended
into one happy family. In 1908 a large stone building
was erected in Manoa Valley by generous friends, and
the school removed from the city to the beautiful
suburbs. In its new home, and under an efficient principal it has grown in numbers, including among its
pupils girls of many nationalities. It is now the Girls'
Department of The Mid-Pacific Institute.
The Boys' Department of The Mid-Pacific Institute
began as Mills School for boys, founded by Mr. and Mrs.
Frank Damon in 1890 for Chinese youth, and continued
under their efficient loving care until 1910, when it
was transferred to a fine stone building in Manoa Valley, a short distance from the Girls' School. It now
educates other nationalities besides Chinese and has a
large corps of teachers.
The Haleiwa Seminary was begun in August 7, 1865,




320


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


when Rev. and Mrs. O. H. Gulick brought their family
school from Ka-u, Hawaii, to Waialua, Oahu.   The
departure of the Gulicks as missionaries to Japan in
1870, left the school in charge of MIiss Mary E. Green,
who for over ten years labored energetically and successfully until failing health caused her resignation, and
the abandonment of the school.
The Kohala Girls' School was founded by the Rev.
Elias Bond, who devoted his energies from early dawn
till darkening hours to the speedy accomplishment of
the work. It was opened Dec. 1, 1874, with Miss Elizabeth Lyons as Principal. With heroism and zeal she led
her band of truth seekers till 1882. The school was then
closed till 1889 when Mr. Bond made over the property
to the Hawaiian Board. It still exists, and has a
regular course of study with industrial training.
The Kamehameha Schools sprang up full fledged and
equipped for work through the magnificent gift of the
founder, Mrs. Bernice Pauahi Bishop.
The Boys' Department was opened in 1886 with Rev.
W. B. Oleson as Principal, and the Department for
Girls about ten years later.  No expense has been
spared to make these model industrial schools, the
standard being high and the teachers excellent.
These and some other boarding schools, which continued for a short time, have been of inestimable benefit
to these Islands, in raising up educated Christian men
and women to carry on the work and be the intelligent
parents of the next generation.
Mention may here be made of Saint Louis College for
Boys, and the Roman Catholic Convent for Girls, and,
also, of The Iolani College and the Priory for Girls of




EDUCATION                  321
the Episcopal Church.  These and other Christian
schools and homes for Japanese and Koreans, all are
contributing to the enlightenment of the several races
upon our island shores.
The Common Schools, which extend to every part of
the islands, are under the care of the Government. They
are all taught in English and many of the teachers are
well educated ladies from the mainland. There is a
Normal School and a High School in Honolulu, and
High Schools on Hawaii, Maui, and Kaui. Kindergartens, for the little children, have been established
by benevolent societies.




XXIX


LANGUAGE
T      EE "Missionary Herald" of September, 1911,
speaking of the many languages used in Eastern
Turkey, said regarding the ordination of a
minister: "The Scripture was read in Turkish, the ordaining prayer offered in Arabic, the charge to the
pastor spoken in Armenian, while the red-hot charge
to the people was in the terse and incisive Kurdish."
Thus, four out of the five languages employed every
Sabbath in preaching the gospel in the Mardin field,
were used in this service with one congregation.
In the Hawaii of today we have the following languages in daily use by different sections of the people:
The Hawaiian, English, Japanese, Punti Chinese,
Hakka Chinese, Portuguese, Korean, Filipino, and the
Porto Rican. Of these many languages, the English
may be said to be the conquering tongue, as it is taught
in all the schools and is a medium of communication
amongst all the children and young people, both in the
street and on the playground.
The gospel is preached by pastors and evangelists
from week to week to each of the assemblies of these people in their several native languages. The hope for
future unity and development is in the thorough command of the English by all these races. The process,
322




LANGUAGE


323


which calls for great patience, will require some time.
The eagerness of all to acquire the English language,
furnishes the great hope for future unity.
The young people of the Hawaiian race now living,
and under twenty years of age, many of them, care very
little and know still less of the distinguished names of
Hawaiian history. Their school days of the past fifteen
or twenty years have been largely under the guidance
of American school teachers, whose utmost effort in the
earlier stages was to educate the youthful ear and tongue
to discern the difference between pokeko and potato,
and to whom the famous names of Kamehameha, Kaahumanu, and Kapiolani, signify but little. Their
schoolmates and playfellows have largely been of the
Chinese, Japanese, and Portuguese nationalities whose
common language has been the conquering English.
You address a youth with the liquid and lovely Aloha,
and he will reply Good Morning! Of pride or love for
his mother tongue he has but little. It must be so. The
English is the common language of the present and coming inhabitants; the language of literature, the language
of business, the language which all wish to know and
seek to learn.
The Hawaiian speech no longer guides the people or
their rulers. It is sought by none except the antiquarian. So soon may a small race and its language pass
from the earth!
Virtually all the schools for native Hawaiians were at
first taught in the Hawaiian language, whether private
schools or public common schools. Change was made in
the public schools, and in nearly all other schools, from
the Hawaiian language to the English language between




324


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


1880 and 1890. The change was fully accomplished in
1892.
The American Board's Mission to Hawaii has been
an example and inspiration to all modern missions and
missionaries through the transformation of these Island
people. It is an object lesson to the world, of the success of gospel missions.
The exercises of the Annual Meetings of the mission
for the first forty years were conducted entirely in English, the assembly being composed of the English speaking missionaries.
In 1863 the scope of the organization was enlarged,
and from that time onward the Annual Assembly has
consisted of the pastors, mostly Hawaiian, and of delegates from the several churches, and all conducted in the
Hawaiian language.
The meetings of the Annual Association of the
churches and also of the Local Island Associations, are
still conducted in the Hawaiian language, as is natural.
In these later years the several English-speaking Congregational Churches, as also the Japanese, Chinese, and
Portuguese, of the Congregational order, have representation in both the several Island Associations and in the
Annual Association, which latter combines all the Congregational Churches of the group.
Ere long all the business and services of these Associations must be conducted in the only language common to all, namely, the English.
As in Turkey, so in Hawaii, the language question is
the gravest and most difficult problem to meet in the
program of progress.




4-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~b
-f                             ~~~~~~~~~~~~~








XXX


AGRICULTURE
AO   MONG the pioneer missionaries was a farmer,
Daniel Chamberlain, who came to instruct the
natives in agriculture and the rudiments of
mechanical arts, but he found little opportunity for
his services and remained only three years.
The primitive Hawaiians had a system of agriculture unique in form and efficient in operation, furnishing, in favorable years, abundant food for the 150,000
people who filled the land. Indeed, they had one substantial vegetable, almost unknown in civilized lands,
the taro or kalo. This tuber, raised in flooded patches,
wherever in low land perpetual running water could
be led, constituted the staff of life for fully four-fifths
of the population.
In 1835 the mission decided that "Little can be
done (in agriculture) at present. Nevertheless we regard the subject as of sufficient importance to warrant
us in encouraging the growth of cotton, coffee, sugar
cane, etc., that the people may have more business on
their hands and increase their temporal comforts." To
this end, every mission station became an oasis from
which seeds and cuttings of flowers, vegetables and
fruit trees were distributed throughout the country districts. We read especially of the success along these
825




326


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


lines of Mr. Locke, of Waialua, Oahu, Mr. Ruggles, of
Kona, Hawaii, and Mr. Goodrich, of Hilo and, later,
of the cultivation of wheat under Mr. Green, of Maui,
and Mr. Shipman, of Ka-u, Hawaii.
Cotton culture was given a trial in the 'thirties and
Miss Lydia Brown was sent by the American Board to
teach spinning and weaving. A second attempt was
made in 1863, promoted by H. M. Whitney through the
Advertiser and Kuokoa.  Choice seeds were distributed
and machines for cleaning and preparing for market
introduced, and the quantity and quality increased till
1866, when twenty-two thousand pounds were exported.
After the Southern States recovered from the Civil War
Hawaiian cotton ceased to be exported.
Coffee was grown in small quantities in early times
by missionaries and others, and Kona, Hawaii, has
given its name to the delicious Kona Coffee of commerce, the export of which the past year amounted in
value to nearly a milllion dollars.
Rice was one of the products that appeared soon after
the organization of "The Royal Agricultural Society"
in 1850, which did for the country what the "Bureau
of Agriculture and Forestry" did in the 'nineties. Great
excitement prevailed after its introduction and large
tracts of taro land were planted to rice, the quality fully
equalling that of South Carolina rice. There were, in
all, about ten thousand acres planted to rice, producing
usually three crops in two years. The cultivation of
rice has been prosecuted largely by the Chinese immigrants who were brought to Hawaii, in the middle of the
nineteenth century, in the interest of sugar planting.
For fifty years rice held second place in agricultural




AGRICULTURE


products, but other crops now far outrank it in value.
Pineapples reached second rank in exports in 1912,
though the first shipment of eighty cases was only made
in 1890. So rapid has been the advance in the culture
of the fruit and the growth of the trade, that in 1913
there were exported 360,000 cases, and the record next
year was 1,000,000 cases of canned fruit and 100,000
cases of juice, valued at $3,500,000. The fresh fruit,
also, is being placed upon the market.
Sugar cane was indigenous and sugar, though of inferior quality, was exported as early as 1837. Later
improvements were made in grinding, boiling, draining,
and packing. Steam was introduced, vacuum pans installed, and new machinery set up, till choicest grades
were turned out in great quantity.
Then the Reciprocity Treaty, passed in 1876, brought
marvellous changes and financial prosperity. Within
the next fifteen months eighteen new plantations were
started; land was bought and leased at exorbitant
prices; heavy machinery was imported and immense
schemes for irrigation were carried through.  The
artesian water-supply and other irrigation projects
brought under cultivation thousands of acres of once
barren land. Within one year the Haiku Ditch, through
the energy, skill and faithful work of its promoters,
engineers and a great gang of men, blasting, tunneling,
piping, and flume-making had carried the water from
windward Haleakala to Haiku plantation, seventeen
miles away. That was the first, followed by many
others, through mountain fastnesses, impassable gulches,
and a wonderful tangle of tropical vegetation. The
last, finished in December, 1915, was, perhaps, the




328


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


greatest, when a tunnel three miles long pierced the
Koolau mountains-the backbone of Oahu-to carry
waste water from the windward to the other side of the
island, and estimated to carry 125,000,000 gallons
daily. Sugar has been "king" in leveling the hills,
building railways, making roadways, and starting
steam lines across the Pacific. The sons of the Pilgrims of Hawaii have, some of them, devoted their
talents and energy to its interests.  Engineers and
financiers of note have given of their skill, and
thousands and thousands of laborers have been brought
from many nations to do it service. The total sugar
crop of Hawaii in 1914 amounted to 617,038 tons, the
value of which was between forty and fifty millions of
dollars. Sugar has brought to this country business
and commercial prosperity. It has, also, brought a
multitude of heathen, and some evil customs to our
shores. It has, also, afforded an opportunity to extend
the influence of the pilgrims of Hawaii to all the shores
of the Pacific.




Pickinig Pineapples




r ~
L
i
i
1




XXXI
COMMERCE, EARLY SHIPS
Trr *HE commerce of the Pacific, which inevitably
includes the commerce of Hawaii, was at first
prosecuted in American and English sailing
ships from Atlantic ports around Cape Horn, creeping
up the western American coast. The vessels brought
the products of more advanced countries, and took
wheat, ores, guano, timber, hides, tallow and furs.
When they reached across to Siberia, China and the
West Indies, they met the Cape of Good Hope current
which had already brought the Dutch, Portuguese, and
Spanish traders. In its western progress, commerce
swept away the sandal wood of Hawaii-which was all
it had to sell; which was immediately converted into
gold for the merchants, but returned little to the islands. This sandal wood was taken to China where
it was used for fragrant burnt-incense, and, also, for
furniture. This trade began in 1810, and ceased about
twenty years later when the sandal wood of the islands
was exhausted.
But commerce was preceded by National vessels of
discovery, whose first object was to impress the people
of new lands with the power and dignity of the rulers
whom they represented. On such service was Captain
James Cook, R. N., in his visits of 1778, and 1779; but
829




330


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


though a commander of tried ability, he allowed himself
to be caught in a trivial quarrel with the natives and
lost his life. On such service came Captain George
Vancouver, R. N., and added his own high-minded
philanthropy to the prestige of his government. On
such service came the United States exploring squadron in 1840, and 1841, and added greatly to the
world's fund of exact information.
Every nation on earth, that has a navy to exhibit,
has sent its naval ships here, at one time or another,
with expressions of good will which have been as courteously returned. Some notable exceptions to this rule,
occuring in the first half of last century, arose from
the inability of the commanders to allow that the
Hawaiians had any right to make laws which they were
bound to respect. Such was the visit of the United
States Schooner Dolphin, in 1826; and such were the
visits of the British frigate Carysfort, in 1843; and of
the French ship-of-war, L'Artemise, Captain Laplace,
in 1839; and Poursuivante, Admiral Tromelin, in
1849; which were all attended by high-handed attacks
on the dignity and peace of the Hawaiian Governmnnt.
HOME FLEET
Naturally, the king was the first ship owner of the
islands and many were the glittering baits, in the
shape of small sea craft, which he eagerly snapped up
and for which he paid exorbitant prices. They were
generally short lived.  In 1837 the king's fleet consisted of the Kai, a full rigged brig, (formerly called
the Don Quixote), and ten smaller vessels as attendants.
When not on special duty these plied, irregularly,




01" o  Uy Jolg  SIU  im LU   R  m  D U SixU UL9  SiUd~ 




I,     I
4
i




COMMERCE, EARLY SHIPS               81
among the islands. Natives were all loyal subjects to
the king and were free passengers, the number being
limited by the seating capacity of deck and cabin. The
passengers provisioned themselves and, while food held
out, they did not mind how many days they were afloat.
About 1840 it became the practice, at Dr. Judd's suggestion, to make a charge for exclusive use of the cabin.
The queen of her time was the new and beautiful
royal yacht, Kamehameha III, acquired in 1846. She
had high bulkwarks, a flush deck, a spacious cabin
below, and six brass guns mounted in man-o'-war style.
She was carried off by the French in 1849, without reason or recompense.
As the foreign population and its business needs increased, the inter-island schooners were greatly increased in number and sea-going efficiency. In 1848
there were sixty-seven vessels having Hawaiian registry.
To mention only one out of a number of those which
were favorites of the travelling public, the Nettie Merrill combined beauty, speed, and carrying capacity.
She made weekly trips to and from Lahaina, also loading up with sugar at Makena, and her going rate was
called steamer time.
WHALERS
The recurrent visits of a fleet of whaleships in our island ports was a great factor in shaping the history of
this people, and the results were mixed-great pecuniary gain and great moral loss.
The ships' principal needs were water and fresh
provisions; and the favorite ports of call were Honolulu, Lahaina, Hilo, and Waimea, Kauai, with a grow



832


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


ing preponderance for the first named for obvious
reasons.
STEAM
The first steam vessel to enter Honolulu harbor was
H. B. M. S. Cormorant, and this was in the year 1846.
The Kilauea, which arrived here in 1860, was the
pioneer of a fleet of schooner-rigged screw steamers,
which has continued to this day. In the 'Seventies the
enterprise of steamship building resulted in the formation of the Wider Steamship Company, which absorbed
the greater part of the freighting and passenger bUsiness of the islands. This company, later, was merged
with the Inter-Island Steam  Navigation Company,
which now covers the group having control of an efficiently managed fleet of steamers with regular sailing
days and mail carrying contracts, ensuring weekly communication with all parts of the islands and semi-weekly
with the more important points.




0 H
OR
MN
lid
i  M.
really
ME




#4P


1                                    I t4
I t,






XXXII


THE TWENTIETH CENTURY
T    HE   Twentieth Century brought to Hawaii a
brighter outlook. The great fire in Honolulu
on January 20, 1900, with its terror, destruction, and despair, proved a blessing in disguise, wiping
out the plague that had lain as a pall upon the city for
months, and waking up the people to the need of a
cleaner city and better building laws. So the great upheaval through which the country had passed, left it
more stable and there began to rise from out the ashes
of discord and distrust a kindlier feeling and a gradual
return to civic righteousness through a strength born of
conflict and peril.
The Political Condition: Hawaii has been blessed
with wise and conscientious Governors. Governor Dole
steered the "Ship of State" through the troublous waters
of Annexation, and readjusted the laws to conform to
the new environment. Governors Carter and Frear
were worthy successors of Governor Dole.
The Legislature made excellent laws on the whole,
but continued to license saloons, and the police failed to
execute such restrictive laws as were passed and, consequently, with the incoming of all classes of foreigners,
crime and poverty increased. The "Strangers Friend
Society," organized in 1852, and church benevolent so233




334


THIE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


cieties looked after the poor until in 1899 the "Associated Charities" was organized and took over the
problem. 
Improvements: In Honolulu and on Oahu the Rapid
Transit opened up five miles of road in 1902; dredging
of Pearl Harbor was begun and wireless telegraphy
made rapid strides; in 1903 the Aquarium was opened.
The McKinley High School Building and the Children's
Hospital were erected in 1910 (The Leahi Home for Incurables had been built at Kaimuki in 1900). The College of Hawaii, established in 1909, completed its new
building and graduated its first class in 1913. The new
Y. M. C. A. Building was erected and occupied in 1911,
and The Mid-Pacific Institute was completed in 1912,
and in that year volcanic observations were inaugurated
at Kilauea. On October 21, 1911, the "Territorial
Library" superseded the "Honolulu Library," established in 1879, but on February 1, 1913, the beautiful
new "Library of Hawaii," the gift of Carnegie, was
open to the public, absorbing the Territorial Library and
housing, also, the "Historical Society's Library" on its
fireproof shelves.
The King's Daughters Home, at Kaimuki, for the
aged, was completed in 1916.
The Young Hotel, stretching from street to street in
the heart of the city, and the Moana Hotel, almost overhanging the sea at Waikiki, are filled with tourists.
New wharfs at Honolulu, Hilo, and Mahukona have
been built.
The great floating Drydock at Pearl Harbor and the
villages that have sprung up as if by magic at Forts
Schofield, Shafter, De Russy, and Ruger, to house our




THE TWENTIETH CENTURY


335


country's defenders, show our relation to the United
States Government.
At Hilo the new breakwater begun in 1910 has rendered possible new wharves, and the Hilo-Hamakua
Railroad has opened up plantations and homesteads situated in the most picturesque lands of Hawaii.
The Educational Advance: Educational advance during the sixteen years of the twentieth century has been
great. Many open-air bungalow school rooms have been
built.
Hacwaiin Mission Children's Society: This body finding that as a benevolent society their gifts were duplicated by themselves in the Hawaiian Board, resolved to
change the constitution, making this a memorial society.
To this end a Charter of Incorporation was obtained
on August 14, 1907, "for the purpose of perpetuating
the memory of the missionary Fathers and Mothers who
brought Christianity to these Islands, also of promoting
union among its members, of cultivating an active missionary spirit, stirring them up to good deeds, and assisting in the support of good works."
The Society took possession of the "Old Mission
Home" on April 4, 1908, and in 1909 the Chamberlain House was added to their equipment and to these
headquarters have been gravitating all records, letters,
journals, and literary productions of the Fathers, also
photographs, daguerreotypes and paintings, with old
furniture used by them in olden times, together with
the photographs of their descendants. In this place has
been prepared by the Recorder, R. W. Andrews, a book
of genealogies of the missionaries to Hawaii and their
descendants to the fourth generation; and from these




336


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


headquarters goes yearly a report, giving name and residence of its 1004 members, with a list of marriages,
births and deaths and such other items as may be secured. From a special fund gifts have been sent yearly
to Micronesia, Turkey, and Hawaiian students (in our
schools) have been educated.
The direct work of the missionaries continues through
the Hawaiian Board. The original plant is still thrifty,
never having ceased to bear fruit, although some of the
time its growth has been greatly retarded and its fruitage small. When this young life could not push out
through the Hawaiian churches, it came to the surface
among other nationalities-the Chinese, the Portuguese,
and a strong thrifty branch among the Japanese race.
The kindergartens and social settlements are charming
spots of fresh verdure. Three young sprouts appear
among the 14,000 Filipinos and a small growth among
the Porto Ricans of Hilo. Notwithstanding wars and
rumors of wars, and calls for help from poor war-worn
Europe and Asia, there were ninety-seven churches
that poured gifts into the treasury of the Hawaiian
Board in 1915. There are strong plants now reaching
away out from the churches through the Men's League
and attacking health problems, social evil and even legislation, and through the Anti-Saloon League closing
saloons and lessening the curse of intemperance. Some
vigorous growths rooted in the churches are emanating
from the Y. M. C. A. and the Y. W. C. A. and beautifying the land, and through the Christian Endeavor new
shoots from old roots are covering with life many deserted churches, paying off old debts and keeping alive
the faith of the Fathers. The Boy Scouts and Lincoln



Missioni MeMoia Bifildiig~ MIfooiio; 1916




I
A



THE TWENTIETH CENTURY


8S7


Lee-Legions are offshoots, also, which gladden waste
places with their refreshing vitality. The Hawaiians
are coming to their own and the gospel vine is blossoming among their churches. What is still better, the
Bible school for preparing young ministers was never
more promising, and this in itself is a prophesy of
better things to come, "When the whole earth shall be
covered with the glory of God."
CONCLUSION
Let us close with a moving picture of the history contained in this book, taking our stand -on King Street
near the Kawaiahao Church of Honolulu:
The time is 1820. You face the ocean. You see the
busy missionary, training his ear to catch new sounds,
record new words and struggle with the translation of
the Bible into a new language. His young wife in a
grass hut on a mat-covered earth floor is cooking and
washing with inadequate appliances, worn, weary, and
sick with no doctor on the whole islands. She holds
meetings with the mothers who tell of babes they have
murdered.
A year later: The missionaries are erecting a frame
building with board floors and glass windows. There is
a large cellar where stores may be housed in safety, a
common dining-room for the four families, three distinguished guests, five children besides two infants and
a few natives, all trying hard not to knock elbows or be
in others way. The preacher stands at the side entrance
with the lower half door closed for a pulpit, trying to
preach in a new tongue to a crowd of listening natives.
A mother is in a grass school room with her foot on the




338


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


rocker of her infant's cradle while she teaches a class of
native boys and girls to read and write their own language. Another is struggling to make good bread from
mouldy flour, or preparing an evening tea for friendly
captains, caring for a sick and dying sailor, entertaining
the king and his retinue, making dresses for the queen
and ruffled shirts for the king and teaching unskilled
fingers to do the same.
The film moves on: Ten years have passed. Soft
blocks of coral, cut under water, have been carried by
men, set in lime mortar, made from burnt coral, and
there is the Depository where all the business of the
mission is done, goods from Boston received, stored in
the attic and cellar and sent by little schooners to the
various stations. Here guests were received, for they
practiced the precept to "welcome the coming and speed
the parting guest."
Five years more: The printing press is taken from the
grass hut and housed in the little coral printing office,
from which the Bible, fully translated, printed and
bound, went out to a nation already taught to read and
love the Word of God.
One more turn of the film brings you to 1840 and the
great stone church that takes the place of the grass
Chapel, the scene of so many conversions and triumphs
of the gospel.
Now cherish this picture of devotion and self-sacrifice
and slowly turn to the hills, and while you turn the
years are reeled off. Near a century has passed since
the beginning and 1916 places before you the massive
Mission Memorial Building situated in the center of a
lovely park on old historic ground where in the past




THE TWENTIETH CENTURY


339


successively stood the doctor's office, the pastor's home,
and a Boarding School for Hawaiian Girls. With its
wide welcoming approach it stretches almost from street
to street.
The great massive pillars and arched doorway seem
strong and dignified as the Fathers themselves. The
rock foundation is symbolic of the "Rock of Ages" upon
which the spiritual structure of the Fathers was built.
The bright red bricks in the building, pointed off in
white cement, seem to indicate the individuals, men,
women, and children who have helped and are helping
to erect the "house not made with hands."
From the Auditorium comes a volume of praise, in
English from an assembly of young Hawaiians, led by a
dignified Hawaiian pastor. The Book Rooms and the
Publishing Rooms send out their messages in print,
and from these headquarters the Chinese, Japanese,
Portuguese, and Filipino Christian workers extend living branches throughout the islands, Bible schools
flourish and churches bear fruit that will be enjoyed
throughout the world. As the electric lights streaming
from the many windows have eclipsed the whale-oil
lamps of the Fathers so shall the full splendor of the
Sun of Righteousness banish all darkness from the land.




I
I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~




APPENDIX


FIRST COMPANY
Brig Thaddeus, arrived at Kailua, Hawaii, April 4, 1820.
Rev. Hiram Bingham
Mrs. Sybil Mosely Bingham
Rev. Asa Thurston
Mrs. Lucy Goodale Thurston
Mr. Samuel Whitney
Mrs. Mercy Partridge Whitney
Thomas Holman, M.D.
Mrs. Lucia Ruggles Holman
Mr. Daniel Chamberlain
Mrs. Chamberlain
Mr. Samuel Ruggles
Mrs. Mary Wells Ruggles
Mr. Elisha Loomis, Printer
Mrs. Maria Theresa Sartwell Loomis
SECOND COMPANY
Ship Thames, arrived at Honolulu, April 27, 1823.
Rev. Artemas Bishop
Mrs. Elizabeth Edwards Bishop
Mrs. Delia Stone Bishop.... Ship Parthian
Rev. William Richards
Mrs. Clarissa Lyman Richards
Rev. Charles Samuel Stewart
Mrs. Harriet B. Tiffany Stewart
S41




342


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII
Mr. James Ely
Mrs. Louisa Everst Ely
Mr. Joseph Goodrich
Mrs. Goodrich
Abraham Blatchley, M.D.
Mrs. Jemima Marvin Blatchley
Mr. Levi Chamberlain
Mrs. Maria Patten Chamberlain.... Ship Parthian


THIRD COMPANY
Ship Parthian, arrived at Honolulu, March 29, 1828.
Rev. Lorrin Andrews
Mrs. Mary Wilson Andrews
Rev. Ephraim Weston Clark
Mrs. Mary Kittredge Clark
Mrs. Sarah H. Clark
Rev. Jonathan Smith Green
Mrs. Theodosia Arnold Green
Mrs. Asenath Cargil Green
Rev. Peter Johnson Gulick
Mrs. Fanny Hinckley Thomas Gulick
Gerritt Parmlee Judd, M.D.
Mrs. Laura Fish Judd
Mr. Stephen Shepard, Printer
Mrs. Margaret Caroline Stow Shepard
Miss Maria C. Ogden, Teacher
FOURTH COMPANY
Ship New England, arrived June 7, 1831.
Rev. Dwight Baldwin, M.D.
Mrs. Charlotte Fowler Baldwin
Rev. Sheldon Dibble
Mrs. Maria Tomlinson Dibble
2nd Mrs. Antoinette Tomlinson Dibble




APPENDIX


$43


Rev. Reuben Tinker
Mrs. Mary Throop Tinker
Mr. Andrew Johnstone
Mrs. Johnstone
FIFTH COMPANY
Ship Averick, arrived April, 1832.
Rev. William Patterson Alexander
Mrs. Mary Ann McKinney Alexander
Rev. Richard Armstrong
Mrs. Clarissa Chapman Armstrong
Rev. John S. Emerson
Mrs. Ursula Sophia Emerson
Rev. Cochran Forbes
Mrs. Rebecca Duncan Forbes
Rev. Harvey Rexford Hitchcock
Mrs. Rebecca Howard Hitchcock
Rev. Lorenzo Lyons
Mrs. Betsey Curtis Lyons
Mrs. Lucia G. Smith Lyons....Bark Mary Frazier
Rev. David Beldon Lyman
Mrs. Sarah Joiner Lyman
Rev. Ephraim Spalding
Mrs. Julia Brooks Spalding
Alonzo Chapin, M.D.
Mrs. Mary Ann Tenney Chapin
Mr. Edmund H. Rogers, Printer
Mrs. Mary Ward Rogers....Ship Parthian
Mrs. Elizabeth Hitchcock Rogers.. Ship Hellespont
Mr. Lemuel Fuller, Printer
SIXTH COMPANY
Ship Mentor, arrived April, 1833.
Rev. Benjamin Wyman Parker
Mrs. Mary Elizabeth Barker Parker




344


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


Rev. Lowell Smith
Mrs. Abba W. Tenney Smith
SEVENTH COMPANY
Ship Hellespont, arrived May, 1835.
Rev. Titus Coan
Mrs. Fidelia Church Coan
2nd Mrs. Lydia Bingham Coan
Mr. Henry Dimond, Bookbinder
Mrs. Ann Maria Anner Dimond
Mr. Edwin Oscar Hall, Printer and Assistant Circular Agent
Mrs. Sarah Lynn Williams Hall
2nd Mrs. M. L. D. Hall
Miss Lydia Brown, Teacher
EIGHTH COMPANY
Bark Mary Frazier, arrived June, 1837.
Rev. Isaac Bliss
Mrs. Emily Curtis Bliss
Rev. Daniel Toll Conde
Mrs. Andelusia Lee Conde
Rev. Mark Ives
Mrs. Mary Anna Brainerd Ives
Rev. Thomas Lafon, M.D.
Mrs. Sophia Louisa Parker Lafon
Mr. Edward Johnson
Mrs. Lois S. Hoyt Johnson
Seth Lathrop Andrews, M.D.
Mrs. Parmelly Pierce Andrews
Mr. Edward Bailey, Teacher
Mrs. Caroline Hubbard Bailey




APPENDIX
Mr. Samuel Northrup Castle, Secretary At
the Mission many years
Mrs. Angeline Loraine Tenney Castle
2nd Mrs. Mary Tenney Castle
Mr. Amos Starr Cooke
Mrs. Juliette Montague Cooke
Mr. Horton Owen Knapp, Teacher
Mrs. Charlotte Close Knapp
Mr. Edwin Locke
Mrs. Martha Laurens Rowell Locke
Rev. Charles McDonald
Mrs. Harriet Treadwell Halstead McDonald
Mr. Bethuel Munn, Teacher
Mrs. Louisa Clark Munn
Mr. William Sanford Van Duzee, Teacher
Mrs. Oral Hobart Van Duzee
Mr. Abner Wilcox
Mrs. Lucy Eliza Hart Wilcox
Miss Marcia Maria Smith, Teacher


345
gent of


NINTH COMPANY
Ship Gloucester, arrived May 22, 1841.
Rev. Daniel Dole
Mrs. Emily H. Ballard Dole
2nd Mrs. Charlotte Knapp Dole
Rev. Elias Bond
Mrs. Ellen Mariner Howell Bond
Rev. John D. Paris
Mrs. Mary Grant Paris
2nd Mrs. Mary Carpenter Paris
Mr. William Harrison Rice, Teacher
Mrs. Mary Sophia Hyde Rice




346


THIE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


TENTH COMPANY
Arrived about 1842.
James W. Smith, M.D.
Mrs. Millicent K. Smith
Rev. George Berkley Rowell
Mrs. Malvina J. Chapin Rowell
ELEVENTH COMPANY
Arrived about 1842.
Rev. Asa Bowen Smith
Mrs. Sarah Gilbert White Smith
TWELFTH COMPANY
Brig Globe, arrived about May, 1844.
Rev. Eliphalet Whittlesey
Mrs. Elizabeth Keene Whittlesey
Rev. Timothy Dwight Hunt
Mrs. Mary Hodge Hunt
Rev. John Fawcett Pogue
Mrs. Maria K. Whitney Pogue
Rev. Claudius Buchanan Andrews
Mrs. Anna Seward Gilson Andrews
2nd Mrs. Samantha G. Andrews
THIRTEENTH COMPANY
Ship Samoset, arrived about February 26, 1848.
Rev. Samuel Gelston Dwight
Rev. Henry Kinney
Mrs. Maria Louisa Walworth Kinney
FOURTEENTH COMPANY
Ship Chaica, arrived about December, 1854.
Rev. William Cornelius Shipman
Mrs. Jane Stobie Shipman




APPENDIX


347


FIFTEENTH COMPANY
Arrived about 1855.
Rev. William Otis Baldwin
Mrs. Mary Proctor Baldwin
INDIVIDUAL ARRIVALS
Arrived about September, 1860.
Rev. Cyrus Taggart Mills
Mrs. Susan Lincoln Mills
Arrived about March, 1849.
Charles Hinckley Wetmore, M.D.
Mrs. Lucy Sheldon Taylor Wetmore
Arrived about September, 1855.
Mr. William Avery Spooner
Mrs. Eliza Ann Boynton Spooner
BORN IN HAWAII
Rev. Anderson Oliver Forbes
Mrs. Maria Pattern Chamberlain Forbes
Rev. Luther Halsey Gulick
Mrs. Louisa Lewis Gulick (Born in New York City)
Rev. Orramel Hinckley Gulick
Mrs. Ann Eliza Clark Gulick
Prof. William De Witt Alexander
Mrs. Abbie Baldwin Alexander
Rev. Sereno Edwards Bishop
Mrs. Cornelia A. Sessions Bishop
Missionaries of the American Board to Micronesia, whose
base of supplies was Honolulu, and whose principal avenue
of connection with the world was the missionary vessel,
Morning Star:




348


THE PILGRIMS OF HAWAII


MISSION TO MICRONESIA
Missionaries
Arrived at Kusaie, August, 1852.
Rev. Benjamin Galen Snow
Mrs. Lydia Vose Buck Snow
Rev. Luther Halsey Gulick, M.D. Also mentioned as
Mrs. Louisa Lewis Gulick          Hasionari   to
Rev. Albert A. Sturges
Mrs. Susan Mary Thompson Sturges
Arrived at Ponape February, 1855.
Rev. Edward Toppin Doane
Mrs. Sarah Wells Wilbur Doane
2nd Mrs. Clara Hale Strong Doane
Arrived at Ponape October, 1855.
Rev. George Pierson, M.D.
Mrs. Nancy Annette Shaw Pierson
Arrived at Ponape September, 1857.
Rev. Hiram Bingham, 2nd
Mrs. Minerva Clarissa Brewster Bingham
Arrived at Ponape September, 1858.
Rev. Ephraim Peter Roberts
Mrs. Myra Holman Farrington Roberts




INDEX
This Index limits itself largely to such Hawaiian names and places
as are referred to in the preceding pages. As a rule, the names of
the Missionaries have not been presented here because they appear
in full in the Appendix, and because they receive such frequent
mention in the extended quotations which form the body of the book.


Adams, (Governor), 111,130,
132, 145, 178
Allen, 259
Armstrong, S. C., 56, 298
Auhea, (Kekauluohi), 185, 186
Auna, 95
Babcock, (Capt.), 83
Bartemeus, 155, 163, 183, 220,
221, 222
Barton, J. L., 6
Bennet, 91, 95, 98
Bicknell, 59, 272
Bishop, C. R., 257
Blanchard, (Capt.), 72, 75, 80
Blonde, (Ship), 106
Boki, (Governor), 81,84,89, 105,
127
Buckle, (Capt.) 114
Butler, B. F., 174
Byron, Lord, 104, 106
Byron's Bay, 182
California, 179, 243, 256, 273
Caroline Islands, 257, 260
Carrysfort, H. B. M. S., 216
Charlton, 98, 106
Clark, N. G., 302, 303, 304
Constellation, U. S. S., 217, 218


Cook, (Capt.), 18, 40, 84
Cyane, U. S. S., 238
Damon, S. C., 295, 315, 316
Diell, John, 148
Dillon, 259
Dole, S. B., 307, 309
Dublin, H. B. M. S., 216, 218
Du Pont, U. S. S., 238
Ellis, Wm., 17, 33, 36, 48, 91, 95,
96, 98, 99
Evarts, J., 110
Fatuhiwa, (Marquesas), 271
Geddie, 231
George IV, (King), 107
Gilbert Islands, 257
Grimes, (Capt.), 98
Gulick, L. H., 54, 312, 319
Haalilio, 208
Haiku, 183
Hawahewa, 77
Hawaiian Evangelical Association, 37, 276, 279, 312, 314
Hawaiian Mission Children's
Society, 312, 335


349




350


INDEX


Hewahewa, 77
Hill, Henry, 232
Hilo Boarding School, 55, 56,
154, 181, 190, 275, 277
Hoapili, 111, 114, 156, 169, 184,
189
Holmes, 84
Honolii, John, 25, 29, 30, 92, 131
Hopu, Thomas, 25, 29, 30, 71, 74,
76, 79, 80, 97
Hunnewell, James, 74, 91
Ii, John, 186, 205, 262
Ii, Sarah, 229
Independence, U. S. S., 243
Jones, (Consul), 89
Jubilee, (Fiftieth Year), 302
Kaahumanu, 34, 43, 44, 48, 95,
96, 97, 104, 105, 106, 111, 113,
122, 128, 134, 146
Kaikioewa, 101, 185
Kaili, 244
Kalakaua, David, (King), 57,
185, 304, 305, 306, 307
Kalama, S. P., 193
Kalanimoku, 75, 99, 104, 106,
107, 108
Kamakau, 102
Kamamalu, 43, 104
Kamehameha, I., 21, 82
Kamehameha II., (Liholiho), 41,
42, 43, 48, 49, 76, 78, 83, 89,
90, 91, 107, 176
Kamehameha III., (Kauikeaouli), 43, 44, 46, 49, 107, 184,
205, 304
Kamehameha IV., (Alexander
Liholiho), 57, 185, 304
Kamehameha V., (Lot), 57, 305
KCamehameha Schools, 51, 320


Kaniau, 107
Kapa, (Tapa), 228
Kapiolani, 49, 50, 96, 102, 103,
108, 129, 130, 192
Kapule, 108
Kaulia, 62
Kaumualii, 25, 30, 82, 89, 95, 97
Kauwealoha, Samuel, 58, 231,
269, 271, 272, 304
Kawaiahao Church, 156,249,303
Kawaiahao Female Seminary,
319
Kealakekua Church, 197
Kearney, (Commodore), 217,218
Keawe, 65, 66
Keeaumoku, 79
Kekauluohi, 50, 108, 186
Kekela, James, 58, 59, 60, 232,
269, 271, 296
Kekuanaoa, (Governor), 43, 50
Keopuolani, 48
Kilauea, 49
Kinau, 50, 139, 146, 185
Kohala Boys School, 212, 224,
320
Konohiki, 40
Kuaea, Moses, 19, 302
Kuakini, 123, 127
Kuhio, 96
Laanui, 108, 139
Lahainaluna, 55, 56, 149, 153,
175, 181, 182, 231, 317
Lama Hawaii, (first newspaper),
153
Laplace, (Capt.), 174
L'Artemise, (Frigate), 174
Liliuokalani, (Queen), 51, 57,307
Locke, E., 190, 206, 210
Lunalilo, (King), 57, 185, 305


Malo, David, 205, 269, 276




INDEX


351


Marin, 81
Marquesas, 39, 58, 59, 91, 144,
232, 270, 271, 273, 285, 312
Matunui, 270, 271
Mauna Kea, 16, 73
Mauna Loa, 196, 253, 311
Measles, 242
Meek, (Capt.), 83
Micronesia, 54, 267, 268, 270,
279, 286, 287, 297
Mills School, 319
Montreal, (Ship), 254
Morning Star, 282, 283, 284, 286,
287, 295, 296
Naihe, 96, 111
Naomi, 232
New Treaty, 209
Obookiah, 24
Oleson, W. B., 311, 320
Opiia, 107
Oregon, 178, 198
Pauahi, Bernice, 51, 185, 256
Paulet, Lord George, 213
Perrin, 259
Perry, (Commodore), 276
Pigot, (Capt.), 82
Prohibition, 205, 213, 218


Punahou School, 53, 56, 191, 192,
206, 213, 239, 260
Pursevant, (Ship), 259
Revival, The, 225
Rooke, Emma, 51, 304
Royal School, 56, 180, 185, 187,
205, 265
Sandalwood, 126, 329
Scriptures, 219
Severance, 259, 261
Simpson, Sir George, 210
Stockton, Betsey, 99
Taylor, T. E., 261, 262, 270
Tenui, William, 25, 29, 30
Thaddeus, (Brig), 71, 147, 297
Theological Training School, 317
Thomas, Admiral, 216. 218
Tyerman, 91, 95, 98
Victoria, 186
Victoria, (Packet), 288
Wailuku Girls School, 56, 156,
181, 231
Wilkes, Commodore, 200
Winship, 81
Wyllie, R. C., 232
Young, John, 42, 129, 135, 205


Printed in the United States of America




Z~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
I




I
I
I
I
I




To renew the charge ooought to 
TWO WEEK BOOK
DO NOT RETURN BOOKS ON SUNDAY


the desk.


DATE DUE


Form 7079 5-53 30M S




MON=
W imamW
vNIMMM
In




)  7
)7?r   ~